JP2019126431A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving interest of a game.SOLUTION: After an execution of a bet operation, a slot machine 10 starts rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on an operation on a start lever 41. Then, corresponding reels are stopped by operations on stop switches 42-44, and a stop combination according to a lottery result may stop. The lottery result sometimes causes shift to an advantageous section in which push order notification of a push order bell or a push order replay may be performed. Additional processing of the advantageous section and the additional notification based on an un-executed portion of additional notification may occur in a prescribed period of the advantageous section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

  Specifically, with respect to the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as gaming media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and it is stopped while the reel is rotating. When the switch is operated, the reel stops rotating. If the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
A plurality of orbiting bodies, in which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the orbiting bodies;
Start operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stopping the circulation of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery on whether or not to award a bonus to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
It is advantageous for the player to have a gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for transitioning to a specific advantageous state;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a low advantage state and a high advantage state are set, in which the player's advantage is relatively high and low,
Low advantage transition means for transitioning the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition;
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the high advantageous state;
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
First increase notification execution means capable of executing an increase notification of the increase process being performed by the predetermined notification means when the increase process is performed by the increase means;
Although the specific condition is satisfied, the increase processing is not executed by the increase unit, or the unexecuted component for which the increase notification is performed but the increase notification is not performed by the increase unit is grasped Grasping means,
Second increase notification execution means capable of executing, by a predetermined notification means, the increase notification about the unexecuted portion grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means during the predetermined specific advantageous state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 16 is a front view of the slot machine in the embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. It is a flow chart which shows reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd RT state lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a bonus state process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the prize-earning form which is materialized. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory view showing a transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of a display mode. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st identification combination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd identification combination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd identification combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specialization zones. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting difference of the main result and the winning probability which perform the drawing regarding an instruction | indication function. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode lottery table for display mode transfer. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for mode change information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of pushing order alerting | reporting production performed by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flow chart which shows pushing order processing processing. It is a flowchart which shows a prize result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows game number management processing. It is a flow chart which shows end judging processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of an instruction | indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flowchart which shows area display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number management process of remaining games. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game of an advantageous area, the completion game, and the display of an area indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flow chart which shows start effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification of pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between alerting | reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows all the stop time production | presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process during bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for transition opportunity notification. It is a flow chart which shows continuation production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of remaining games of an actual advantageous section, and the number of remaining games on a display. It is a figure which shows an example of a backpack lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting | reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for post-loading alerting | reporting. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of a rotation effect. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between a rotation effect and stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the 4th identification combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st pseudo effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo | simulation addition notification. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a deviation counter table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo freezing lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for instruction | indication lottery during BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB mode transition. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the mode transfer table during BB, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table during BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a top during BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between each rotation production and an additional notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd pseudo effects. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for pseudo | simulation superimposition during BB. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo addition table, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the difference between the addition and the pseudo addition. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference of a restriction | limiting object bonus and a restriction | limiting non-objective bonus. In Modification 1, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the BB pseudo addition process, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo addition table, and (c) is an example of the BB addition lottery table. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the various pseudo addition tables in the modification 2. In the modification 3, (a), (b) is a figure which shows an example of various pseudo | simulation superimposition tables, (c) is a figure which shows an example of a BB middle addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo addition table in the modification 4. In 2nd execution form, it is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize treatment corresponding processing for the BB winning game by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd pseudo effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo | simulation addition on BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process for freeze non-occurrence | production. (A) is a flowchart which shows the process for alert | reporting at the end of BB, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a figure for demonstrating the presence or absence of the addition in BB. It is a figure for demonstrating the presence or absence of the BB middle in a modification 1. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing processing for BB end notification by the main control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing attack processing end processing by the main control device. In the modification 3, (a) is a flowchart which shows the process for BB prize time by a main controller, (b), (c) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for pseudo | simulation superimposition in BB in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo addition table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional notification. It is a flowchart which shows area display 2nd processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a special presentation table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the difference between the top loading and the top loading. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by the auxiliary | assistant display part in the modification 1, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by the auxiliary | assistant display part in the modification 2. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a part of an extra notification process in Modification 3; 14 is a flowchart illustrating a post-notification process in Modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary | assistant display part.

First Embodiment
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT An embodiment of the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12, and FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 is provided with a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with the front open as a whole, and is attached by striking a nail or the like to a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. Then, in a state where the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the respective bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 is rotated about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by pivoting of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is brought into a locked state that cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper end on the right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. The game panel 25 is formed with three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be integrated into one and used as a common display window.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are disposed on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surface of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is projected as if it were moving from the top to the bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of 504 pulses, for example, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. It is controlled. In the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is output to the main controller 101 described later each time the reel is detected. For this reason, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R every rotation on the basis of the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps the symbols visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, or displays the display window. It is possible to perform control to stop a predetermined symbol at a position where it can be visually recognized from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Next, the symbols drawn on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Moreover, although the number is attached | subjected to 0-20 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, these symbols become a state in which the main control apparatus 101 can be visually recognized from display window 26L, 26M, 26R. , And are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As a symbol, a “red bell” symbol (for example, the seventh of the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the twentieth of the left reel 32L), a “first replay” symbol (for example, 19 of the left reel 32L) ), “Second replay” symbol (eg, sixth of left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (eg, tenth of left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (eg, eighth of left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (for example, 4th of left reel 32L), "black BAR" symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), "white BAR" symbol (for example, 17th of left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are eleven types of symbols (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L) and "youth" symbols (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed such that among the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, there are three symbols that allow the entire symbol to be visible. Therefore, in the state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified using a combination of three symbols, one for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, among the symbols that can be visually identified. As described above, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized, and as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. Combination of each symbol which stops in line L1, combination of each symbol which stops in middle line L2 which tied the middle step design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, it connects the lower pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R There are combinations of symbols that stop at the lower line L3. In addition, a combination of symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M There is a combination of each symbol which stops on a line L5 rising to the upper right of the symbol and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are combinations of symbols that stop at the bent line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above-mentioned lines L1 to L5 are lines which become straight lines when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which bending occurs in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. In addition, as combination of each pattern which stops to the line which bending generate | occur | produces, although it exists in addition to bending line L6, description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  Of these lines L1 to L6, a line activated and a line not activated are set according to the bet number of medals, and when the symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line As a winning establishment, a bonus is given, in which a predetermined number of medals serving as a game medium is paid out, or a bonus in which the gaming state is shifted is given. On the other hand, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no winning is established and the above-mentioned privilege is not granted.

  In the present slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8A, and the two lines of the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 as shown in FIG. 8B. There are a case where the combination line is an effective line and a case where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8C. More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is an effective line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, The line L3 and the lower right line L4 are effective lines. When one game is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is an effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2 and the upper right line L5 are not considered as effective lines. In the following, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is started, a two-bet game, a game started with one medal bet Also called a one-bet game.

  FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won and the benefit given when the symbol is won.

  As the small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a first small role winning to a 32nd small role winning.

  The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R are on the effective line When it stops, it becomes the first small role winning. When the first small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  Although the combination of the symbols for winning the second small role to the 26th small role is different, in the 3-bet game, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M “White BAR” design, “Red 7” design, “Cherry” design, “White Bell” design or “LUCKY” design, “White BAR” design, “Youth” design, “White Bell” design on the right reel 32R, The "red 7" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "white BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R stops at the lower If it does, it will be the 8th small role prize. As shown in FIG. 6, in the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol is disposed at the "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and the adjacent position (No. 12) on the upstream side, and in the right reel 32R. The "Red Bell" symbol is arranged at a position (No. 20) one symbol away from the "White BAR" symbol (No. 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the eighth small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right symbol The "red bell" symbol of the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the second small part winning to the 26th small part winning are established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 27th small part is a part in which whether or not to win is determined by a stop symbol of the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the “cherry” of the left reel 32L is determined. The twenty-seventh small winning combination is established by the symbol stopping at the upper or lower end. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L is upper or stopped, that is, the “cherry” symbol or the “second replay” symbol is on the active line. The 27th small role winning is established by stopping. When the 27th small role winning is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 28th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower level, and the “cherry” symbol may stop at the right downward line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a “cherry” symbol or “second replay” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “red bell” symbol, a “white bell” symbol or “cherry” symbol, the right reel 32R has a “cherry” symbol, When the “first replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol stops, the 28th small role prize is awarded. When the 28th small role winning is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The supplementary explanation of the relationship between the twenty-seventh small part and the twenty-eighth small part, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped Although the twenty-seventh small winning combination is realized, the twenty-eighth small winning combination may be established instead of the twenty-seventh small winning combination depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. In other words, although the winning mode for winning the 27th small role includes the winning mode for winning the 28th small role, the 27th small role winning and the 28th small role winning are clearly distinguished from each other. Is done.

  The 29th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. In other words, when the lower right line L4 is the effective line, the “watermelon” symbol stops in line with the lower right, and the 29th small winning combination is established. When the 29th small role winning is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 30th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" design of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" design of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" design of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 30th small It will be a winning combination. When the 30th small role winning is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  "Black BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" of left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol of middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol of right reel 32R or "white If the “Bell” symbol is stopped on the effective line, the 31st prize will be won. When the 31st small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the 32nd small role prize to the 35th small role prize are established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

  For example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the “watermelon” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M or the left reel 32L. The “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the “watermelon” symbol of the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line, which is a so-called stoppage of the so-called watermelon tempering stoppage. When the 36th small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  "Rel bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of left reel 32L, "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "cherry" symbol of middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol of right reel 32R, "white bell" symbol If the “Bell” symbol and the “Youth” symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small role prize is awarded. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol (No. 7) and the “second replay” symbol are arranged at the downstream adjacent position (No. 6). The "first replay" symbol is arranged at the bell "symbol (the third, the twelfth, the fifteenth and the twenty) and the downstream adjacent position (the second, the eleventh, the fourteenth and the nineteenth). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2, 5, 12, and 20) and the upstream adjacent positions (3, 6, 6, 16, and 0) The “replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol is arranged, and the “white bell” symbol (No. 10) and the “first replay” symbol are arranged at positions adjacent to the upstream side (No. 11). For this reason, when the 37th small role winning is established on the lower right line L4, the “bell” symbol and the “replay” symbol are mainly tempered on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M The “bell” symbol and the “replay” symbol do not stop. When the 37th small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  “White BAR” design, “Youth” design, “Watermelon” design, “First replay” design of the left reel 32L, “Red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, and “First replay” design of the right reel 32R, When the “watermelon” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol are stopped on the effective line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 4th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper to lower stages, The "red bell" symbol of the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. When the 38th small role winning is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, It becomes the 39th small role prize. The 39th small winning combination is a winning manner established only in the 3-bet game. When the 39th small winning combination is won, nine medals are paid out.

  When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 40th prize winning combination. The forty-fifth small winning combination is a winning manner established only in the 3-bet game. When the forty-fifth small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out.

  If the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol or “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small It will be a winning combination. When the 41st small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  As prizes to which a bonus for re-playing that can be played for the next game without inserting a medal is given, there are first to tenth game re-winnings. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-gaming win is established, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming When a winning or fifth re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state.

  State transition winnings in which only the game state transition is performed include a first BB winning, a second BB winning, and a CB winning.

  When the “red 7” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, it becomes the first BB winning, and the “white BAR” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. Will win the 2nd BB. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol of middle reel 32M, "watermelon" symbol of right reel 32R, "first replay" symbol, "black BAR" When the symbol and stop on the effective line, it will be a CB prize. When the CB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stopping point at which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “white BAR” symbol, the “LUCKY” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, the “white bell” symbol, “ When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the “red bell” or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, the “white BAR” symbol, the “young” symbol, and the “white bell” symbol of the right reel 32R. , “Red 7” symbol and “Second Replay” symbol also stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Below, the combination of each said symbol is called a transition outcome.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

  Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected. And main controller 101 grasps that operation of stop switches 42-44 was performed based on the detection signal from stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, detection signals of LOW signals are outputted from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of the signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. When it is determined that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 performs control so as to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

  That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, focusing on the point that the medal insertion slot 45 involves an operation of inserting the medal directly by the player, it can be said to constitute direct input means for directly inputting a game medium.

  A medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 provided on the back of the front door 12 as passage switching means. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited, the medal is switched Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal led to the storage passage 47 is led to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to the medal receiver 50 and returned to the player.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to a player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 48 a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, a reserve tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guiding plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

  Below the medal insertion slot 45, a button-shaped return switch 55 is provided. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically operated so that the medal jammed in the selector 46 becomes a medal. It is returned from the discharge port 49.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as gaming media at one time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. It should be noted that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, whereas each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. For example, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

  Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 operated at the time of effect generation is provided. That is, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right of the effect switch 66. There is.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored and stored condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as an actual medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as a real medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display unit 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals and a remaining payout number for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are constituted by 7-segment displays, but it is of course possible to substitute them by liquid crystal displays or the like.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and announcing the operation order There is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the winning ratio of the small winning combination is changed and the game can be progressed in the advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that produce various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the gaming state. The speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects with the progress of the game, and in the present embodiment, since the game by the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be by the main display unit This is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65.

  A power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, when the hole manager or the like inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turns it on, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set. The reset switch 72 is operated not only to reset the error state but also to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that manages and manages games is attached to the housing 11.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagrams of FIG. 12 and FIG.

  In the main control device 101, a microcomputer having a CPU 102 as an arithmetic processing unit is mounted. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main base incorporated in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41 are provided. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. The operation of the input switch 58 is detected individually. 3) The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON when the credit insertion detection sensor 58a, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73 a for detecting the above are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

  Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91 b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power-off state and generates a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also when the power switch 71 powers off. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power is shut off when the drive voltage is reduced to, for example, less than 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. A power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes a power failure process described later by recognizing this power failure signal. Further, the power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage decreases to less than 10 volts. As a time when the stabilized voltage is output, a time sufficient for the main control apparatus 101 to execute the power failure process is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a medal path switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, an external concentration terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like are provided via the input / output port 104. Is connected.

  The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the clock, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as timer circuits and data transmission / reception circuits as well as interrupt circuits as well known, although not shown, a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage unit, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

  The RAM 106 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when performing stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game information, the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut off (including the power shut off by the operation of the power switch 71. The same applies to the following) when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71. The same applies to the following), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information of the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  Further, a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is shut off, NMI interrupt processing as power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is mounted with a microcomputer having a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 181 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

  The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. The upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main controller 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-base for executing auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 which is a main base for managing and managing the game. That is, by providing sub-bases for sounds, lamps, and displays regarding indirect game play, the burden on the main base is reduced.

  On the input side of the display control device 81, a rendering switch 66 (more specifically, a rendering switch detection sensor that detects an operation of the rendering switch 66) is connected. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be drive-controlled by the display control device 81.

  Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, a process related to the progress of the game among these processes, that is, a timer interrupt process and a normal process performed in the main process will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control apparatus 101. A timer interrupt is generated, for example, every 1.49 msec by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101.

  First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, and a power failure process is executed.

  Here, an outline of the power failure process will be described.

  When the power is shut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the transmission is not completed, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port at the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in preparation for the fact that the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the output of the power failure signal is continued, it enters an infinite loop as it is. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output even under an infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the main processing is performed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

  That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor that is a respective rotating drum driving motor is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. A sensor monitoring process for monitoring the above is performed. In step S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 121 is performed.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting processing is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68 to display corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102, respectively. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

  Next, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S201, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

  As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random value used in the previous game) is cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any re-game winning is established in the previous game. If one of the re-game winnings has been established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting virtual medals the same number as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing for automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed, and a replay win is achieved in a 1-bet game The process of automatically inserting the virtual medal is performed.

  In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any re-game winning is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interruption process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 is operated, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals I do.

  After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal input or the credit input switch 56 to 58 is operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If any one of the bet numbers is determined, the medal insertion process is performed to change the bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. If neither medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

  After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number. In the slot machine 10, “2” is set as the specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) “1” and “3” are set as the prescribed numbers in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is “2”, and on the condition other than the CB state, the bet number is “1” or “3”. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medal is bet or if the bet number is “2” even if the bet is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. When the bet number has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality check process is performed among the processes.

  If the bet number has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S206, the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side includes the bet command including the information of the process result of step S206 and the information of the bet number that is positively determined in step S205. Set as output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S207, it is determined whether the start lever 41 was operated in step S208. When the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed among the processes.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted. Means that a command has occurred. In such a case, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are set as active lines. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

  Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, a random number to be used when performing a pass / fail determination of the winning combination is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, the random number can be acquired promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is selected is selected. The slot machine 10 is roughly divided into six game states: a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. It is set for each gaming state.

  More specifically, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the bet number is “3” and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is displayed. select. Further, in the slot machine 10, there are prepared in six stages the winning probability from "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and perform a predetermined operation. Thus, it is possible to set which internal process is to be executed based on which of the winning probabilities. In step S302, the lottery table with the lowest expectation value of medal payout is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table with the highest expectation value of medal payout is selected when "setting 6".

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

  The winning probability setting process is executed in a main process activated by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, in the process of setting the winning probability, when the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted in the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON, the power is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated, for example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, “setting 1” → “setting 2” → Update the setting value so that “setting 3” → “setting 4” → “setting 5” → “setting 6” → “setting 1”. Each set value is displayed on the credit display unit 60, for example, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the fact that the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. The display of the credit display unit 60 is also ended based on the end of the setting process of the winning probability. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is activated. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting value.

  The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state which is selected in the normal gaming state of “setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV.

  After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is set in subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1 which is the current index value IV is added to the random number value to obtain a new value. The judgment value is set to DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. It is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535 in the success or failure determination of the winning combination. If 65535 is exceeded, it is determined in step S306 whether one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV = 32 to 52) including any of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. When a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing of step S307, the winning flag of each small role corresponding to the index value IV determined positive in step S305 is displayed in the winning flag storage area in step S308. The process set in 106a is executed. For example, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small winning combination flag, the 33rd small winning combination flag, the third winning combination flag in step S308 Set the 35 small role winning flag. When the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

  By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag (first BB winning flag) indicating that the first BB has been won or the winning flag (second BB winning flag) indicating that the second BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a is displayed. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning is achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be validated over a plurality of games.

  In steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB, second BB, or CB is won, the corresponding win flag is set. If no winning combination other than 2nd BB, CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

  That is, for example, in the state where the 1BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the 1BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small role winning flag is set. , The 33rd small role winning flag and the 35th small role winning flag are set. Further, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33 in a state in which the first BB winning flag is carried over, the second BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small winning combination flag, the 33rd The small role winning flag and the 35th small role winning flag are set.

  In addition, a lottery table in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over is prepared separately, and in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, a lottery process is performed using the separately prepared lottery table. May be configured to In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so that the first BB, the second BB, and the CB are not won.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether the determination is yes or no, the process returns to step S304, and the determination of the combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used to determine the success or failure of the previous combination to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S305, whether or not a winning combination is made is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing determination of the combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 7.3, strong cherry The probability of winning a prize (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. is there. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218 minutes 1. Probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252, probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 252 It is a fraction. The probability of winning in the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/3200, and the probability of winning unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65,500 minutes 1. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21-24) is about 43.7, respectively. The probability of winning 1 (1) middle pressed bell 2, 2 right pressed bell, and 2 right pressed bell (probability of winning when IV = 25 to 28) is about 12.8. The probability of winning in strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is The probability of winning in weak cherry overlap 1 (about probability of winning in case of IV = 34) is about 1/2800 in about 21800, probability of winning in weak cherry overlap 2 (in the case of IV = 35) The probability of winning is about 1/32800. The probability of winning in strong watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning strong watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning in weak watermelon duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/65500, and the probability of winning in weak watermelon duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 65500. The probability of winning in the chance A duplication 1, chance A duplication 2, chance B duplication 1 and chance B duplication 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 40 to 43) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the middle bell overlap 1 and the middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 44, 45) is about 1 / 800th, respectively. The probability of winning in Special Lip A Overlap 1 (probability of winning in IV = 46) is about 1 in 1010, probability of winning in Special Lip A Overlap 2 (probability of winning in case of IV = 47) ) Is about 1 in 1310. The probability of winning a Special Lip AB duplicate 1 (probability of winning at IV = 48) is about 1/10 1010, the probability of winning a Special Lip AB duplicate 2 (probability of winning at IV = 49) ) Is about 1 in 1310. The probability that the first BB and the second BB will be independently won (the probability of winning when IV = 50, 51) is about 1/3200, respectively. The probability of winning a CB (the probability of winning when IV = 52) is about 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing without winning any of the roles is about 1.96.

  In the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for point values PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, 53 to 56. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, these index values IV are not won.

  After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning combination determination has ended. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and freeze lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

  In subsequent step S312, a lottery result handling process is performed. In the lottery result handling processing, processing of whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the result of the lottery in step S301 to step S311, processing for notification of pushing order, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After the process of step S312 is executed, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the combination determination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In step S314, stop information setting processing for setting a stopable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the lottery result of the current game is executed. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when the strong cherry is won (selected when IV = 13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th, 32nd and 35th small winning combinations are each reel 32L. , 32M, 32R are set so that the stop symbol information can be stopped. Also, if the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (selected when IV = 32) and the strong cherry win flag and the first BB win flag are set, the 28th, 33rd, 35th and 35th prizes Stop symbol information is set so that the symbol corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  In the subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority order is executed. For example, in the case where a plurality of role types are selected among the small role, replay, and bonus types, the following priority order is set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the priority is set so that the bonus winning can be established when the small winning combination can not be established so that the small winning combination can be established preferentially. . When replays and bonuses are won, priority is set so that replay wins are established with priority.

  For example, when the winning cherry duplicate 1 is won and the setting of the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, 35th and 1st BB winnings is performed, the 28th is more than the 1st BB winning. The priority order is set so that the small combination, the 33rd small combination, and the 35th small combination winning are established with priority. In addition, when the special lip A overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the ninth regame and the first BB winning is set, the ninth regame winning is established with priority over the first BB winning. Set the priority as follows. And, for example, when the first BB winning is carried over, and when the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB winning and the first replay winning is set, the first BB winning is more than the first BB winning. (1) Set priority so that priority is given to reappearance winnings.

  Here, in the case where the player has won the replay, a combination of symbols to be won is set such that any replay among the replays that have been won will always be won. That is, when the player has won the re-game, the re-game winning is always established and no dropout occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information of replay and bonus is set, any one of the set replays will always be established, and no bonus winning will be established.

  In addition, when a plurality of small roles or a plurality of replays are won, the symbol corresponding to which small role or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing at which the stop operation is performed. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th small role and 41st small role winning is set, the 30th small role and the 41st small role are left as described above. The target symbol of the reel 32L is common to the “watermelon” symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small winning combination is established. On the other hand, the target symbols for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are "red bell" symbols for the 30th small part and for the 41st small part, the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols The right reel 32R has a “watermelon” design. For example, in the 3-bet game, in the middle reel 32M, when the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol from the fourth "watermelon" symbol reaches the middle, The seventh "red bell" symbol which is the target symbol of the small part and the "black BAR" symbol which is the target symbol of the 41st small part can be stopped in the middle on the effective line It becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that symbols with a small number of slips are preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the “red bell” symbol stops in the middle, the 41st small role winning is not established, and the 30th small role can be won.

  On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the twelfth "red bell" symbol from the eighth "black BAR" symbol reaches the middle stage, the target of the 41st small winning combination Stop the 8th “Black BAR” design, the 11th “Cherry” design, and the 12th “Red Bell” design that is the subject of the 30th small role in the middle. Is possible. Also in this case, the setting of the stop symbol information is performed to give priority to stopping the symbol having a small number of slips, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle, The 30 small winning combination will not be established, and the 41st small winning combination can be won.

  The same applies to the right reel 32R, and at the timing when the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol which is the target symbol of the 30th small part and the "watermelon" which is the target pattern of the 41st small part The setting of the stop symbol information is performed such that the symbol with a small number of slips is stopped at the lower end of the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed at the timing when the sixth “first replay” symbol and the seventh “black BAR” symbol reach the effective position, “watermelon” Neither the symbol nor the “red bell” symbol can be stopped, and in this case, any small winning combination is not established, and so-called “dropout” will be made.

  After the process of step S315 is performed, the section display first process is performed in step S316, and then the lottery process is ended. The section display first process is a process related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later.

  Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using the reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. The rotation effect process will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

  In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel starts rotating in the previous game, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed Wait until When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process is ended. In addition, when the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Is notified to a player or the like.

  Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. When none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. To do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol which has reached the base position (in the present embodiment, the lower part) is confirmed at the timing when the stop switch is operated. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol reaching the base position is confirmed by the excitation pulse number output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base position as it is is supported. To stop after sliding 1 reel of reels, stop after stopping by sliding 2 reels, stopping after sliding 3 stops, and stopping after sliding 4 reels There are prepared five patterns of stop modes. Therefore, in step S407, one of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined. At step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If it is equal, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed at step S410. Do. Thereafter, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412 and the process returns to step S403.

  Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop appearance of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when IV = 24 to 31 is won, that is, forward-pressing bell 1, forward-pressing bell 2, pinching-pressing bell 1, pinching-pressing bell 2, center-pressing bell 1, center-pressing bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated stop commands are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set such that the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination or the ninth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, stop information is set so that the first small role winning is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time, the second small winning combination is obtained. Stop information is set so that a winning combination or a ninth small winning combination is established. However, even if stop information is set in this way, a corresponding winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in the gaming state other than the CB state (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by up to four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the interval between similar symbols is arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective when it becomes the winning symbol regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so that a section separated by 5 symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the active line.

  An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop so as to establish the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination.

  The second small symbol in the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Moreover, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a seventh small symbol, and also have a function as a ninth small symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second small role symbols (seventh small role symbols, ninth small role) are arranged so that the interval between them becomes four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the fourth "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in Fig. 20A, the seventh "red bell" The symbol stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small part winning, the seventh small winning, or the ninth small winning on the right-down line L4.

  The second small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, a "white BAR" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small symbol of the middle reel 32M is "red 7". On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol or the ninth small role symbol stops on the active line, or the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol, None of the ninth small role symbols stop on the active line.

  Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the 13th "first replay" symbols to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol “white BAR” stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward right line L4. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the "second replay" symbols of the ninth to the thirteenth "first replay" symbols reaches the lower stage. The “red 7” symbol, which is the seventh small role symbol, stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any of the 6th “white bell” design to the 10th “youth” design has reached the lower stage, the 9th small role design, the “cherry” design, To stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, the second small role symbol, the seventh small role symbol, and the ninth small role symbol are displayed even if the middle reel 32M is slid for four symbols and then stopped. It cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at this timing, the second "LUCKY" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle.

  When the seventh small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the seventh small role winning can be established.

  The seventh small role symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white bell" symbol is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small symbol stops or does not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any one of the "first replay" symbols No. 6 to 10 "white bell" symbols reaches the lower part, as shown in FIG. 20 (c). As shown in, the "small white bell" symbol, which is the seventh small part symbol, stops at the bottom. As a result, a seventh small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the third "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), the fourth "watermelon" symbol is Stop at the bottom. From the left, the combination of “red bell” symbol, “red 7” symbol, and “watermelon” symbol is a transitional outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed so that the 9th small role winning can be established in the stop information second setting process.

  The ninth small role symbol of the right reel 32R is the “youth” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "youth" symbol is arranged at the 15th position. Therefore, the ninth small combination symbol stops or does not stop on the effective line depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the 11th “first replay” design to the 15th “young” design reaches the lower stage, it is the 9th small role design. The “Youth” design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition item as shown in FIG.

  When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small role winning can be established.

  The second small combination symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small bonus symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small combination symbol "Tall" The “White BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition point as shown in FIG.

  When the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol and the ninth small symbol of the middle reel 32M did not stop in the middle, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stopped in the middle In the case of the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage.

  On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged so that the interval between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol (“red bell” symbol), “LUCKY” symbol (“white bell” symbol), and “watermelon” symbol (“first replay” symbol) is transferred as shown in FIG. It is an eye.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the seventh small combination is achieved. One of a case where a winning is achieved, a case where a ninth small role winning is established, and a case where the transitional outcome is stopped.

  Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

  On the middle reel 32M, the "small red bell" symbol, which is the first small combination symbol, is arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the left reel 32L, the first small symbol "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol are arranged such that the distance between the first small symbols is 4 or less. For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the right reel 32R, the first small symbol "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol are arranged such that the distance between the first small symbols is four or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

  When the push order bell is won, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined one or two operation order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination winning will be established or the transition point on the active line will be stopped by the operation timing. Incidentally, when the middle bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and the operation timing, and when the bell is won regardless of the operation order and the operation timing, 1Small character winning combination is established.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the payout number of medals as one of the conditions that the combination of winning symbols is arranged on the active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stop symbols stopped at the lower part of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a winning is realized on the effective line judge. If a winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination is associated with the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination is associated with the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed while the slot machine 10 is set in an error state. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  After performing the payout determination process, a winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After the winning result corresponding process is performed, the section display second process is executed in step S415. The section display second process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S416, a winning result command is set to make the display control device 81 recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing is ended.

  Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

  In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that the small winning combination has not been established. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any one of the first to eighth replays has been established. If any re-game winning is not established, the medal payout processing is ended as it is, and if any re-playing winning is established, the re-play setting processing for changing the gaming state to the re-playing state is performed. , Finish the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. With regard to the payout of medals, specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition Display on the credit display unit 60. Also, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during addition of the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to discharge medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal receiver 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of remaining payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number-of-payouts display portion 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, the RT state process of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether the transition point has stopped on the valid line. If the transition outcome has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Thereafter, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and based on the winning establishment combination set in the previous payout determination process, the second replay win is performed. It is determined whether or not it is established. When the second replay winning combination is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Thereafter, this process is terminated. If the transition to the active line is stopped under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and in step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and the process ends.

  When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the first RT setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the first RT state lottery table is selected. Do.

  FIG. 22 is a first RT state lottery table selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the normal gaming state lottery table (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 1 to 5, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when the winning / failing determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 6 to 56 is equal to the winning probability in the normal gaming state, and winning in the case of IV = 1. The probability of becoming is approximately 1 / 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 32.8. The probability of losing none of the roles is about 1.94.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22, when the player wins when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and when the player wins when IV = 2, the first promoted replay 1 wins, and the IV The first promotion Replay 2 is won if it is won in the case of = 3, and the first promotion Replay 3 is won if it is elected in the case of IV = 4 and it is won in the case of IV = 5 If so, the first promotion replay 4 is won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal gaming state is also approximately 1 / 7.30. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the first RT state, a winning mode in which each of the small role, replaying, and bonus types is won with the same probability as the normal gaming state, while a replaying privilege is given. Changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first replaying winning with no transition to the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first replaying winning, the third replaying winning to shift to the second RT state To establish.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is issued not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promoted replay 1 to the first promoted replay 4 are won. The stop information is set to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 which has been made.

  FIG. 23A is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. Unlike the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push bell is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or The third replay prize will be established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

  In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, none of the above-described six operation sequences is associated with the sixth replay to the eighth replay. Therefore, the sixth to eighth replays do not win regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if they have won the first promotion replays 2 to 4.

  More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first. The third replay is distributed in addition to the sixth replay, the first promotion replay 3 is the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is Although the eighth replay is distributed in addition to the first replay and the third replay, whichever first promotion replay 1 to 4 is, the replays to be won are the first replay and the third replay. It has become one of the games. This is for the purpose of making it difficult to understand the operation sequence in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is also one, and the third replay win is intentionally achieved when the first promotion replay is won. Because it is possible to In addition, this relationship is not limited to only the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said of the other overlapping players.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay win is not established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning establishment combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not a third replay prize has been established. If the third game winning combination is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the present process is ended. To do.

  If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the setting of the second RT setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. Do.

  FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when a winning / failing determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 11 to 56 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning in the case of IV = 1. The probability of being won is about 13.2 and not winning when IV = 2-5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 10.5, IV = 9, respectively. , 10, the probability of winning is about 1/00. The odds of not winning any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the state shifts to the second RT state, the probability of coming off is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state, the second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game prize that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game prize Winning is established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the winning of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above, the fall replay 1 to the fall fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

  FIG. 23B is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first regame prize or the second regame prize is always established. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame prize, the fourth regame prize, and the fifth regame prize is surely established. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first regame prize or the fourth regame prize is always established.

  In addition, the number attached | subjected to the 4th regame in a figure respond | corresponds with the symbol combination at the time of the 4th regame winning a prize being established. “1” corresponds to a symbol combination that becomes a disjointed pattern, and “2” corresponds to a symbol combination that stops the middle stage of red 7, red 7, and black BAR (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination serving as the loose game is stopped and the fourth game win is achieved, or red 7・ Red 7 · Black BAR The symbol combination that is in the middle stop is stopped, and the fourth re-game winning combination is established.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third regame winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is established. If the fourth regame prize and the fifth regame prize are not established, the present process is terminated as it is. If the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. And the process ends.

  If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. Do.

  FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 9 to 12, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when the winning combination determination is performed using the lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 56 is equal to the winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9, 10 The probability of winning at IV = 11, 12 will be about 7.00, respectively. The odds of not winning any of the roles is about 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the winning mode is such that each of the small role, replaying, and bonus types is won with the same probability as the second RT state, and a regaming privilege is given. Changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state and the second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, the sixth re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state, The seventh replay winning, the eighth replaying win, and the third replay win transitioning to the second RT state are established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode is changed according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set stop information as much as possible.

  FIG. 23C is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. When BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first re-game prize, the sixth re-game prize, the seventh re-game prize, and the third re-game prize Is always true. When BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first re-game prize, the sixth re-game prize, the eighth re-game prize, and the third re-game prize Is always true.

  Next, the bonus state process of step S215 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

  In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out in the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

  The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol, the "first replay" symbol or the "black BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R When, stops on the active line, a CB winning is obtained. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R such that the interval between CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when CB is won, CB winning is established regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the medal bet number has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the valid line setting processing (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4. Is set as the active line.

  In step S302 of the lottery process, the CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for CB state, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 52, and “16384” as the point value of IV = 53 to 56. Is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning in CB small and medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 53) is approximately 1/40 and the probability of winning in CB small and medium winning combination 2 (IV = 54) The probability of winning at the time of 1) is approximately 4.00, and the probability of winning the CB middle and small role 3 (probability of winning at IV = 55) is approximately 1 / 4.00 and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 56) is about 4.00. No deviating event occurs.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory view showing the correspondence between the winning combination and the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, no matter which CB medium role 1 to CB medium role 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some small role winning It must be true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals are awarded when the first small role winning, the 27th small role winning, the 31st small role winning, the 36th small role winning through the 38th small role winning is achieved. When a payout is made and a second small part prize to a 26th small part prize, a 28th small part prize to a 30th small part prize, a 32nd small part prize to a 35th small part prize is established, 14 pieces are awarded. Medals are paid out. That is, when it shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as the winning combination and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that can execute one game (JAC game) as the winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning) SB state that shifts based on

  Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning is not established, it means that a bonus winning flag other than CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established.

  If any BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. Flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout number display unit 61 is caused to display 216. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or larger than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state.

  By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the BB setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

  FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table selected in the BB state that is shifted in the first BB or the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 28 and 32-56, and “21845” is set as the point value of IV = 29 to 31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first combination during BB (the probability of winning when IV = 29) is about 1/11 and the probability of winning the second combination during BB (IV = Probability of winning when 30) is about 1 / 20.0, and the probability of winning third role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1 / 20.0. It becomes. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/65500.

  The winning probability of the first role in BB, the second role in BB, and the third role in BB is a winning probability common to the first BB and the second BB. In addition, the winning probability of the first role in BB, the second role in BB, and the third role in BB is a common winning probability regardless of the transition to the BB status of the first BB or the second BB, for example, The winning probability of the third role in BB in the first BB based on the Special Trip A Overlap 1 winning and the third role in BB in the first BB based on the Special Trip AB Overlap 1 winning is the same probability. That is, in any of the BB states, the common BB state lottery table is referred to and the lottery process is performed.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when winning the first role in BB, regardless of the operation sequence and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first small winning combination, the 39th small winning combination and the 40th small winning combination It always holds. Further, the ninth regame winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the second combination is won in BB, the ninth re-game winning is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  Depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the third role in BB, which enables the ninth and tenth replays, differs depending on the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are established. If any winning is possible when the stop operation is performed, the stop driving control is performed so that the replay with the smaller number of slips wins. More specifically, combinations of symbols for which the ninth replay and the tenth replay are winnings are common to the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol in the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. On the other hand, the left reel 32L is different. That is, in the left reel 32L, the target symbol of the ninth replay is the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbol of the tenth replay is the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol .

  For example, in the 3-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol from the fourth "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper stage, the ninth replay Although it is possible to stop the seventh "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol and the eighth "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the tenth replay, it is possible to stop in the upper row that is on the effective line, In this case, the stop drive control is performed so that the seventh “red bell” symbol with a small number of slips is stopped at the upper stage. As a result, the ninth regame prize can be established instead of the tenth regame prize. In addition, in the left reel 32L, also when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the 12th "white bell" symbol from the 9th "red 7" symbol reaches the upper stage, similarly, the 13th "youth" "9th Replay is set to be more easily achieved than 10th Replay, such as driving control is performed so that the 12th" White Bell "symbol is stopped at the upper row, not the symbol. That is, if it is intended to win the tenth game, left at the timing when the 0th "youth" symbol, the 8th "watermelon" symbol and the 13th "youth" symbol reach the top of the left reel 32L It is necessary to perform the stop operation of the stop switch 42, and at the other timing, the ninth game winning combination will be established.

  Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, the first winning combination in BB is won, and nine medals are paid out when the first small winning combination, the 39th small winning combination, and the 40th small winning combination are established. . In addition, if the second combination winning in BB is achieved, the ninth re-game winning is established, and even if the third winning combination in BB is achieved, the ninth re-game winning is established in many cases. In other words, in the BB state, either a bell winning of the first small role or a replay winning as the ninth replay is frequently established. When a replay winning is established, a medal is not paid out, but a replay is given and the next game can be executed without a medal. Since the probability of detachment in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609 and one of the BB wins is established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry over command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 to make it possible to grasp that the bonus winning is not established in the bonus winning game and the so-called carry over state is established, and the carry over command is a timer interrupt process. Is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the game performed in the carryover state, winning of other bonus is limited. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus of IV = 32 to 49 (first BB, second BB, CB) or the like is won, it corresponds to these bonuses. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a winning combination with each small role or replay of IV = 32 to 49, the winning flag for each small role or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is Only the small role winning is valid without being set. That is, the carry over state may be said to be a state in which the bonus lottery is limited.

  If the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout amount counter becomes 0, and when it becomes 0, processing is performed to clear the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag. In the end determination processing, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

  As shown in steps S602 to S614, when a CB is won and a CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the gaming state when the CB winning is established is restored. For example, when a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the CB state ends, and when a CB winning is achieved under the third RT state, the third RT state is completed after the CB state ends. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. For this reason, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state is ended, even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state, the state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, when transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (= 9 × 24−3 × 24) medals until the BB state ends.

  Incidentally, in the BB state, when the second combination in BB or the third combination in BB is won and a replay is given, the remaining payout counter is not subtracted. That is, the number of times the BB second position in BB or the third position in BB is won does not affect the expected medal increase number in the BB state.

  When none of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), the first BB winning, the second BB winning, and the CB winning are not established and carry over When a command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter at steps S605 and S612, when an end determination process is performed at step S614, In step S606, the status command is set. Here, the state command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming state at the end of the game (that is, the gaming state of the next game). In step S606, the state information storage area A status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, external signal setting processing for setting an external signal to be output from the external concentrated terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

<Overview of transition of gaming state and display mode>
Here, transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. The illustration of the CB state is omitted.

  When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out in the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the first RT state by stopping the transition outcome on the valid line, and the gaming state is shifted to the BB state by the BB winning being established. The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In the lottery process using the normal gaming state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 that trigger transition to the second RT state and the second promoted replays 1 and 2 that trigger transition to the third RT state do not win. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

  When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23A). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, since the second promotion replays 1 and 2 serving as a transition trigger to the third RT state are not won, the first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

  If the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is When the corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. From the first RT state, there is no transition to the third RT state.

  When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome is stopped on the active line. The fourth regame winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23B). )reference). The second regame winning is established when one of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag When the corresponding BB winning is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state is shifted to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning combination. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome is stopped on the active line. The third replay win is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23C). The second regame winning is established when one of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is When the corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of gaming states, the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. The main control device 101 manages five display modes, that is, an attack mode (including an additional specialization zone), a VB mode (including an additional specialization zone), and a BB mode.

  FIG. 30 shows the transition of each display mode.

  The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when transitioning to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 medals.

  When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, there may be a transition lottery to the challenge mode and a lottery to the attack mode in the BB mode. When winning the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the mode shifts to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and when winning the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode, the mode shifts to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lotteries is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the mode is changed from the attack mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode. When transitioning from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VB mode after the BB mode ends.

  In the normal mode, when push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1 promotion promotion 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order replay”). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. When a lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the transition from the normal mode to the challenge mode is made, and when a transition to the attack mode is won, the transition from the normal mode to the attack mode is made. It does not shift to VB mode from normal mode.

  The normal mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing order bell winning and at the time of pushing order replay winning, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state, This corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 per game, and the gaming state at that time will be the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for every game played.

  As in the normal mode, the challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of push order bell winning and at the time of push order replay play. In the challenge mode, a transition lottery to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, in the challenge mode, although the notification of the operation order is not performed as in the normal mode, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. When winning the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the mode shifts from the challenge mode to the attack mode. When a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times) are played without winning the above-mentioned transfer lottery, the mode is changed from the challenge mode to the normal mode. It does not shift to VB mode from challenge mode.

  The challenge mode corresponds to the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing the order replay, transition to the second RT state and the third RT state is rare, and it corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. Will be. In the challenge mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 per game, and the gaming state at that time will be the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in any of the pressing order bell winning case and the pressing order replay winning case. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, in which the transition probability to the VB mode is different. In either attack mode, the VB mode is selected in comparison with the normal mode. The transition probability of is getting higher. Transition to VB Mode When winning the lottery, the transition from the attack mode to the VB mode is made. When the game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times etc.) without winning the lottery to the VB mode, the mode is shifted from the attack mode to the normal mode.

  The first to fourth attack modes are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode is the highest and the first attack mode is the lowest, and the first attack mode, the second attack mode In the order of the third attack mode and the fourth attack mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be high.

  The attack mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified at any of the pushing order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning, so that the stop switch 42 is operated in the operation order notified by the player. When 〜44 is operated, it corresponds approximately to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medal increases by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.90 medals are increased each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

  Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both in the push order bell win and in the push order replay win. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that, when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation sequence for establishing the first game win is informed. In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified (see FIG. 23B).

  The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is informed in any of the pushing order bell winning state and the pushing order Replay winning state, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is elected When it becomes, the operation order for establishing the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning is informed. For this reason, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order notified by the player. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medal increases by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that approximately 1.90 medals are increased each time one game is played. In the VB mode, since at least 25 games are continued after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

  The transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases will be explained. The general flow is that the mode is changed from the normal mode to the challenge mode, the challenge mode is changed to the attack mode, and the attack mode is returned to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for the transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the transition is made from the attack mode to the VB mode and the mode returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. it can.

  As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

  The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probabilities of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode are different in each attack mode. Then, when transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, basically the transition to the first attack mode is made. In the first attack mode, a transition lottery to the VB mode is performed, and a transition lottery to the second attack mode is performed. When winning the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode, the player shifts to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a transition lottery to the VB mode is performed, and a transition lottery to the third attack mode is performed. When the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the player shifts to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a transition lottery to the VB mode is performed, and a transition lottery to the fourth attack mode is performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

  Therefore, when transitioning to the attack mode, by promoting the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode, the transition probability to the VB mode becomes high, and the attack A loop between mode and VB mode is likely to occur.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player is configured to increase the possessed medals in the display modes of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state come and go by stopping the winning or transition of each re-game or the like. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 at the time of winning the push on replay and the push on the bell, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition outcome is stopped. Further, in the attack mode or the VB mode, an increase in the number of owned medals can be expected by notifying the operation order that allows the first small role winning to be established at the time of pushing order bell winning.

  Hereinafter, a configuration related to the display mode will be described.

  The configuration relating to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing relating to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result And (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

<Process on transition drawing of display mode>
<Drawing result handling process>
The processing relating to the transition lottery of the display mode of (1) is performed in the lottery result handling process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, hereinafter, the lottery result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S701, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is already set before the current game, and it is determined whether or not the current game is in the carry-over state of the first BB or the second BB.

  When a negative determination is made in step S701, processing for transition of the display mode in steps S702 to S710 is performed. On the other hand, an affirmative determination is made in step S701, and when in the carryover state, processing for transition to the display mode is not performed. That is, while the bonus is being carried over, the execution of processing for transition to the display mode is restricted.

  Specifically, when a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the transition mode drawing of the attack mode and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specified part processing>
The first specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the first specific winning combination process is performed is a normal gaming state or a first RT state, and a state in which the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery whether or not to transition to the attack mode is performed. In addition, in the first specific combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process for adding the number of continued games in the challenge mode is performed.

  That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired as a table for attack mode lottery from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a challenge mode table is acquired as a table for attack mode lottery from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S803. In the normal time table and the challenge mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set in accordance with the type of lottery result (winning combination).

  Specifically, in the mode lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is set to be different depending on the current display mode and the type of game result serving as the lottery trigger. It is done.

  Here, as a game result which becomes the drawing opportunity of the mode transition drawing, as shown in Figure 36, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, weak Cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, weak watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1, chance B duplication 1, middle bell duplication 1, special lip A duplication 1, special lip A duplication 2, single 1st BB, single 2nd BB are set (Hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as “transition trigger”). For these transition triggers, the set point value PV is the same regardless of the setting value, and there is no setting difference in the winning probability. The winning probability of each mode transition lottery is set so that there is no setting difference. On the other hand, strong cherry duplicate 2, weak cherry duplicate 2, strong watermelon duplicate 2, weak watermelon duplicate 2, chance A duplicate 2, chance B duplicate 2, middle bell duplicate 2, special lip AB duplicate 1, special lip AB duplicate 2 is set so that there is a setting difference in the winning probability, and in general, the point value PV is set such that the setting 1 has the lowest winning probability and the setting 6 has the highest winning probability (hereinafter referred to as these) Are collectively referred to as “non-motivating roles”). Then, in the non-motivating role having a setting difference in these winning probabilities, each mode transition lottery is not performed. In other words, a mode transition lottery in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability at a transition opportunity with a common appearance rate is configured, and the transition rate of each mode transition is common.

  In the lottery table for transition to the attack mode acquired in step S802 or step S803, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 37, for example, when the transition trigger is a strong cherry, the normal mode table wins the transition to the attack mode with a probability of 45%, while the challenge mode table has a probability of 90%. The lottery for the transition to the attack mode is won, and the challenge mode is set to be easier to win the lottery for the transition to the attack mode than the normal mode. Also, when the transition trigger is a strong cherry, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode is higher in both the normal time table and the challenge mode table than when the transition trigger is a weak cherry, The lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game is, the easier it is to win the lottery for shifting to the attack mode.

  After acquiring the attack mode lottery table in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the transition to the attack mode is performed by comparing the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803.

  In step S805, based on the processing result in step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the currently selected attack mode is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode which is started after passing through the additional specialization zone. For example, assuming that the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, the attack mode is started in the super attack mode by adding the number of games added in the additional specialization zone to the initial number of games 50. The Therefore, the normal attack mode and the super attack mode have different advantages for the player, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode.

  The transition lottery to the super attack mode is performed when winning in the transition lottery to the attack mode (when winning in the lottery process in step S804). The transition lottery depends on the type of the transition trigger and the display mode. This is performed based on the set transition lottery table for the super attack mode. As shown in FIG. 37, the transition lottery table for the super attack mode wins the transition lottery to the super attack mode when the attack mode is won during the challenge mode than when the attack mode is won during the normal mode. It is set to be easy to use, and the superiority of the challenge mode is secured. For example, in the normal mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery to attack mode with strong watermelon as an opportunity is 60%, and 5% when winning the transition lottery wins the super attack mode. In the normal mode, 57% of the winning watermelon cases are switched to the attack mode, and 3% are switched to the super attack mode. On the other hand, during the challenge mode, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode with a strong watermelon as an opportunity is 50%, and 50% when winning the transition lottery wins the super attack mode. In the challenge mode, 25% of those who won a strong watermelon shift to the attack mode, 25% shift to the super attack mode, and the transition rate to the super attack mode is higher than the normal mode. In addition, the winning probability of the lottery transition to the super attack mode varies depending on the transition trigger, for example, when comparing strong cherry and strong watermelon, the winning probability of the lottery transition to super attack mode is strong and strong cherry Although common to watermelons (5% winning probability), in the challenge mode, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to be higher for strong watermelons than for strong cherries.

  If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode is won, in step S807, processing for setting a special zone winning flag is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the process of step S807 is performed, a process of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and the special zone winning flag is set (in the case of winning the super attack mode) in some of them.

  After performing the processing of step S808, processing for setting a precursor mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. The precursor mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests winning in the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. is easily generated, and after having played each game of the precursor mode, the player is elected in the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. The notification of winning is performed. The precursor mode continues from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of continued games in the precursor mode is set to be different depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc., and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. ing. If the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. are simultaneously won with the bonus, notification of the bonus's winning is given after the precursor mode, and after the bonus state is ended, the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. are won. Notification of what was happening will be done. Also, when the precursor game number is set as 0 game, the notification of winning will be performed without the intervention of the precursor mode.

  Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 38, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games to be selected is set to be different depending on whether the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and the bonus are simultaneously won or not. . Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode, and when the attack mode is won, when 1 bonus game is not won simultaneously, 1 game to 5 games are selected by 80%, and 6 10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 10%, and 6 games to 10 games are 20 11 games to 20 games are selected at 50%, and 21 games to 32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select the number of precursor games when the bonus is won simultaneously than when the bonus is not won simultaneously. In other words, when the bonus is not won simultaneously, the attack mode win is notified with a relatively short number of games from the attack mode win game. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 game is selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not bonus simultaneous winning is performed. That is, in this case, the winning mode notification is performed in the next game after the winning game without being set to the precursor mode.

  In addition, when winning in the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional specialization zone, when a bonus is not simultaneously won, one game to five games are selected at 70%, and six games to ten games are thirty Selected in%. On the other hand, when the attack mode is won at the same time, 1 game to 5 games are not selected, 6 games to 10 games are selected at 20%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected at 30%. And 21 games to 32 games are selected at 50%. In other words, even when winning the Super Attack mode, it is easier to select the number of precursor games when the bonus is selected simultaneously than when the bonus is not selected, and the bonus is not selected simultaneously. The super attack mode winning is notified in a relatively short number of games from the super attack mode winning game. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 game is selected as the precursor game number regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus simultaneous win. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the notification of winning in the super attack mode is performed in the next game to the winning game.

  In the case where the bonus and the winning combination are won, the number of predictive games that can be easily selected may be varied depending on the type of duplicate combination. For example, the replay (9th regame) and bonus combination like Special Lip A Overlap 1 and Special Lip A Overlap 2 are more effective than Small Cherry Overlap 1 (Strong Cherry, A configuration may be adopted in which a precursor mode longer than the overlapping role of weak cherry and the like) and the bonus may be easily selected, or the opposite may be made.

  In step S810, based on the precursor game number table acquired in step S809 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a process of drawing the number of games in the precursor mode of this time is performed. In step S811, processing for inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter which is decremented by one for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, the precursor mode is ended, and a notification of winning that the player has won the transition lottery such as the attack mode is performed.

  In step S812, processing for setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 which is a sub-side control device is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (the display mode to be shifted to after the precursor mode, the BB mode and the attack mode in the case of step S812) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S812, the first specific combination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S805 that the transition lottery to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, challenge mode lottery processing is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of transition trigger (FIG. 37). For example, for strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

  Although the case where the display mode is the challenge mode is included as a case where step S813 is carried out, the challenge mode lottery process is executed also in this case in step S813, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. With a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not in the challenge mode.

  In step S814, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode is won based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode is won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S816, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

  After performing the process of step S816, the setting process for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820 as in steps S809 to S812. That is, after acquiring the precursor game number table in step S817, performing lottery processing of the precursor game number in step S818, setting the precursor game number in step S819, and setting the precursor command in step S820, The first specific combination process ends.

  In the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, as shown in FIG. 38, when the challenge mode alone is won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 90%, and 6 games to 10 games are 10 games. Selected by%. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is a bonus and simultaneous winning, 1 to 5 games are selected at 20%, 6 to 10 games are selected at 30%, and 11 to 20 games are selected at 50%. Be done. In other words, even when the challenge mode is won, it is easier to select the number of precursors when the bonus is won simultaneously than when the bonus is not won at the same time. The challenge mode win is notified by a relatively short number of games from the challenge mode win game.

  In addition to the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not bonuses are won at the same time, it is easier to select the number of precursor games in the attack mode than in the challenge mode, and the precursor game in the super attack mode is longer than the attack mode. The number is easy to select, and if a winning display mode is won, it is easy to select a long precursor game number. In addition, when the bonus is not won simultaneously, the number of precursor games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus is simultaneously won. To do. In addition, even when a bonus is won simultaneously with the bonus, the number of precursor games of 20 games or less is selected in the simultaneous winning of the challenge mode and the bonus, while the bonus mode is different from the attack mode or the super attack mode. In the simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is selected, and when the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, it is determined that the bonus + attack mode or the super attack mode is established. Thus, the pleasure of predicting the winning contents in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the attack mode or challenge mode is not won at the time of transition opportunity winning, or the pseudo precursor mode is shifted at the time of non-motivation winning. Although this process will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, when the winning suggestion effect frequently occurs over 21 games or more, it is determined that the shifted precursor mode or pseudo precursor mode is the precursor mode.

  If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, processing for adding the challenge mode continuation game is performed in steps S821 to S825. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and a lottery process of the number of added games in the challenge mode is executed.

  Here, adding up means adding the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of adding up games corresponds to a value added to the number of continuing games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuing games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

  Specifically, in the lottery process of the number of added games, a table for lottery of the number of challenge mode added games is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The challenge mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the number of extra games increases in accordance with the type of game result that becomes the lottery opportunity. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, for example, in strong cherry, challenge mode of 2 to 20 games is added, and the average number of added games is 15 games. Also, for weak cherries, 30 games are added for 5 to 30 games, and the average number of added games is 10, and there may be cases where the number of games for which the number of weak cherries is larger is selected than for strong cherries, The average value (the number of games added to the expectation) is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

  In step S823, the number of games in challenge mode is added. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S822 is added to the counter for managing the number of continued games in the challenge mode (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform the addition process. In step S824, a process for setting the addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information on the occurrence of the addition, the number of additional games, and the target to be added (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the additional command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these additional commands as notification based on the reception of the additional commands. Announcement (addition effect) is performed.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and the first specific combination process is ended. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition of the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game for which the additional notification is performed is set differently depending on whether or not the bonus simultaneous winning is performed.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the transition lottery of the VB mode and cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, a second specified winning combination process is executed in step S707. If a negative determination is made in step S705, it is determined in step S708 whether a bonus state is in progress. If it is not in the bonus state, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S709. If it is in the bonus state, in step S710, the fourth specific combination process is executed.

<Second specific role processing>
The second identification combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the second specific combination process is performed is a state in which the second RT state is set and the VB mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode. In the second specific combination process, a transfer lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode or the specialization zone. The added special zone indicates a state in which an additional number of continued games in the attack zone occurs with a high probability over a plurality of games. Further, in the second specific combination process, the rank in the attack mode is promoted and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S901, processing for determining the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ranks of the four attack modes of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different in each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined whether the rank of the current attack mode is any one of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode.

  In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set in accordance with the type of game result serving as a lottery opportunity. As shown in FIG. 37, for example, in the strong cherry 1 and the weak cherry, the strong cherry 1 is set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherry. Moreover, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is generally different, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. Thus, the fourth attack mode is switched to the VB mode rather than the third attack mode so that the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode. The transition probability of is set to be high.

  In step S903, the transfer lottery in the VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the winning of the VB mode. In the present embodiment, when the transition lottery of the VB mode is performed with the bonus combination with the bonus as the transition opportunity, the lottery of the transition to the VB mode is not won. That is, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VB mode are made to occur as little as possible, and the advantage of the overlapping role with these bonus is not too high.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S904, in step S905, a process of setting a VB mode selection flag in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games is acquired in step S906, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S907, the number of precursor games is set in step S908, and the precursor command is set in step S909. End the role processing. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, with regard to the VB mode winning in the attack mode, it is set such that the number of precursor games is 0 in any case. Therefore, when the VB mode is won during the attack mode, the winning notification is performed in the next game.

  If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

  In step S910, attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a table for promoted lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode, and specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, There are three provided (in the state of staying in the fourth attack mode, no promotion lottery is performed). In each table, the winning probability of the promoted lottery is set in accordance with the type of the game result serving as the lottery trigger. For example, among the strong cherries and the weak cherries, the strong cherries have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Also, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the third table for the second attack mode The table for the attack mode is set to have a lower promotion probability, and as the rank of the attack mode is promoted, it is set to be difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

  In step S911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If it is determined that the player has been promoted, the attack mode is promoted in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank to the rank flag one higher. Thereafter, in step S 913, processing for setting a promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to produce an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and when the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, While notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an attack mode effect is produced with a background color corresponding to the rank of the promoted destination.

  If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continued games in the attack mode is performed in steps S914 to S921.

  That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this extra lottery process, an attack mode extra lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 40, the attack mode extra lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the extra lottery differs according to the type of the lottery result.

  Here, in the present embodiment, with regard to the number-of-games addition lottery in the attack mode, it is set that even in the pushing order bell or the pushing order replay, the drawing opportunity is triggered. In push order bell and push order replay (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as “push order”), as shown in FIG. There is no difference. Also, there is no difference in setting between the winning probability of the number-of-games addition lottery to be performed triggered by the pushing order and the number of additional games at the time of winning. That is, there is no setting difference in the extra performance triggered by the push order. In addition, in the following description, it is also called a specific role as a role that triggers a lottery regarding the instruction function, including the above-mentioned transition trigger role in the push order.

  As shown in FIG. 40, among the specific combinations, the push-prone combination is set to have a lower win probability for the lottery by adding the number of games in the attack mode than the transition opportunity combination. Therefore, it can be expected to increase the number of games in the attack mode when the transition opportunity appears as a result of the lottery of each game, rather than when the push forward appears. Then, it is considered that the player proceeds with the game while expecting that the player will win the transition opportunity. On the other hand, the pushing order has a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity and can be said to be a game result that is relatively likely to appear. By setting it as such a combination, the presence as an opportunity combination can be lowered by adding a push forward, and the unexpectedness when the addition occurs can be increased. In addition, there is a possibility that an opportunity for adding on the basis of the push order can actually occur in the attack mode (more specifically, if the 50 games which are the initial number of games are executed 2 to 3 times, it will be generated once. Appearance rate to the extent that would be). For this reason, it is possible to suitably generate an extra charge triggered by such an unexpected pushing order.

  If it is determined that the bonus lottery is won, it is determined in step S916 whether a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917 to perform a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode. In the lottery process of the additional game number, a table for lottery of the attack mode additional game number is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 39, the attack mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the extra game number varies depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, in Strong Cherry, an attack mode of 20 to 200 games is added, and the average number of added games is 30 games. Also, for weak cherries, 5 games to 300 games are added, and the average number of added games is 20 games, and there may be cases where the number of games with more weak cherries is selected than for strong cherries, The average value is set so that the number of games is greater for strong cherries.

  In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S 917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106) for managing the number of continuation games in attack mode. Perform processing to add. In the subsequent step S919, an additional notification process is performed to notify that the additional lottery has been won and the number of games thereof. Then, after the process of setting the addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S920, the second specific combination process ends. The additional notification process will be described later in detail.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S921. In step S921, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and the second specific combination process is ended. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition of the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, similarly to the notification of the game number addition in the challenge mode, the game in which the addition notification is performed is set to be different depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

  If it is determined in step S915 that the lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, a transition lottery to a specialized zone is executed. That is, when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, a lottery to the special zone is performed when the lottery for the transition to the VB mode or the number of games in the attack mode is not won. In the special zone lottery process, a special zone transfer lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for determining whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed using a lottery counter or the like. Do. As shown in FIG. 39, the table for the specialized zone transition lottery is set so that the winning probability of the transition lottery varies depending on the type of transition trigger among the specific roles. As already explained, the transitional combination with the bonus is not selected for the transition lottery to the VB mode, while the combination with the bonus is not performed in the attack mode game as shown in FIG. It is set so that a lottery will be won by adding a number (winning with a probability of 100%). Therefore, the special zone transfer lottery will not be performed with the duplicate role with these bonuses, and the special zone transfer lottery is at the time of winning strong cherries and weak cherries that are not duplicated bonuses, It is set so that the player can win if the lottery for the transition to the VB mode and the number of games are added and the lottery is not won. For example, the special zone transition lottery based on strong cherry will be won with a probability of 5%, and the special zone transition lottery based on weak cherry will be a 0.5% probability. On the other hand, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelon, the player wins with a probability of 5%.

  In step S923, based on the processing result in step S922, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the specialized zone has been won. If not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it has been won, in step S924, processing for setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. Then, in step S925, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S926, a lottery process for the number of prognostic games is performed, and in step S927, a process for setting the number of prognostic games is performed. After performing the process of setting, the second specific combination process is terminated. The process of step S925 to step S928 is the same as the process of step S906 to step S909, for example, and is a process for setting the precursor mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S923, and there is no win for any of the transition lottery to the VB mode, the number-of-games addition lottery for the attack mode, and the transition lottery to the specialization zone, the pseudo overlay notification is made in step S929. After performing the process, the second specific combination process is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining an expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won. The pseudo overlay notification process will be described later in detail.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specified winning combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The case where the third specific combination process is performed means the case of the third RT state or the second RT state and the state of winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third identification combination process, a process for increasing the number of continued games in the attack mode and a transition lottery whether to shift to a specialization zone are performed.

  That is, in step S1001, the number-of-games addition lottery process in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S914. In addition, the winning probability of the extra lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1001 is the additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery is won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and a lottery process of the number of added games in the attack mode is performed. In step S1005, an attack mode game number addition process is performed, and in step S1006, an addition notification process is performed. In step S1007, an addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. , This third special part process ends. The processes of steps S1003 to S1007 are similar to the processes of steps S916 to S920. Note that the number of added games may be different between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, a transition lottery to a specialization zone is executed. That is, when a specific combination is won during the VB mode, even when the number of games in the attack mode is not added and the lottery is not won, the lottery for shifting to the special zone is performed. The special zone lottery process is the same as the process in step S922, and is performed based on the special zone transfer lottery table (FIG. 37). The processes in steps S1010 to S1016 are the same as the processes in steps S923 to S929. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the third specific combination process is terminated after setting the attack mode extra flag in step S1007. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

  In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), the fourth specific combination process in step S710 is a process in the bonus state, and will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the carry-over is in progress, or after executing any of the processes in steps S704, S707, S709, and S710, the result of the current lottery process is pushed in step S711. It is determined whether or not the order replay and the push order bell have been won. If it is a push order winning combination, a push order process is executed in step S712. Such pushing order processing will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S713. In step S 713, it is determined whether the specialization zone flag corresponding to the additional specialization zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106 d of the RAM 106. As described above, the special zone flag is set after the special zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the super attack mode or the special lottery. It is a flag that is set when it occurs (when the seventh game winning combination is established). If the specialization zone flag is set in step S713, specialization zone processing is executed in step S714. If a negative determination is made in step S713, or after the process of step S714 is performed, the present lottery result correspondence process is ended.

<Specialized zone processing>
The specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the specialized zone process, first, in step S1101, the result of the current lottery process is grasped. In subsequent step S1102, an attack mode extra game number lottery process is performed. In the subsequent step S1103, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1104, an additional notification process is executed, and in step S1105, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing from step S1102 to step S1105 is the same as the processing from step S917 to step S920. However, the number-of-games selected in step S1102 for the additional game number lottery process is larger than that for the additional game number lottery process in step S917 (FIG. 39). In addition, in the specialization zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the addition of the number of attack mode games always occurs (FIG. 40).

  As described above, in the lottery result handling process, on the condition that it is not in the carry-over state, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or attack mode, or the transition mode to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode Etc. In other words, even if it is a specific role winning, during the carry-over state, a transition lottery of challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continued games in challenge mode or attack mode, etc. are not performed, Its implementation is limited. In the case of winning the transition lottery to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, after the sign game, the fact that the transition lottery has been won is notified. Therefore, hereinafter, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode will be described.

<Process for transferring the game state based on the result of the transition drawing of the display mode>
(2) Transition of the display mode In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the lottery, the process for notifying that the transition mode of the display mode has been won and a notification for shifting the gaming state And a process for performing. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning of the transition lottery will be described.

<Mode transition notification processing>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode shift notification process is a process performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the bet number in step S205 is a specified number). In the following, the mode transition notification processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursor games is counted in a winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by one each time one game is consumed. If the precursor game number is not 0, the mode transition notification process is ended.

  If the precursor game number is 0, it is determined in step S1202 whether the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not this precursor mode is the precursor mode triggered by the bonus winning. If the bonus winning flag is set, a bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1203, and the mode transition notifying process is ended. The display control device 81 having received the bonus winning notification command, for example, displays “Bonus confirmed !!” on the auxiliary display unit 65, thereby notifying that the bonus is won. Note that the type of the bonus being won (one of the first BB and the second BB) may be notified together.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus, the attack mode, the challenge mode, and the like are won simultaneously, the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed at the end of the bonus notified in step S1203. The process related to the winning notification will be described in detail later. However, when winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, winning notification such as attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1203. It is good to set up a command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by the challenge mode winning. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1205. In step S1206, a challenge mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S 1207, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the challenge mode start command notifies the start of the challenge mode by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S1208, counting of the challenge mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continued games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. After the process of step S1208 is performed, the mode transition notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1204 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time is the precursor mode triggered by the attack mode winning. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1210. Then, in step S1211, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. Thereafter, in step S1212, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the attack mode winning lottery has been won. This notification will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1212 is performed, the mode transition notification process ends.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the notification of winning in the super attack mode is different from the mode of the notification of winning in the attack mode. Therefore, in step S1212, an attack mode winning notification command may be set to include information on whether or not the super attack mode is selected. The mode of notification of winning in the attack mode and the mode of notification of winning in the super attack mode may be different as long as they can be identified by the player. More preferably, the notification of the super attack mode of winning notification with high degree of advantage It is preferable that the aspect is a flashy aspect than the aspect of the notification of winning in the attack mode.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which makes common the aspect of the election alerting | reporting of these attack mode and super attack mode. By doing this, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the attacking content has been promoted to the super attack mode from the attack mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the attack mode winning Spacing caused by the difference between the notification game and the start notification game can be resolved.

  If it is determined in step S1209 that the attack mode selection flag is not set, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the VB mode selection flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1214. Then, in step S1215, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The notification flag for VB is a flag for causing the gaming state to shift to the third RT state in association with having won the transition lottery of the VB mode. Thereafter, in step S1216, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command performs notification of the winning of the VB mode transition lottery using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1216 is performed, the mode transition notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1217. In step S1217, it is determined whether the specialization zone hit flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is. If it is set, in step S1218, processing is performed to clear the specialization zone hit flag. Then, in step S1219, processing is performed to set a specialization zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The specialization zone notification flag is a flag for executing a push order notification corresponding to the seventh replay win. After executing the processing of step S 1219, the special zone selection notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S 1220, and the mode transition notification processing ends. The display control device 81 that has received the specialization zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialization zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the mode transition notification process ends.

  That is, out of the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone that transitions through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is determined based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero. It is started. On the other hand, for the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialized zone, only the notification that the attack mode lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero. The attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialized zone are not started even if the number of precursor games is zero. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode are accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, specifically, the attack mode is shifted to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state. In addition, there is a case where the game state does not accompany the transition of the specialized zone (the third RT state → the third RT state), but in the present embodiment, since the seventh re-game winning game in the third RT state is a start game, It becomes the above-mentioned processing composition.

  As already explained, it is a case where it wins to the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 to the 2nd RT state, and it shifts when the 3rd game rebirth is established, 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 to the 3rd RT state Is transferred to the case where the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established. Then, when the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay win is established, or the second promotion replay 1 and 2 is won, the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third regame winning award or the like. Therefore, if the player has won the attack mode or the lottery for transition to the VB mode, then, in the game in which the winning combination is to shift these gaming states, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified. The game state can be changed. It should be noted that after the notification of winning in the transition mode or the VB mode transition lottery is performed, until the attack mode or the VB mode is started (until the gaming state transitions), a notification as a preparation state (for example, “ Notification in progress) is performed.

<Description about transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S712) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing order processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Overview of push order notification effects>
The notification of the operation order at the time of pushing order winning (pressing order notification, pressing order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the operation order to be notified this time is winning in the push order when the middle → right → left is selected. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (the middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43, and is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). Accordingly, the player can recognize that the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display section 65, the right button display shows a numeric value so that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with 3 added.

  When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears in the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. The button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

  When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 42C, in the auxiliary display section 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left corresponding to the left stop switch 42. The button display is displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

  The execution timing of the push order notification will be described. The push order notification is performed during the ineffective period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation after passing through the acceleration period. Is set to run. As described above, the notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be recognized by performing the notification of the order of pressing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective. Therefore, it is possible to make the game progress with good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order process executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether the current lottery result is any one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1301 is a case where the first replay or the third replay is won according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of prognostic games in the prognostic mode becomes 0 after winning in the drawing for the transition to the attack mode in the process of informing mode transition (FIG. 41). is there.

  If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1303, the third replay push order notification process is executed. Specifically, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game win among the first re-game and the third re-game is notified (see FIG. 23A). After that, in step S1304, a process for setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 which is the sub-side control device is performed, and then this push forward order process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described in detail later.

  In the case of notifying the operation order corresponding to the third game win in step S1303, basically, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and after the precursor mode, the notification of winning in the attack mode is a line It is assumed that it is after the break and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, in the lottery tables in the second RT state and the third RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like, and even in such a case, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing this, it is possible to return to the second RT state early.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1305 is a case where the first replay or the second replay is won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1307, a process for notifying the pushing order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, an operation order corresponding to the first replay win is notified (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1308, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation of winning the lottery to shift to the attack mode, the game state is changed to the first by notifying the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the pressing order processing ends without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first regame win is established, and the third regame win is established. There is.

  In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notification of the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning prize. It is possible to prevent it. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1306, the pressing order processing ends without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Shifts from the second RT state to the first RT state.

  Further, for example, in the first RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning in the attack mode, and by chance the operation order corresponds to the third replay win, and the third replay win is established. Even in the case where it is determined (even when the second RT state is entered), the second replay bonus can be established by the winning of the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to go to the second RT state without winning in the attack mode, it will immediately shift to the first RT state thereafter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1309 is a case where the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay is won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1311 whether the VB notification flag or the special zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As already described, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 41). is there. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the specialized zone in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 41). is there.

  If the VB notification flag or the special zone notification flag is set, a process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth regame or the fifth regame is executed in step S1312. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, an operation order corresponding to the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is notified (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1313, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the present push order processing process is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1310, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1311, the process for notifying the pushing order of the first replay is executed in step S1307, and the process of setting the pushing order informing command is performed in step S1308. The regular push forward processing is terminated. Therefore, when winning in the second promotion Replays 1 and 2 without winning in the VB mode or the specialization zone, if the attack mode is in progress, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay game winning is performed, and the attack If it is not in the mode, the push order notification effect is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1309, it is determined in step S1314 whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1 or not. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1314 is a case where one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1315, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1316 whether the specialization zone notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the special zone notification flag is set, in step S1317, processing for notification of the push order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third regame, and the sixth replay to the eighth regame, the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame win is notified (see FIG. 23C). Thereafter, in step S1318, processing for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the present push order processing processing is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1315, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1316, the first replay push order notification process is executed in step S1307, and the push order notification command is set in step S1308. This regular order processing ends. Therefore, if the BAR Replay 1 is won without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in progress, and must not be in the attack mode. For example, the order notification notification is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 1314, it is determined in step S 1319 whether or not the current lottery result is a winning order bell winning. If the push bell order has been won, it is determined in step S1320 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a push order notification process for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small role winning is executed in step S1321 (see FIG. 19). Thereafter, in step S1322, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1319 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1320, the regular push forward process is terminated without performing the push order notification process.

  When the push order notification is performed at least a predetermined number of times (one time) in the challenge mode, it is determined in step S1302 or step S1320 whether or not the push order notification has been performed a predetermined number of times in the challenge mode. It is good to have a configuration that Then, when the determination is negative in this determination, it is preferable to count the predetermined number of times and to proceed to the processing for notification of pressing order on the side of step S1303 or step S1321.

<Process for Shifting Display Mode Based on Winning Result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, as a result of giving a notification to shift the gaming state as described above, the processing in the case where the combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result corresponding process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1401, a game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management processing, in addition to the count of the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, the number of continued games in the specialization zone, etc. are performed. In subsequent step S1402, a post-notification process is executed. The post-loading notification process is a process for performing post-loading notification, which is a notification mode of the additional notification. The post-loading notification process will be described in detail later.

  In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the current stop result is that the third replay win is established. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, it is determined in step S1404 whether the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set means the case where the third game winning combination is established without the transition condition to the attack mode being established. In this case, the processing for the attack mode start is not performed. The winning result handling process ends as it is. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as a flag for specifying the display mode, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided in addition to the attack mode flag. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is a flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, Specialized zone flag)). Therefore, for example, when it is determined in step S1405 that the attack mode flag is set, the case including the case of being in the VB mode or being in the specialization zone is included in addition to the case of being in the attack mode. .

  If the attack mode flag is set in step S1405, the display mode is already the attack mode, and the main winning result corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1406 to S1409.

  That is, in step S1406, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1407, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 having received the attack mode start command notifies the start of the attack mode from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. This notification will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1408, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode.

  After the process of step S1408, it is determined in step S1409 whether the specialization zone flag is set. Affirmative determination in step S1409 means that the attack mode selected this time is the super attack mode, and in this case, after the specialization zone selection flag is cleared in step S1410, the special addition special zone start Process (steps S1419 to S1421). The process for starting the additional specialization zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1403 that the third regame prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as the current stop result. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, in the RT state process (FIG. 21), a process for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1412, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is not set, it is a case where the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. Then, the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1413 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the present winning result corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1414 to S1416.

  That is, in step S1414, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode in which the transition is made via the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

  Thereafter, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1415. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the VB mode is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1416, counting of the number of continuation of the VB mode is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1416, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1411 that the fourth and fifth replay wins have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether the seventh replay prize is established as a result of the current stop. In the present embodiment, when the seventh re-game winning is established, that is, the “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "black BAR" symbol stops and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the additional specialization zone. The case where the seventh regame winning is established is a case where the BAR replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh replay winning. (FIG. 23 (c)).

  If the seventh replay win is established, it is determined in step S1418 whether the specialization zone notification flag is set. If the specialization zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialization zone is performed in steps S1419 to S1421. Note that, as already described, the processing of step S1419 to step S1421 is also performed when the determination in step S1409 is affirmative and the processing of step S1410 is performed at the start of the super attack mode.

  Specifically, in step S1419, processing for setting a special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialization zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialization zone, and the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped by setting the specialization zone flag. . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d.

  Thereafter, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1420. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like that the special zone is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. In step S1421, counting of the number of continued special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continued games in the specialization zone is set in the specialization zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1421, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1418, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, the process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination (third to fifth replays) corresponding to the transition of the game state. Do. This is to prevent the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning of the part corresponding to the transition of the gaming state by chance even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

  In addition, when transitioning to the display mode, among those involving the transition of the gaming state, transition to a higher mode, that is, transition from the normal mode or challenge mode to the attack mode, or transition from the attack mode to the VB mode Alternatively, when shifting from the attack mode or the VB mode to the specialized zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition of the display mode is not performed when the gaming state transitions, for example, due to the stop of the second re-game win or the transition appearance as fall fall replay. When shifting to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1401 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialization zone is counted. Based on this, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

  In the game number management process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether the bet number is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets of 1 to 3. In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as a specific number. If it is not 3 bet, the game number management process is finished. That is, in the 1 bet or 2 bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuing games such as the challenge mode are not counted. Note that counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

  If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or whether the bonus state is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, processing for clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1503, and the game number management process is ended. To do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as the attack mode is not counted. In addition, in step S1503, when each flag is not set, the state is maintained.

  Incidentally, in step S1503, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, while the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after completion of the bonus, after passing through a preparation state such as an attack mode, a push order notification for shifting the gaming state is performed by these flags, and the gaming state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, when the bonus is won during the challenge mode or the special zone, the challenge mode or the special zone is terminated by the bonus win. In step S1503, the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the like are not cleared. Therefore, when an attack mode or the like and a bonus are won at the same time, winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1502, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If it is not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1505. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1504 (not in the precursor mode), or after executing the processing of step S1505, the number of continuing games in each mode is counted in steps S1506 to S1528. .

  That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the case of the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by one to subtract the number of challenge mode continuation games. In step S1508, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1509, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1510. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode is ended in the current game. After performing the process of step S1510, the game number management process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1506 that the current mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1512, and it is determined whether or not it is a specialized zone in the attack mode. That is, when transitioning to the specialization zone at the start of the attack mode as in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1512. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1525 to S1528. These processes will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1512 that the game is not in the specialization zone, the attack mode continuing counter is decremented by 1 in step S1513 to subtract the attack mode continuing game number. In step S1514, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1515, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1516. Thereafter, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1517. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode is ended in the current game. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1517, the game number management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1511 that the attack mode is not selected, the process advances to step S1518. In step S1518, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1519, and it is determined whether or not it is an extra special zone. If it is not the added special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1520 to subtract the VB mode continuation game number. In step S1521, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1522, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1523. Thereafter, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1524. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies the end of the VB mode in the current game. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1524, the game number management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1519 that the zone is an additional specialization zone, the process proceeds to step S1525. As already described, when it is determined in step S1512 that the zone is the specialized zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1525. In step S1525, the number of specialized zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. In step S1526, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the specialization zone flag is cleared in step S1527, and a specialization zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1528. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone is over in the current game. As this notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the current special zone is notified. After performing the process of step S1528, the game number management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1518 or step S1526, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End determination process>
Next, as a process at the end of the bonus, an end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the end determination process is a process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success / failure condition of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is ended, a process for notifying the winning such as an attack mode overlapping with the bonus is performed, and an attack mode such as overlapping winning with the bonus is performed. The process for adding the number of games such as is performed.

  That is, in step S1601, it is determined whether a small winning combination is established. As described above, during the first BB and second BB bonuses, the first role in BB is established with high probability, and in part, the second role in BB and the third role in BB are established (FIG. 28). When the first winning combination in BB is won, the first small winning combination is mainly established, a predetermined number (9 sheets) of medal payout is generated, and the second winning combination in BB and the third winning combination in BB are the ninth replay It is a replay of the tenth replay, and medal payout does not occur even if a winning is established. In addition, in the CB, even if it is elected to any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 and any one is elected, the first small winning combination is mainly established a predetermined number (15 sheets) Medals will be paid out. Step S1601 is a process for determining whether or not a small winning combination in which a medal payout is generated among these bonuses or winning combinations during CB is established.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that a minor winning combination is achieved, in step S1602, processing is performed to subtract the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts. If a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after the process of step S1602 has been performed, it is determined in step S1603 whether the number of remaining payouts has become 0 or not. If it is not 0, the end determination process is ended as it is. In the case of 0, after setting a bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1604, in steps S1605 to S1619, a process for winning notification such as an attack mode, an attack mode, etc. Perform processing for the addition of the number of continuing games.

  That is, in step S1605, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, lottery processing of the number of prognostic games is performed in step S1606, the number of prognostic games is set in step S1607, and the prognostic command is set in step S1608. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the lottery process of the number of prognostic games in step S1606, the lottery in which the number of prognostic games is 0 is performed with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1607, the number of precursor games of 0 game is always set, and a notification of winning such as an attack mode is performed in the next game of the bonus end game. After executing the process of step S1608, the end determination process ends.

  If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1605, it is determined in step S1609 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the processing for the precursor mode in steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination processing is ended. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1609, it is determined in step S1510 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the processing for the precursor mode in steps S1606 to S1608 is performed, and then the end determination processing is ended. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the notification of the winning of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed after the precursor game.

  In addition, when the attack mode winning flag or challenge mode winning flag is set, the bonus is ended when the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. and the bonus are won at the same time, or when the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. are won. The bonus is won in the precursor mode of. On the other hand, when the VB mode winning flag is set, the bonus ends when the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won in the attack mode, or during the predictive mode of the VB mode winning notification (in this case, This is a case where the bonus game is won in the next game won in the VB mode since the 0 game precursor mode is selected.

  If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the attack mode extra flag is set. If the attack mode extra flag is set, an attack mode extra game number lottery process is performed in step S1612, an attack mode game number extra process is performed in step S1613, and an extra notification process is performed in step S1614. At step S1615, the addition command is set. The processes in steps S1612 to S1615 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S920. After the process of step S1615 is performed, the end determination process ends.

  If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1611, it is determined in step S1616 whether the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode extra flag is set, the challenge mode extra game number lottery process is performed in step S1617, the challenge mode game number extra process is performed in step S1618, and the extra command is set in step S1619. . The processes in steps S1617 to S1619 are the same as the processes in steps S822 to S824. When a negative determination is made in step S1616, or after the process of step S1619 is executed, the end determination process ends.

  As described above, on the main control device 101 side, (1) processing related to display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting gaming state based on the result of display mode transition lottery, (3) winning results As a result of performing each processing of processing to shift the display mode based on, the play order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the gaming state is also shifted to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, It is possible to generate a push order prize by the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected.

  Here, when pressing order replay or pressing order bell is selected, when the pressing order notification effect (pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, main control The push monitor is also notified on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the apparatus 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source formed of an LED, and it is possible to turn on only one arbitrary display segment by on / off control of the individual light sources. Any combination of display segments can be lit. Thereby, on the instruction monitor 68, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed. In addition, since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

  In detail about each display segment N1 to N8, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 to the seventh display The segment N7 is arranged to be able to display at least the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is disposed laterally of the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least “1” to “6”, “1.” to “6.”, and “.”.

  If the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, etc. may be used. Moreover, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Moreover, the structure which controls lighting or light extinction of each display segment N1-N8 by carrying out on-off control of a light source is not essential, and if each display segment N1-N8 can perform display control individually, The segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, the segment display may not be applied to each display area, but the symbol may be displayed by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

  The first display segment N <b> 1 to the seventh display segment N <b> 7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), a winning mode which is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation sequence of each stop switch 42 to 44 In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit on and “1” is displayed. Further, when it becomes a winning mode advantageous to the player by performing the stop operation in the order of “right” → “left” → “medium” as the operation order of the respective stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5 and the sixth display segment N6 are displayed in a lit state, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and displayed on the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win in a manner advantageous to the player.

  The eighth display segment N8 is simultaneously selected in the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, or the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, or the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode. Lights when the bonus to be obtained (1st BB) is won. In addition, when the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, and the first BB end and transition to the normal mode is made (except when transitioning to the attack mode or the like again after passing through the precursor mode), the light is turned off.

  In other words, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high frequency mode) where the player can be made to win in an advantageous manner for the player easily by being notified of the operation order of the push order bell and push order replay A chance state (Challenge mode or 1BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win a transition lottery, or a transition lottery to a navigation state or a chance state, but a winning state that does not transition to these navigation states or a chance state A section including a state (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the advantageous section, and is turned off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section.

  The eighth display segment N8 starts the game in which the game result (specific player such as strong cherry, etc.) triggered by the advantageous section such as the navigation state, the chance state, and the winning state is won and the game result is established In the next game after the start game, lighting is started as a notification that an advantageous section has been reached at a timing before the player's gaming operation is permitted. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result winning which is the trigger of the advantageous section is established, that is, regardless of whether or not the dropout occurs, the game for which the game result is won is obtained. The eighth display segment N8 is turned on at a timing before the bet operation is permitted as the game operation by the player in the next game. That is, lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started before the start of the next game of the game won by the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

  As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is the number of payouts in the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 operated by the player, in other words, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like operating the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and the eighth display segment N8 is arranged at a position easy for the player to visually recognize. In addition, even if the player advancing the game with the aim of acquiring the medals is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch, it can be said that the player's miss is suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a lightness higher than the lightness of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display area). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the peripheral display portions are both controlled to emit light (when the light is turned on), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous at a glance ing. With regard to the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance directed to the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display portion (more specifically, the illuminance of the display portion in the surrounding 2 The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled. With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and missing when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the section display first process and the section display second process will be described as the processes related to turning on / off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16). The lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is determined based on the lottery result. It is implemented after the transition lottery of the display mode (lottery result handling process) is performed.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is on. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the attack mode, the super attack mode, the transition lottery to the challenge mode, and the winning selection lottery as an advantageous section, or in these modes It shows a case. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the transition to the challenge mode lottery, the attack mode, or the attack mode is performed in the current lottery process. And the case of winning the transition lottery to the super attack mode. As described above, in the first specific part process (FIG. 32), when winning in the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the challenge mode winning flag is set, and the transition lottery to the attack mode or the super attack mode is won In the case, the attack mode winning flag is set. If no flag is set in step S1702, the current section display first process ends.

  If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the display of the section display is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8. In addition, when the main control device 101 starts display with the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator turned on, a predetermined sound effect (for example, “Gago!” As a mechanical sound) is output from the speaker 64. A sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that the sound is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 based on the sound output command so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted. When the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display unit 65 and other display units. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and The display control device 81 may be configured to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like so that a corresponding effect is performed.

  After the process of step S1703 is performed, in step S1704, a process of starting measurement of the number of continued games of the advantageous section is performed, and the section display first process is ended. The number of continuing games in the advantageous section is measured by measuring the advantageous section game number AG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and in step S1704, the processing is performed to set the advantageous section game number AG to 0 which is an initial value. I do. The advantageous segment game number AG is incremented by one for each game in the advantageous segment.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, the section display first process is performed after the process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is performed in step S1705. Finish. Specifically, in step S1705, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the on state. That is, the process for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display process.

<Section display second process>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the section display second process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal payout (payout determination process) and the game state transition based on the winning result Etc. (Paid result handling process) is performed.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit and displayed as a section display. If it is off (not lit, not displayed), the second section display second process is terminated. If the display is on, the process advances to step S1802. In step S1802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding one to the above-described advantageous section game number AG is performed. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games executed in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured. After executing the process of step S1802, a remaining game number management process is executed in step S1803. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the attack mode.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S1901, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The prognostic game number G1 represents, for example, the remaining prognostic mode game number when the present state is the prognostic mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 45) . In step S1902, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 indicates, for example, the number of remaining challenge mode games when the current state is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by one for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 45) . In step S1903, the attack mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation number G3 represents the number of games in the remaining attack mode, for example, when the current state is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by one for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 45) . In step S1904, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents, for example, the remaining number of VB mode games when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by one for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 45) . In step S1905, the specialization zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialization zone continuation number G5 represents the number of games in the remaining specialization zones, for example, when the current state is the specialization zone in the advantageous area, and one for each game in the number-of-games management process (FIG. 45) It is subtracted. In step S1906, the number BB of remaining games G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G6 represents, for example, the number of remaining BB mode games when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, each time the number-of-games management process (FIG. 45) is activated once. In addition, one subtraction is performed in a subtraction process (not shown) on the condition that the BB mode is in effect.

  Here, as the continuation numbers G1 to G6, values of 0 or more may be input even if the current state is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in a situation in which the lottery for transition to the VB mode has been won, but before the transition to the VB mode, the current mode is the attack mode and the VB mode continuation number G4 continues the VB mode The situation is such that “25”, which is the initial value of the number of games, is still input. In addition, although in the challenge mode the winning lottery for transition to the super attack mode was won, in the situation before transition to the super attack mode, the current mode is the challenge mode and the number of specialization zones continued G5 "5" which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the animation zone is still input, and "50" which is the initial value of the number of continued games in the attack mode is also input in the attack mode continued number G3 It becomes.

  In step S1907, a process of calculating the remaining game number ZG in the advantageous section is performed by accumulating G1 to G6 grasped in the processes of steps S1901 to S1906. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to grasp how many subsequent games the advantageous section continues. In the subsequent step S1908, the total advantageous section game number SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number AG) and the remaining game number ZG that have been implemented so far. In step S 1909, the number of free games (the number of free games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total advantageous section game number SG from 1500 G, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Process.

  After performing the process of step S1909, in step S1910, it is determined whether or not the number of free games FG is larger than 0, that is, whether or not there is a number of free games and can be added. If the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the free game number FG is 0 or less, the process of setting the excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1911, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The excess flag indicates that the number of continued games in the advantageous section cannot be added. More specifically, the CPU 102 grasps that even if the number of added games is added, the game for the added amount is not executed due to forced termination at the time of 1500 games. It is a flag to do.

  By setting the excess flag, in the present embodiment, even if the specific combination is won during the advantageous section, the implementation of the number-of-games lottery in the attack mode and the like is limited. More specifically, for example, when the excess flag is set in the number-of-games extra lottery process in the attack mode such as step S914 or step S1001, the execution of the lottery process is restricted and the extra win is not won. (Or, even if you win the game, an additional 0 game will occur.) As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misunderstanding as if the advantageous section continues for the upper limit game number or more, since the addition is performed to the extent that can not be continued.

  Note that once the excess flag is set, the remaining game number management process may not be performed in the current advantageous section.

  Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 49), whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit “1500” in this game in step S1804 after performing the process of step S1803. Determine whether or not. If “1500” is reached, the advantageous section game number AG is cleared to 0 in step S1805, and then the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished as a section display end process in step S1806. To perform the process. Then, after the data initialization process is performed in step S1807, the section display second process is ended.

  The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the transition to the current advantageous period, and the flags and counters set in the current advantageous region to their initial values. For example, a challenge mode winning flag or an attack mode winning flag may be set upon transition to an advantageous section, or a VB mode winning flag may be set during the attack mode, and the flag may remain set until the initialization process. If this is the case, these winning flags are cleared. Further, in the initialization process, if an attack notification flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. In addition, if the predecessor counter, the counter for the number of continuing games such as the attack mode, and the like are larger than 0, all these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all the variables or parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification. It is a process to perform.

  If it is determined in step S1804 that the number AG of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1808, and it is determined whether the advantageous section has ended. That is, in step S1808, it is determined whether or not both the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag are set, and in step S1809, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is a state. Affirmative determination in any of steps S1808 and S1809 means that the advantageous section has ended before reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous section, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S1805, and the advantageous section game number AG is While clearing to 0, the end processing of the display of the section indicator is performed in step S1806, and after the data initialization processing is performed in step S1807, the section display second processing is ended. If a negative determination is made in either step S1808 or step S1809, the section display second process is ended as it is determined that the section is still in the advantageous section. In this case, the lighting display of the section display (eighth display segment N8) is continued.

<About the display of push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 51, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, the push order notification effect is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section not having the instruction function in contrast to the advantageous section having the performance related to the instruction function such as push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

  In a normal section, for example, when winning a lottery for a transition to an advantageous section such as a challenge mode or an attack mode by winning a weak watermelon role or the like, the game in which the game result that is the winning opportunity is established is set as the start game, and the start game At the timing before the bet operation by the player is permitted in the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on, and notification of the advantageous section is started.

  In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in the state before the transition to the advantageous section and is included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator indicating an advantageous section, a timing at which notification of the advantageous section permits a bet operation of the game following the start game in which the weak watermelon role is won. That is, assuming that the game in which the advantageous section is started is performed at the timing when the game becomes possible, as described above, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon winning game (starting game). The notification can be said to be a prior notification that is performed before the notification of the advantageous section (in-state notification, in-mode notification).

  After that, in a situation where it is notified that it is an advantageous section, a push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, the push order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can figure out the order. In the push order notification, the push order information is displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display is ended when the third reel stop is turned on in the game. When such a game is not the final game in the advantageous section, only the display of the pressing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is ended at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the winning combination is won again after the next game, the pressing order information corresponding to the pressing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

  When the number of continuing games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also extinguished, and the notification of the advantageous section is ended. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is on. Specifically, the first game after the start game is set as the first game, and the eighth display segment N8 is finally turned off The number of games in the advantageous section is up to the game.

  In the present embodiment, in the last game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the section display second process that is a process after the payout determination process). When the medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

  In this way, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on when the advantageous section is reached, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. The eighth display segment N8 is not only lit on the basis of the transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode, but also based on the fact that the eighth lottery is selected for the transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode. Lighting starts. That is, whether or not the transition lottery is won is confirmed by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit even if the notification is not made in the game won for the transition lottery to these modes. It can be clearly understood. By doing so, it is advantageous for a player who finishes the game without knowing it and a succeeding player who sits afterward, despite having won the lottery to shift to these modes. There is no difference in the degree.

  In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured such that there is no difference in the advantage due to the set value with respect to the gameability in which the advantage is changed by notifying the push order such as the challenge mode and the attack mode. Therefore, by making the gameability by push order notification uniform for each game stand (setting value) and each game (situation), it is possible to eliminate advantages / disadvantages among players, and to aim for a picture. It is possible to obtain a well-balanced gaming machine by relevance to the gaming nature by the accompanying push order notification while fully enjoying the original gaming nature of the slot machine 10 to obtain the above.

<Process on notification effect of sub side>
Next, (4) processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described as processing on notification effects on the sub side. As various notification processes, an effect setting process performed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101 or not. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2002. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands individually and being readable from the previously stored commands.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, or after the processing of step S2002 is executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet time command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation being performed. In addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, a mode transition notification process (see FIG. 41), a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. If these are betting commands, a betting effect setting process is executed in step S2004.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003, or after the process of step S2004 is executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to first commands There are a precursor command and an extra command set in the third specific combination process (FIGS. 32 to 34), a push order notification command set in the push order combination process (FIG. 43), and the like. If these are the commands at the start, start effect setting processing is executed in step S2006.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on each stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). It is a stop command command set by. When it is the stop command command as the command for each stop operation, each stop operation effect setting process is executed in step S2008.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or after the processing of step S2008 is executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the newly received command is a command at all stops. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the command, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 44) There is a zone end command etc. In the case of these all stop command, the all stop effect setting process is executed in step S2010.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is performed, the other process is performed in step S2011, and the effect setting process is ended. In step S2011, settings are made based on commands from the main control apparatus 101 at the time of betting, start, and stop (for example, setting of effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connection is not performed via the main control apparatus 101. The setting of the effect based on the signal from the detected sensor (the effect switch detection sensor etc.), the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

  Hereinafter, the betting time effect setting process, the start time effect setting process, each stop operation effect setting process, and the all stop effect setting process will be described. In addition, description of each production | presentation setting process demonstrates, referring the schematic diagram of the display production of FIG. 58, FIGS. 63-68.

<Bet effect setting process>
The betting time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not a challenge mode start command is included as the currently received bet time command. If a challenge mode start command is included, in step S2102, a process for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text “challenge mode start” and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) suggesting the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “grab the attack mode!” With a thick male voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If no challenge mode start command is included in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether an attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S2104, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “attack mode confirmation”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, control is performed such that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" With a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether the VB mode winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2106. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display “PICTURE BONUS determination”. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Victory!” In male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether the bonus winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If a bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2108, processing for setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “Yataze Bonus Confirmation”. In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Yay!

  If no bonus winning notification command is included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether a specialization zone winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2110, processing for setting a special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 performs a character display of “Pick up!”. In addition, in the specialization zone winning notification effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Norinori!" In a bold male wild voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  After executing any of the processes of step S2102, step S2104, step S2106, step S2108 and step S2110, or when the negative determination is made in step S2109, the other bet effect is set in step S2111. Then, the effect setting process ends. In the process of step S2111, for example, in response to reception of a bet command, a process of notifying that the operation is accepted by turning off the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the number of bets. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode in which a game is not performed for a predetermined time is returned to one condition, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned on to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing etc.

<Starting production setting process>
Next, the start time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2201, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set by the main control apparatus 101 is the normal mode, the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, or the specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is selected. The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are set as flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, and the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S2102, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S2201, by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63 and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

  In the following step S2202, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the winning combination winning or not. If it is determined that the winning order has been won, in step S2203, a pressing order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S 2301, it is determined whether a push order notification command is included as the start time command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process ends. If a push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2303, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the third replay win is established, and thereafter, the push order notification process Finish.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is not won, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the current lottery result is fall fall replay 1 to 3. In the case of fall down replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2305, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to perform push order notification that the first replay game winning is established, and then ends the push order notification process. Do.

  If it is determined in step S2304 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2307 whether the VB mode winning notification effect or the special zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, at the time of setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2106 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2110, a notification indicating that notification of VB winning or special zone winning has been performed in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 has been made. Set the flag. The notified flag is cleared based on transition to the VB mode or the specialization zone. Then, in step S2307, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification completion flag. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the specialization zone has already been made, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. is controlled to perform push order notification in which the fourth and fifth replay wins are established in step S2308, and thereafter , And ends the push order notification process. If it is not determined that the VB mode or the special zone has been selected, the process proceeds to step S2305, and after the first push notification for the first game win is issued, the push notification process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2306 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay 1. If it is BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S2310 whether or not the specialization zone winning notification effect has been executed. If the special zone winning notification has been made, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the seventh re-game winning is established in step S2311, and then the push order notification process is performed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2305, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and the push order notification processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2309 that BAR replay 1 is not performed, it is determined in step S2312 whether the current lottery result is a bell. In the case of the bell winning, in step S2313, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the pushing order in which the bell winning is established as the first small role, and then the pushing order notifying process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2312, the processing for notification of order of pressing is ended as it is.

  Returning to the description of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 54), if it is determined in step S2202 that it is not a push order winning combination, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not it is a transition opportunity winning combination. If it is a transition trigger winning combination, a transition trigger combination notification process is performed in step S2205. The process for notifying the transition trigger combination will be described in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2204, or after the processing of step S2203 or step S2205 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2206. In step S2206, it is determined whether an add-on command is received as the start command of this time. If the addition command is received, in step S2207, processing is performed to set an additional effect in advance so that the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is executed at the time of stop. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the additional effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, “curly”) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Details of the setting processing of the additional effect in step S2207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2401, based on the additional command received this time, processing is performed to grasp the number of additional games to be notified. In a subsequent step S2402, a process for grasping the notification timing is executed. The notification timing is a timing at which an extra effect is executed, and the timing is determined by processing (addition notification processing) on the main control device 101 side described later. Information on the determined timing is set and output in the above addition command. Therefore, on the display control device 81 side, it is possible to grasp the timing for executing the additional effect by reading the additional command. As the notification timing, a game in which an extra effect is to be executed and a timing corresponding to a stop operation of each stop switch 42 to 44 are set.

  After grasping the notification timing in step S2402, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the grasping result in step S2402 is to add an effect in the current game. If the addition notification is not given in the current game, the setting processing of the addition effect is ended as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2404 whether or not one of the reels is stopped ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is at the time of stop ON, in step S2405, a target reel that generates an extra effect is set, and an additional effect is generated when a stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process for setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of generation of the additional effect. Also, in step S2405, processing of reading out effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of added games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in a predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 recognizes that an extra effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation time flag, the CPU 181 reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area and causes the extra effect to be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined in step S2406 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. If it is during the stop-off operation of these reels, in step S2407, a target reel that generates an extra effect is set, and an additional effect is generated during the stop-off operation of the target reel. Specifically, processing for setting either the first reel stop OFF operation time flag or the second reel stop OFF operation time flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the added effect. Also in step S2407, the effect data of the added effect corresponding to the number of added games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is set in step S2408 to generate a current additive effect at the time of stopping all reels (during the stop OFF operation of the third reel). Specifically, processing is performed to set the third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2408, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After the process of step S2405, step S2407 or step S2408 is performed, the setting process of the additional effect is ended.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process, if no additional command has been received in step S2206, or after executing the process of step S2207, an effect setting process during bonus is executed in step S2208, and the process proceeds to step S2209. After setting the other start effects at step S2210, the start effect setting process is ended. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S2210, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in correspondence with the start of the game, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Direction setting process during each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process performed in step S2008 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of the respective reels.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs at the time of reel stop ON operation is set as an effect of the current game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If the target reel is not in a stop-ON operation, the setting process is terminated. If it is a stop ON operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a stop ON operation effect is performed in step S2504, and then this setting process ends.

  For example, when an additional effect is set as the current stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 is at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An extra effect occurs. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Also, for example, if the current game is a push order winning selection and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel is stopped based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the effect which shows the reel which becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is performed with the first reel shown in FIG. . Then, when the corresponding reel (the middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel (right reel 32R in the figure) to be operated next is shown in FIG. It changes to the production. Further, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the second reel shown in FIG. 42B is displayed as a stop target, and the second operation is performed by the stop ON operation. When the reel is stopped, the display changes to a target for stopping the third reel (FIG. 42C).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the process advances to step S2505 to determine whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the respective reels is finished.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the process advances to step S2506, and it is determined whether an effect to be generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the reel is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set, it is determined in step S2507 whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop OFF operation. When it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting processing is ended as it is. If it is the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2508, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

  For example, when an extra effect is set as the current stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the stop switch 42 to 44 is terminated and the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the present effect setting process ends.

<All stop production setting process>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a challenge mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a challenge mode end command is included, in step S2602, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters “end of challenge mode”. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "more aggressiveness!" In a male wild voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether an attack mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2604. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Attack mode! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “attack mode start!” With a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “Attack mode! Ver. 2” as a promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the text “Attack mode! Ver.3” is displayed. When the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the letters “Attack mode! Display is done.

  If no attack mode start command is included at step S2603, it is determined at step S2605 whether an attack mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2606. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the character display "Attack mode END" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the attack mode (VB mode including the specialization zone this time) is included. And the total number of payouts for the current attack mode (including the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "again" with a high voice of a woman) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If no attack mode end command is included in step S2605, it is determined in step S2607 whether a VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2608. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the character display “777 VICTORY !!” is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed such that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2607, it is determined in step S2611 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, processing for setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2612. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the character display "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continued games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode. The number of continued games (including the VB mode and the specialization zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of the attack mode (including the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the bonus) at the end of the VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I will continue still" in male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If it is determined in step S2611 that the VB mode end command is not included, it is determined in step S2613 whether the specialization zone start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2614. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a character display of “Supercharge Challenge !!” and a special mode in which it is easy to generate an attack mode overlay The character that suggests is displayed. In addition, in the specialization zone start effect, control is performed so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I will go" in the voice of a boy) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If a specialized zone start command is not included in step S2613, it is determined in step S2615 whether or not a specialized zone end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the specialization zone end command is included, in step S2616, processing to set specialization zone end effect is performed. In the specialization zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the specialization zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Cucucucucuine!”) Is emitted from the speaker 64. Note that the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 may be made different according to the total number of games played.

  If the specialization zone end command is not included in step S2615, it is determined in step S2617 whether the bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the bonus end command is included, in step S2618, processing is performed to set a bonus end effect. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during the current bonus, and the attack mode (VB mode, attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts in VB mode, specialization zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, effects such as characters suggesting these contents are performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of added games.

  After executing any of the processes in step S2602, step S2604, step S2606, step S2612, step S2614, step S2616, and step S2618, or after making a negative determination in step S2617, the process proceeds to step S2609, step S2619. move on. In step S2609 and step S2619, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already described, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2207 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 56), when the timing for generating this additional effect is set at the time of all stops, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), all the reels 32L and 32M are displayed. , 32R is stopped at the timing when the auxiliary display unit 65 adds an effect. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Thereafter, in step S2610 and step S2620, other stop-time effects are set, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In steps S2610 and S2620, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to be lighted in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or a sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

  As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to the notification of the transition of the display modes, processing for presentation in various games is performed.

<Processing for Effects in Various Games>
In the present embodiment, bonus effects and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The bonus effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning. A continuous effect is an effect that expects a player to have an advantageous result (a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.) and is expected to be played multiple times (four times in the present embodiment). It is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which notification is made as to whether or not the advantageous result has been obtained in the final game.

<Direction setting process during bonus>
First, the bonus production setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus effect setting process is a process performed in step S2208 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 54).

  In the bonus effect presentation setting process, it is determined in step S2701 whether a bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB is won to the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 is a case where the first BB or second BB winning is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2702, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether this bonus game is based on the first BB prize or the second BB prize. Then, in step S2703, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type determined in step S2702 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the process of step S2703 is performed, the bonus effect presentation process is ended.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect differ to the extent that the player can distinguish between the bonus game based on the first BB prize and the bonus game based on the second BB prize. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the first BB prize, the bonus display in which the moving image effect by the photographing is performed is set in the auxiliary display unit 65, and in the bonus game based on the second BB prize, the animation is performed in the auxiliary display unit 65. A bonus effect is set in which an effect is performed. Further, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are also different between the first BB and the second BB.

  Both bonus effects are effects independently performed regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be repeatedly performed as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a 5-minute moving image effect or animation effect is set as a unit effect, and when 5 minutes have passed after the start of the bonus effect and the unit effect ends, the unit effect is set to start again from the beginning again. In addition, about the production | presentation in the auxiliary | assistant display part 65, it is good also as a structure which stops on the screen at the time of completion | finish of unit production, and only a sound effect (song) is repeated. Further, the effects in the auxiliary display unit 65 may be implemented in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be implemented independently regardless of the progress of each game.

  As described above, while it is possible to distinguish the bonus effect based on the first BB winning and the bonus effect based on the second BB winning, the game result that triggered the first BB winning or the second BB winning is identified from the bonus rendering It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. In other words, regarding bonus effects based on the first BB winning, for example, the bonus effects are distinguished between the case where the first BB is won triggered by the special trip A duplicate 1 win and the case where the first BB win is triggered by the special trip AB duplicate 1 win. It is impossible or difficult to identify, and more specifically, the same bonus presentation is performed. The same applies to the bonus effects based on the 2nd BB prize, for example, the bonus effect triggered by the Special Trip A Overlap 2 win and the bonus effect triggered by the Special Trip AB Overlap 2 win are not distinguishable or distinguishable. It is difficult and the same bonus presentation is performed.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), a display indicating the number of continuations of the continuous effect is performed at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set (in FIG. Showing a sluggish drop production). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, an effect of the successful drop of the first stage is shown, It indicates that continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is provided to notify that the continuous effect is ended halfway (for example, an effect such as the first step of which the sluggish drop fails) ). The effects relating to the presence or absence of the continuous effect are the same in each game in the continuous effect.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the slow drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuation of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, the effect of the successful second stage drop is shown, and the continuous effect is continued) Show).

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of the daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect that informs whether or not the continuous effect is continued is shown (in the figure, the effect that the third stage daruma drop has been successful is shown, and the continuous effect continues. Show).

  As shown in FIG. 68 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is displayed (in the figure, a one-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is made as to whether or not the result is advantageous to the player (the drawing shows an effect that the last stage daruma drop was successful).

  As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of continuous rendering (how many games are until the end of continuous rendering).

  Here, in each game of continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous effect progresses. That is, when the first game of the continuous effect ends, the possibility that the continuation of the continuous effect is notified is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of the notification of the non-continuity decreases. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player is greatly different depending on how many games the current game is in the continuous production, and the high interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. .

  Hereinafter, the transition trigger notification process (step S2205) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2209) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 54) will be described as the processes related to the continuous effect.

<Process for notification of transition trigger role>
In the transition trigger notification process, first, in step S2801, a chance effect lottery process is performed to determine whether the chance effect is set as the effect of the current game. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “chance !!” and characters with surprise marks are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Make it correspond to each and make it display. In addition, in the chance effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Cuy” by electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, the lottery is performed so that the chance effect is generated in about one-half of the transition opportunity winning combination. In addition, it is good also as a structure from which the winning probability of a chance production | presentation lottery process changes with the kind of transition opportunity, a display mode, a gaming state, a setting value, etc. In the following step S2802, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2801 is won. If the game has been won, in step S2803, a chance effect is set to be performed as an effect of the current game.

  Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing winnings of each small role including a transition opportunity will be described.

  Among the roles that can be won in each game, the small roles that cause so-called dropping that can not be won by the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon . More specifically, as already described, the strong cherry is a role in which any of the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win, the 28th small role symbol for the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th small symbol designs are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed when the 20th “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the 7th “red bell” symbol, Neither the 28 small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the 35th small role symbol, the “cherry” symbol or the “second replay” symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a drop of the strong cherry role occurs.

  In addition, the weak cherry is a role in which any one of the 27th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can be won, and the 27th small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the second reel about the left reel 32L. The 35 small pattern symbols are "cherry" symbol and "second replay" symbol. Also in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the 20th "white bell" symbol from the seventh "red bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th small role symbol, the 32nd small role symbol to the 35th small role symbol, and the “second replay” symbol can be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination is missed.

  The strong watermelon is a role that can win either the 30th small role or the 41st small role, and the 30th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol for the left reel 32L are “watermelon” symbols. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed when the third “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the ninth “red 7” symbol, The small water symbol and the 41st small water symbol "watermelon" can not be stopped on the effective line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a drop of the strong watermelon role occurs.

  The weak watermelon is a role that can win either the 29th small role or the 41st small role, and the 29th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol for the left reel 32L are “watermelon” symbols. Also in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the third “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the ninth “red 7” symbol, The “watermelon” symbol, which is the 29th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol, cannot be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak watermelon role is missed.

  In this case, when the left reel 32L is operated to stop while retaining the possibility of winning for any of the roles that may cause such a drop, the sixth "second replay" symbol from the fourth "cherry" symbol is of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop operation at the timing when the upper row is reached. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a drop, and each operation mode in which the above-described drop occurs with respect to this is a nonspecific operation It is also referred to as an aspect (second operation aspect).

  Although the chance effect set in step S2803 suggests that the current winning combination is one of the transition triggers, it is set so that it cannot be determined or difficult to determine which transition trigger is Has been. In other words, when chance production is performed, the winning role of this game is either strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but it is either strong cherry or weak cherry Such as strong watermelon or weak watermelon, strong cherry or strong watermelon, etc. cannot be determined. Therefore, as a player, the left reel 32L is operated in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause any loss even if any of the transition triggers is won.

  In addition, the chance effect does not always occur in the game in which the transition trigger is won, but occurs on the condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S2801). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the specific operation mode described above every game from the normal time so as not to cause the drop of the transition trigger.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2802, or after the processing of step S2803 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the current start command. If the precursor command is not included, it is determined in step S2805 whether the additional command is included as the current start command. If no additional command is included, it is determined in step S2806 whether a bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, that is, if the result of the lottery is a transition opportunity such as strong cherry or weak watermelon, the transition lottery to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode or the number of continuous games will be added If the lottery has not been won and the bonus has not been won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2807. While the pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode, in the precursor mode, an advantageous result (winning of the challenge mode, etc.) is notified to the player based on the end of the number of precursor games, The pseudo precursor mode is a mode in which the game is ended without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the end of the number of pseudo precursor games.

  In step S2807, a table for pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b to determine whether to execute the pseudo precursor mode. Do. In the table for pseudo precursor mode lottery, the probability of winning the lottery in pseudo precursor mode is set differently depending on the type of transition trigger that has been won, for example, strong cherry is less than weak cherry The probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is set to be high.

  In step S2808, it is determined based on the processing result of step S2807 whether or not the lottery of the pseudo precursor mode is won. If the game is won, in step S2809, a lottery process is performed for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode. This processing corresponds to the step S 810 etc. on the main control apparatus 101 side, and randomly determines one of the 1 to 20 pseudo precursor game numbers by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the precursor mode based on various winnings, the number of pseudo precursor games is determined to be 20 games or less. In the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, the 0 game is not selected. In the following step S2810, processing is performed to set the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2809 in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result notification, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are continuously produced, a continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and a result is notified in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous effect counter in step S 2810 above, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode becomes the one corresponding to the start of continuous effect (the remaining 4 games), continuous effect is started It will be.

  In step S2811, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that it is the pseudo precursor mode in various flag storage areas 183a is executed. In the subsequent step S2812, a continuous effect flag is set. Thereafter, the transition opportunity notification process is terminated. If the determination in step S2804 to step S2806 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S2808 is negative, the process for notifying the transition trigger is ended.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2209 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2901, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as a start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, in step S2902, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games of the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (the remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In the case where the number of precursor games of 1 game to 3 games is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2902, the continuous effect is started halfway. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2902, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the effect of the third game of the continuous effect in FIG. 68 (c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the notification of winning in the attack mode or the like is performed without passing through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not performed. After performing the process of step S2902, a continuous effect flag is set in step S2903.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or after the process of step S2903 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2905. Then, in step S2906, it is determined whether the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. If the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2907 whether the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2908 to acquire an effect table for a warning from various table storage areas 182a. In step S2909, the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is specified from the sign effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Process to set as. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the pre-announcement production table, if the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the production data indicates that the continuous production continues until the next game. If it is 0, it is production data indicating that the current continuous production ends successfully.

  If it is determined in step S2907 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2910. In step S2910, a pseudo-sign effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2911, from the simulated precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, specify the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect, obtain the corresponding effect data from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and perform the current continuous effect Perform processing to set as. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the false precursor effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game or effect data indicating that it does not continue If the continuous production counter is 0, the production data indicates that the current continuous production ends due to failure.

  In addition, when the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the production data specified from the pseudo-signature production table includes those for which no continuous production is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous game continues until the next game shown in FIG. In the case where the effect data of the first effect game is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second effect game showing that the continuous effect is not continued until the next game in FIG. 68 (b) is set. By doing in this way, it is possible to set an effect in which a continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of a game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is zero.

  After the processing in step S2909 or step S2911, it is determined in step S2912 whether or not the continuous effect counter is zero. If the continuous effect counter is 0, processing is performed to clear the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag in step S2913. If the pseudo flag is not set, the state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2904, step S2906, or step S2912, or after the process of step S2913 is performed, the continuous effect setting process ends.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main control device 101 side is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R The rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and when the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds In the configuration to which the benefit is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of being replayed are provided as a result of the lottery process, and the RT state shifts by the establishment of winnings of corresponding promotion replays and fall replays. Whether or not the corresponding replay is achieved is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the acceptance lottery, and the notification of the operation order is a transition of the display mode performed according to the result of the lottery process It is done by winning the lottery. A push order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell winning and obtain a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability improves, and by transitioning to the display mode in which notification of the operation order is performed, in the RT state, the push is performed with the replay probability improved. A sequential bell prize can be established, and a large amount of medals can be obtained.

  As described above, when, for example, the game mode is shifted to the attack mode as a mode in which acquisition of a large amount of medals can be expected, the initial game number (50) is set, and the game in the attack mode becomes possible over the initial game number. If the winning lottery is won in the attack mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is increased, and the number of games that can be played in the attack mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be acquired in the attack mode can be increased.

<Additional notification mode>
In the slot machine 10, a plurality of additional notification modes are set when an additional number of continuous games in the attack mode occurs. More specifically, as an additional notification mode, the game for which the additional notification is performed has a plurality of different modes, and the additional notification is performed in a series of games triggered by the game in which the addition is generated or the game in which the addition is generated. In the case of performing (also referred to as “immediate notification” in the following description), in the case of performing an additional notification that is a game after the game in which the addition has occurred and the notification game is determined later (in the following description, “ Is also called “post-notification”.

  In the immediate ride notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which a ride occurs is, for example, a case in which the above-mentioned precursor mode occurs or a continuous effect occurs, etc., triggered by a game in which a ride occurs. A game that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition has occurred is referred to as a series of games. The series of games includes the case where continuous effects are not generated, and for example, the corresponding effects are not generated in the game in which the addition is generated, and the aspect in which the addition notification is generated after the next game or a plurality of games is also relevant. It is assumed that the game in which the addition has occurred and the game until the addition notification is generated are a series of games, and such an additional notification mode is also included in the immediate notification.

  On the other hand, in the post-notification, the post-determined game that is later than the game in which the extra has occurred is not determined in the game in which the extra has occurred. This is different from the series of games in the prompt ride notification in that the notification timing is determined after the attack mode is advanced, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the addition has occurred.

  In addition, as described in FIG. 58 above, as an effect mode of the additional notification, in addition to the mode in which the additional effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the effect is added with the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A mode in which an effect is generated is also set.

  Hereinafter, the mode of each additional notification will be described including processing for performing the additional notification.

<Additional notification processing>
In the main control device 101, the additional notification process is performed in step S919 of the second specific combination process (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specific combination process (FIG. 34), step S1104 of the special zone process, and the like. It is a process to be performed. That is, the process is executed as the process of the main control device 101 after winning the number of games in the attack mode and winning the lottery and adding the number of games. In the additional notification process, the game for performing the additional notification is set, and when the additional notification is performed in the game, the execution timing of the additional notification is set.

  An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the immediate ride notification, a part of the number of games in the remaining advantage zone number ZG is notified first as the number of remaining games in the advantageous period, and in the case of the post ride notification, the remaining number of remaining advantage zone games ZG An effect of notifying of the number of games of after is performed. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is the remaining number counter HG for display, and the number of games to be notified later is the additional loading counter BG, the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous section is the remaining number counter HG for display and the additional loading It becomes equal to the total value with the counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time the game is finished, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented even if the game is finished unless a post-loading alert occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games (remaining game number display ZGP) on the display displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 during the digestion of the attack mode is a predetermined number (this deformation). In the example, when 1), that is, when the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main control device 101 reaches a predetermined number (1), a post-notification is generated. In the post-notification, for example, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the post-add counter BG (150) has been added, as in the case of the extra notification effect. As a result, the added-on counter BG managed by the main control device 101 is subtracted by the notification amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG managed by the main control device 101 is notified by the added-on notification. The minute is added and updated, and the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (in the figure, one game is consumed 150).

  As described above, when the post-notification notification is selected at the time of the winning of the extra, a difference may occur between the remaining number counter for display HG and the actual number of remaining advantageous-interval games ZG. On the other hand, when the prompt notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining advantageous areas game ZG. In the present embodiment, the post-loading counter BG is referred to when the extra winning is selected, and whether the post-loading notification is selected or the immediate adding notification is selected depends on the current value of the post-counting counter BG.

  That is, in the processing for notification of addition, as shown in FIG. 69, first, in step S3001, processing for grasping the addition counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In the subsequent step S3002, a notification game lottery process is executed. The informing game lottery process is a lottery process as to whether the current additional notification is to be an additional notification or to be an immediate notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-loading lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed as to whether to post-post notification according to the value of the post-loading counter BG grasped in step S3001.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the post-loading lottery table is set so that the probability that the post-loading notification is selected may differ depending on the value of the post-loading counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the additional winning. Yes. For example, at the time of supercharge triggered by strong cherries, when the postload counter BG is less than 30, the postfix notification is selected at 20% (the immediate notification is selected at 80%), If the loading counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the post-loading notification is selected at 10%, and if the post-loading counter BG is 100 or more, the post-loading notification is selected at 5%, etc. As such, the selection rate of the post-loading notification is set to be lower.

  In addition, as a kind of specific part that triggered the extra winning, various types of so-called rare role (low probability trigger result, low probability result), such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc. In the case of a so-called regular combination (high probability trigger result, high probability result) having a relatively high winning probability such as push-to-play replay and various push-to-play bells, the post-loading selection rate when the value of the post-loading counter BG is small is higher. It is set. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, the post-on-call notification is selected with a probability of 100% in a situation where the post-on counter BG is less than 30.

  As described above, the additional counter BG is notified of the addition after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number, and is subtracted by the additional notification. Therefore, basically, as the game in the advantageous section, ie, the game in the attack mode progresses, the value of the afterload counter BG is often large, and conversely, at the beginning of the advantageous section, that is, in the game of the attack mode In the early stage, the value of the post-loading counter BG is likely to be 0 or a small value.

  That is, when winning in the early stages of the attack mode game, there is a high probability that the post-notification notification is selected, and in particular, in the event of winning in the extra role triggered by the regular role other than the rare role such as push order replay or push order bell. In the early stage of the attack mode, the post-notification is always selected. As a result, after the attack mode is started, the post-loading counter BG is likely to accumulate relatively early.

  After the notification game lottery process has been executed in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not an aftersake has been won. When the post-installation winning is not selected and the immediate mounting notification is selected, in step S3004, a process of adding the current extra winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S3005, a notification timing setting process is performed to set which timing the addition notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting at which timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

  The additional notification is set so that the execution timing varies depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 72, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are arranged in the stop operation order of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R as the execution timing of the superimposition notification in the current game. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, the timing when the stop ON operation is performed when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of each reel, and the timing when the stop OFF operation when the pressing operation is ended are performed; Is set.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are displaceable from an initial position disposed closest to the front side to an operating position disposed backmost. In the situation where it is disposed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are operated by operating from the initial position to the operation position. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal, the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop ON operation has been performed, in which the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed.

  Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pressed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are initially set by the biasing force of the spring or the like. Return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, based on the fact that the detection signal has been switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed in which the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is ended.

  The superimposition notification is set so as to occur as a stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 in any of the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation. That is, in the game in which the superimposition notification occurs, the superimposition effect may occur not only at the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing at which the pressing operation is ended.

  In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of added games is relatively small, for example, when 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the first reel stop ON operation is performed is selected at 5%. The timing at which the first reel stop OFF operation is performed is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, and the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (at the time of stop of all reels) is selected at 30%. In this case, the stop OFF operation is more easily selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the rear operation is more easily selected.

  On the other hand, when the addition of 100 games or more occurs, for example, as the number of games having a relatively large number of additional games, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel Is 10%, the second reel stop ON operation is 5%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 30%, the third reel stop ON operation is 5%, the third reel stop OFF operation ( When all reels are stopped), 45% is selected. Also in this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear operation is relatively easy to select.

  That is, in the present embodiment, it is set that the notification of the addition is more likely to occur at the stop OFF operation than at the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when the first to third reels are compared, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most easily selected, and the stop operation of the second reel is next most easily selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that the time of operation is the least likely to be selected.

  From the relationship with the number of added games, the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation is more easily selected as the number of added games increases. In other words, when it is detected in advance that the addition notification is generated, if the addition notification is not generated by the time of the third reel stop ON operation, the player is highly likely to generate the addition of a large number of games. While expecting, it is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed.

  In step S3005, based on the above-described addition notification execution timing table, the execution notification execution timing in the current game is set. Thereafter, the extra information notification process is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as the immediate notification, and the information on the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed subsequently to the processing for the present addition notification. In the addition command setting process (step S920, step S1007, step S1105, etc.), the addition command is set. The display control device 81 that has received the addition command including these pieces of information sets the addition notification effect based on these pieces of information (FIG. 56).

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the post-addition lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, a process of adding the current number of added games to the added counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S3007, after performing a process of setting a post-installation flag in the various flag storage areas 106d, the process of the superimposing notification is terminated.

  The post-loading flag indicates that the post-loading notification should be performed when the value of the post-loading counter BG is larger than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG becomes a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the setting process of the additional command executed subsequently to the processing for the additional notification, information indicating that the additional notification is not generated in the current game is set as the additional command. In the display control device 81 that has received the additional command including this information, control is performed so that no additional notification is generated in the current game (FIG. 56, step S 2403: NO).

<Post-loading notification processing>
Next, the post-notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The post-loading notification process is a process performed in step S1402 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 44) in the main control device 101.

  First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is one of an attack mode, a VB mode, and a specialized zone. Note that, as already described, which display mode is selected can be determined by grasping the corresponding flag. When it is not in these modes, that is, when in the normal mode or the challenge mode, the post-informing process is terminated as it is. If the mode is one of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialized zone, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not a bonus state is in effect. In the case of either the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-adding notification process is ended as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103, and the display remaining number counter HG is subtracted. In this case, in step S3103, a command including a value after subtraction of the display remaining number counter HG is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so as to update the display of the remaining game number display ZGP. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may be configured to perform processing for updating the remaining game number display ZGP.

  In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) as a trigger for post-notification notification as the processing result of step S3103. If the predetermined value has not been reached, the post-notification process is terminated. If the predetermined value is reached, it is determined in step S3105 whether the post-loading flag is set. If the post-loading flag is not set, the processing for post-loading notification ends.

  If it is determined in step S3105 that the post-loading flag is set, the process advances to step S3106. In step S3106, the value of the post-loading counter BG is grasped. In step S3107, processing for setting an addition command is performed so that the addition notification according to the value of the addition counter BG is performed. In this case, the addition command includes information on the notification of addition notification in the game, and information on the addition of the number of games according to the value of the addition counter BG. In addition, it is good also as composition which adds a part of after-loading counter BG, for example, after deciding whether a part is added by lottery, when it is considered as a part, it is added the number of the part game It is good to set the information of what is to be done to the extra command.

  In the subsequent step S3108, processing for subtracting the value corresponding to the number of added games set in the added command in step S3107 from the added counter BG is performed. Then, in step S3109, it is determined whether the add-on counter BG has become 0 as the processing result of step S3108. If it is not 0, the post-informing process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after the processing for clearing the post-loading flag in step S3110 is performed, the processing for post-loading notification is ended.

  As described above, in the post-notification process in the winning result corresponding process, the extra command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 81, so that the display control apparatus 81 performs steps in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 59). In the processing for addition notification at the time of all the stop of S2609 and step S2619, processing for performing addition notification effect is executed. Thereby, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG becomes a predetermined value, after the all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the additional notification is executed as the subsequent notification. For this reason, in a game in which the display remaining number counter HG is a predetermined value (1), regardless of the winning result of the game, it is expected that an additional notification (post-notification) will be performed, A stop OFF operation will be performed.

  Incidentally, the timing of the third reel stop OFF of the timing of the extra notification selected when immediate notification is performed may be different from the timing when the entire reel is stopped when post-addition notification is performed. That is, the time when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed is the timing at which the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, and the corresponding reel may stop at this timing, or the timing slightly delayed with the slip control. In some cases, the corresponding reel may stop. Therefore, the third reel stop OFF operation may be slightly earlier than the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop. On the other hand, the post-notification notification execution timing set in the post-notification notification processing in the winning result corresponding processing is the timing after the winning result corresponding processing is executed, and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are complete. If a small winning prize has been generated, the timing is after the medal payout is performed (after the payout determination process in step S413 is executed). Therefore, the timing at which the post-loading notification is performed can be later than the timing at which the third reel stop OFF operation is performed in the prompt mounting notification.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, as a kind of effect mode in the case where the superimposition notification is performed, a process for performing the superimposition notification accompanied by rotational effects of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the rotation effect process. The rotation effect process is a process performed in step S401 of the reel control process (FIG. 18) in the main controller 101. In the rotation effect process, a process for executing the corresponding rotation effect is performed based on the flag for the rotation effect set in the various flag storage area 106 d of the RAM 106. In the present embodiment, a pseudo freeze flag, a first freeze flag, a second freeze flag, and a third freeze flag are provided as flags for the rotation effect. First, an outline of the rotation effects (various freeze effects) corresponding to these freeze flags will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG.

  Here, with the freeze effect, the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (surrounding body) is started based on the operation of the start lever 41 (start operation means), and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (stop operation means) Stopping the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a normal game operation, and is an effect of restricting the start or progress of the normal game operation. More specifically, the freeze effect is based on the operation of the start lever 41, the rotation start control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the start lever 41, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 At least one of the rotation stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not performed (is restricted).

  In the present embodiment, the freeze effect corresponding to each freeze flag is set as a rotation effect to be performed when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started. In the present embodiment, the freeze effect is set to be triggered by a part of the game winning the ninth replay (special replay A). When the freeze effect is generated, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 76, the ninth re-game winning is established as the game result, and the re-game as a privilege based on the ninth re-game winning is given, and the automatic betting process is performed. When the start lever 41 is started (ta1, tb1) after the end, that is, in a state where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (ta1, tb1), first, the normal rotation direction (forward direction, downward direction, The rotation direction is rotated by a predetermined angle in the opposite direction (ta1 to ta2, tb1 to tb2). In the present embodiment, the predetermined angle is an angle at which one symbol is shifted by one frame, more specifically, for example, an angle at which a symbol placed at the lower stage is shifted so that it is placed at the middle (360 degrees ÷ 21 symbols≈17 degrees) ) Is set as an angle (about 15 degrees) smaller than. Then, after reverse rotation by a predetermined angle, the state of temporarily stopping at the position is maintained (ta2 to ta3, tb2 to tb3) for a predetermined period (about 1 sec). As described above, since the predetermined angle is smaller than the angle at which one symbol deviates by one frame, each symbol is disposed at a position deviated from the effective line in the situation where it is temporarily stopped. By doing this, even if the player misses the reverse rotation, it is easy to recognize the shifted state.

  Note that a plurality of types of angles may be provided as the predetermined angles, and the angles that are easy to select may be different according to the effect. In addition, a plurality of types of periods of the state maintained at the predetermined angle may be provided, and the periods that are easy to be selected may be different according to the effect. Furthermore, these angles and periods may be combined and applied to the effect, or may be paused at a plurality of types of angles stepwise.

  Among the freeze effects, when the pseudo freeze flag corresponding to the pseudo freeze effect is set, as shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. When elapses, the motor rotates forward and shifts to normal rotation control (ta3). Thereafter, stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (ta4), and the symbol corresponding to the game result of the current game is stopped on the active line (ta5). ).

  On the other hand, when any one of the first freeze flag, the second freeze flag, and the third freeze flag corresponding to the various seven freeze effects among the freeze effects is set, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 (b). In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after reverse rotation by the predetermined angle, the reverse rotation is further performed (tb3 to tb4), and then temporary stop is performed with the “red 7” symbols aligned on the predetermined line. (Tb4-tb5). After that, normal rotation is performed to shift to normal rotation control (tb5), and the symbol corresponding to the game result of the current game is stopped on the active line based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (tb6). (Tb7).

  In various 7 sets of freeze effects, the number of expected additional games is set to be different depending on the line in which the “red 7” symbol is aligned and paused. In other words, in the present embodiment, a freeze effect in which the “red 7” symbol is aligned with the middle line L2 and paused at the middle stage red 7, and a “red 7” symbol is aligned with the right-up line L5 and paused to the right. There is a set of freezing effects, and an upper red 7 freezing effect in which the “Red 7” symbol is aligned with the upper line L1, and the expectation of the number of additional games is the highest. It is set high so that the upside-down red 7-set freeze effect is the second highest, and the middle-stage red 7-set freeze effect is the lowest. In addition, the freezing effect for the 7th red in the middle stage is executed when the first freeze flag is set, the freezing effect for the 7th red rising in the right direction is executed by setting the second freezing flag, It is executed by setting the third freeze flag.

  In the rotation effect process, first, in step S3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the freeze counter FC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The freeze counter FC is a counter for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to know how many times the freeze effect is generated from the game for which the freeze effect is determined. More specifically, the CPU 102 controls to generate a freeze effect when the freeze counter FC becomes 0. For example, when 1 is input to the freeze counter FC, it is determined to perform the freeze effect. Then, control is performed so that a freeze effect occurs when the subtraction process (step S3201) is performed once. In this case, for example, if 1 is input to the freeze counter FC in a process prior to the rotation effect process such as a lottery process in the current game, the freeze counter FC becomes 0 in the current game, Freeze effect occurs. Further, for example, when 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in a process prior to the rotation effect process such as a lottery process in the current game, the game after one game, that is, the next game is triggered by the current game. Thus, the freeze counter FC becomes 0, and a freeze effect occurs in the next game. As described above, the freeze counter FC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp a game for executing the freeze effect in a series of games triggered by the game for which the freeze effect is determined.

  After performing the subtraction process of the freeze counter FC in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether the freeze counter FC is 0 and the current game is a game that should generate a freeze effect. If the freeze counter FC becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3203, and it is determined whether the pseudo freeze flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the pseudo freeze flag is set, a process for clearing the pseudo freeze flag is executed in step S3204, and in step S3205, the pseudo freeze effect is set as the rotation effect of the current game. Do. In this case, the main control device 101 executes the pseudo freeze effect by individually controlling the stepping motors connected to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  If it is determined in step S3203 that the pseudo freeze flag is not set, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the first freeze flag is set. If the first freeze flag is set, a process for clearing the first freeze flag is executed in step S3207. In step S3208, a freeze effect that matches the middle red 7 is produced as the rotation effect of the current game. Set to be done. In this case, the main control device 101 executes a freeze effect in the middle stage of red 7 by individually controlling the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  If it is determined in step S3206 that the first freeze flag is not set, it is determined in step S3209 whether the second freeze flag is set. If the second freeze flag is set, a process for clearing the second freeze flag is executed in step S3210. In step S3211, the right-up red 7-freeze effect is produced as the rotation effect of the current game. Set to be performed. In this case, the main control device 101 individually performs control of the stepping motors connected to the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, thereby executing the upside-down, red-to-seven reddish freeze effect.

  If it is determined in step S3209 that the second freeze flag is not set, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the third freeze flag is set. If the third freeze flag is set, a process of clearing the third freeze flag is executed in step S3213, and in step S3214, a freeze effect that matches the upper red 7 is produced as the rotation effect of the current game. Set to be done. In this case, the main control device 101 executes the freeze effect of the upper seven reds by individually controlling the stepping motors connected to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  After executing the processing of step S3205, step S3208, step S3211 and step S3214, or after making a negative determination in step S3202 or step S3212, in step S3215, other rotation effect setting processing is executed. In the other rotation effect setting processing, various rotation effects provided in addition to the above freeze effects (for example, effects that vary the rotation start timing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R). Setting so as to perform freeze rendering etc. without starting. After the process of step S3215 is performed, the rotation effect process is ended.

  As described above, various freeze effects are set as one mode of the effect mode when the additional notification is performed. In the present embodiment, these various freeze effects are configured to be generated during the bonus based on the first BB and second BB wins.

<Fourth specific role process>
As the lottery process related to the instruction function during the bonus, the fourth specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The fourth specified winning combination process is a process performed in step S710 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) in the main control device 101, and is performed on the condition that the player is not in the carryover state but in the bonus state. .

  In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the current game result is the second combination during BB. If it is the second combination during BB, the first pseudo effect process is executed in step S3302, and then the fourth specific combination process is terminated. If it is not the second combination during BB, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not it is the third combination during BB. If it is the third combination during BB, the fourth specific combination process is terminated after executing the BB instruction lottery process at step S3304. If it is not the third combination during BB, that is, if the current game result is the first combination during BB, the fourth specific combination process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in the bonus state, the player can win the first combination in BB, the second combination in BB, and the third combination in BB (FIG. 28). The first combination during BB is the bell combination, and the second combination during BB and the third combination during BB are replays. More specifically about the second role in BB and the third role in BB, the second role in BB is the game result of winning the ninth replay (special trip A), and the third in BB is the ninth replay ( It is a game result which becomes a special replay A) and the tenth replay (special replay B). If the fourth specified combination process is a game result won in the ninth re-game, either the first pseudo effect process or the BB instructed lottery process is executed, of which the tenth re-game is won. If it is not, that is, if the second role during BB is performed processing for the first pseudo effect is performed, if the tenth replay is won, that is, if the third role during BB is performed processing for the instruction lottery for BB during Processing. Hereinafter, the first processing for pseudo presentation and the processing for instruction lottery during BB will be respectively described.

<Processing for the first pseudo effect>
The first pseudo rendering process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3401, processing is executed to grasp the value of the out counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. The outage counter is a counter that can be added when the lottery regarding the instruction function is not won in a state that is not a bonus state, that is, in a normal gaming state or various RT states. The outlier counter is reset to an initial value (0) by an initialization process (not shown) at the end of the bonus state (BB state). That is, it can be said that the off counter is an index indicating how much the lottery regarding the instruction function has not been won in the game between the bonus.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the lottery relating to the instruction function, the transition lottery to the VB mode or the specialization zone, the attack executed in the first specified combination process, the second specified combination process, and the third specified combination process As a process in the case where the mode addition lottery or the like is set and the lottery regarding these instruction functions is not won, a pseudo addition notification process is provided (step S929 in FIG. 33, step S1016 in FIG. 34). ). In the pseudo top notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, in step S3501 a process is performed to identify a trigger combination that has not been won in various lotterys this time. Then, in step S3502, the addition point of the out-of-counter is grasped. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the various table storage area 105a is provided with a deviation counter table, and the deviation counter table is assigned points to be added to the deviation counter according to the lottery trigger role. The outlier counter table is basically set so that more points are added to game results with a lower winning probability in each game. For example, if the lottery for the various instruction functions is not won with strong cherry as a trigger, 10 points are added to the counter and added to the counter, and the weak cherry as a trigger for the lottery with various instruction functions does not win 1 Points are assigned to offset points and add them to the counter. In addition, it is set that the game result which is not the overlapping role with the bonus is awarded more points than the overlapping role, for example, 10 points are set in the strong cherry, while in the strong cherry overlap 1 One point is set. After the addition point of the out-of-counter is grasped in step S3502, the addition processing of the out-of-counter is performed in step S3503, and the pseudo top notification process ends. That is, more points are accumulated in the out-of-place counter as the number of non-winning scenes in the lottery regarding the various instruction functions increases, and more specifically, it is a trigger with a high probability of winning the lottery regarding the instruction functions. The more scenes that are not won in the lottery, the more points are accumulated.

  Returning to the description of the first pseudo-effect process, in step S3401, after executing the process of grasping the value of the out-of-point counter in which points are accumulated in the pseudo-addition notification process, the pseudo-freeze is performed in step S3402. A lottery process is executed. In the pseudo-freeze lottery process, a pseudo-freeze lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a pseudo-freeze effect is performed on the basis of the outage counter grasped in step S3401. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the pseudo freeze lottery table is set such that the winning probability of the pseudo freeze effect is higher as the value of the out counter is larger.

  After executing the pseudo freeze lottery process in step S3402, it is determined in step S3403 whether the pseudo freeze is won or not. If the pseudo freeze is won, a process of setting a pseudo freeze flag is performed in step S3404. Thereafter, in step S3405, a process of inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC is performed, and then the first pseudo effect process is terminated. As a result, a pseudo freeze effect is generated at the start of reel rotation in the next game of the current game. If the pseudo freeze is not won, the first pseudo effect process is terminated.

  As described above, the game result of the game before the transition to the bonus state can contribute to the occurrence of the freeze effect during the bonus state. By doing this, it is possible not only to enhance the rendering effect in the bonus state, but also to be able to make it aware that the timing and situation of transition to the bonus state affect any lottery in the bonus state. Become.

<Process for instruction lottery during BB>
Next, the instruction lottery process during BB will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the BB instructed lottery process is a process performed in a game in which both the ninth replay and the tenth regame are won in the bonus state (the third winning combination game in BB). It is.

  In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the current bonus is a bonus based on a game result in which a setting difference is provided in the winning probability. As shown in FIG. 36, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, chance A overlap 1, chance B overlap 1, middle bell overlap 1, special lip A overlap 1 and single The first BB when winning one of the 1BB and the second BB when winning either one of the special Lip A overlap 2 and the single second BB are bonuses based on a game result in which no setting difference is provided. On the other hand, the first BB in the case of winning special Lip AB duplication 1, strong cherry duplication 2, weak cherry duplication 2, strong watermelon duplication 2, weak watermelon duplication 2, chance A duplication 2, chance B duplication 2, middle bell duplication 2 When the special lip A overlap 2 and the special lip AB overlap 2 are won, the second BB is a bonus based on a game result in which a setting difference is provided. That is, even in the same first BB and second BB, whether or not the bonus is based on the game result provided with the setting difference differs depending on the winning opportunity.

  As already described, in the present slot machine 10, various lotteries regarding the instruction function are performed based on the game result without any setting difference. Therefore, during a bonus based on a game result without a setting difference, various lotteries regarding the instruction function can be executed, while during a bonus based on a game result with a setting difference, various lotteries regarding the instruction function. The configuration of the execution of is limited. In the following description, a bonus based on a game result that does not have a set difference is also referred to as a non-restricted bonus depending on whether or not a lottery regarding the instruction function is present, and a bonus based on a game result that has a set difference is limited. It is also called a bonus.

  And, as described above, there are cases where even the same first BB or second BB is the restriction target bonus, or there are cases where it is the restriction non-target bonus, and a combination of symbols winning when moving to the bonus state (prize From the aspect), it is not possible to distinguish between the restricted bonus and the restricted non-target bonus. However, the ratio between the restricted bonus bonus and the restricted non-target bonus is different between the first BB and the second BB. For example, in the setting 3, the winning probability of the first BB and the second BB in total is the same including the duplicate winning. Even though there is one (about 496th), the restricted bonus for the 1st BB is won about 1 in 1310 (about 38% of the 1st BB), and the non-targeted bonus is won about 1 in 800 (the 1st) In contrast to about 62% of 1BB), the restricted bonus for 2nd BB is won at about 1/10 (about 49% of 2nd BB), and the non-target bonus is won at about 1/97 ((1) About 51% of the 2nd BB). That is, from the viewpoint that the percentage of the first BB being a restricted non-target bonus is higher than that of the second BB and the lottery concerning the instruction function is executed, the first BB is preferable to the player.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601, and the current bonus is a non-restricted bonus, it is determined in step S3602 whether the display mode before the bonus state transition is the normal mode or the challenge mode. In step S3602, even when the display mode before the transition to the bonus state is the normal mode or the challenge mode, if the attack mode winning flag is set, that is, the bonus and the winning lottery for the transition to the attack mode are simultaneously won. If so, a negative determination is made.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the in-BB mode lottery process is terminated after executing the in-BB mode transition process in step S3603. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, in step S3604, the BB medium addition process is executed, and then the BB instruction lottery process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3601 that the current bonus is a restriction target bonus, the processing for the second lottery for virtual presentation is executed in step S3605, and then the processing for instruction lottery for BB is ended.

  Hereinafter, the processing during BB mode transition, the processing during BB extra processing, and the processing for the second pseudo rendering will be described respectively.

<Processing for BB mode transition>
The BB middle mode transition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3701, a mode transition lottery process is performed. In the mode transition lottery process, a BB transition mode transition table stored in various table storage areas 105a is acquired, and a mode transition lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the BB in-mode transition table is based on the current display mode, the difference between the first BB and the second BB, and the value of the outlier counter, and the transition probability at the time of winning the mode transition lottery The display mode is set to be different.

  More specifically, for example, in the mode transition lottery executed in the bonus state based on the first BB winning that has shifted to the normal mode, if the out-counter value is 5 or less, the mode shifts to the challenge mode with a probability of 5%. It shifts to the attack mode with a probability of 1%, and shifts to the super attack mode with a probability of 0.1%. Similarly, even if it is a bonus state based on the 1st BB win that was transferred during the normal mode, if the out-counter value is 21 or more, it shifts to the challenge mode with a probability of 10%, and shifts to the attack mode with a probability of 5% And transition to the super attack mode with a probability of 1%. If the bonus state is based on the first BB winning that is shifted during the challenge mode, even if the value of the counter is the same, the transition winning rate of each mode is higher than that in the normal mode. In the case of the above, the transition to the attack mode is made with a probability of 20%, and the transition to the super attack mode is made with a probability of 10%.

  The bonus status based on the 2nd BB win is higher than the bonus status based on the 1st BB win, even if the value of the out-of-counter is the same. To the challenge mode with a probability of 10%, to the attack mode with a probability of 5%, and to the super attack mode with a probability of 1%.

  Therefore, the probability of winning the mode transition lottery is higher in the case where 1 BB and 2 BB are won in the situation where many points are accumulated in the out counter, and the case in which 2 BB is elected more than 1 BB is more The winning probability of mode transition lottery is high. However, as described above, the percentage of the restriction target bonus is higher in the second BB than in the first BB, and the possibility of the mode transition lottery being performed (the processing in the BB mode transition is performed) is higher in the first BB.

  In the present embodiment, in one bonus state, the result of the mode transition lottery is reflected when the next BB instructed lottery process is started (during the third winning combination during BB). For example, when winning the transition lottery to the challenge mode in the mode transition lottery in the bonus state transitioned to the normal mode, the mode transition lottery from the challenge mode is performed in the next processing during BB mode transition. In addition, when the transition lottery to the attack mode is won in the mode transition lottery in the bonus state transitioned to the normal mode, in the processing for the next BB during instruction lottery, the negative determination is made in step S3602, Processing is performed.

  After executing the mode shift lottery process in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the shift lottery to any mode has been won. If no lottery for transition to any mode has been won, the process proceeds to step S3703, and after setting the pseudo freeze flag, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC at step S3704, and then the mode transition to BB mode is performed. End the process. In this case, a pseudo freeze effect is generated at the start of rotation of the next game of the game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3705, and it is determined whether or not a lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won. If a lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won, in step S3706, processing is performed to set the first freeze flag.

  In subsequent step S3707, a process for setting a challenge mode winning flag is executed, and in step S3708, a process for setting the number of games in the precursor mode to 0 is executed. In this case, at the end of the bonus state, a challenge mode winning notification effect is generated, and the challenge mode is started from the next game in the bonus state. Then, after inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC in step S3704, the processing during BB mode transition is ended. In this case, at the start of rotation of the next game of the game, the middle red 7 match freeze effect occurs.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the process advances to step S3709 to determine whether or not a lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won. When the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, in step S3710, a process of setting the second freeze flag is executed.

  In a succeeding step S3711, processing for setting an attack notification flag is executed. In this case, it is possible to establish the first promoted replay winning after the end of the bonus state, and the transition to the attack mode occurs early. If the challenge mode flag or the challenge mode winning flag is set in step S 3711, these flags are cleared. After that, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3704, and the processing during BB mode transition is ended. In this case, at the start of the rotation of the next game of the game, a rightward ascent red seven-pointed freeze effect occurs.

  The case where the negative determination is made in step S3709 means that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3712, the third freeze flag is set, the attack notification flag for attack is set in step S3713, and the specialization zone notification flag is set in step S3714, and the freeze is performed in step S3704. After 2 is input to the counter FC, the BB mid-mode transition processing is terminated. In this case, when the rotation of the next game of the game starts, the upper row red 7 set freeze effect occurs, and it is possible to establish the first and second promoted replay wins and the BAR replay wins after the end of the bonus state. The transition to the super attack mode occurs early.

<Process for adding on BB>
The BB middle-up processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3801, a lottery process in which the number of games in the attack mode is increased is executed. In the game number addition lottery process, the BB medium addition lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 105a is acquired, and the game number addition lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the BB middle added lottery table is set so that the added winning probability and the number of added games at the time of winning differ depending on the difference between the first BB and the second BB and the value of the out counter. .

  More specifically, for example, in the bonus state based on the first BB win, if the value of the out-of-counter is 5 or less, 30 games will be won with a probability of 20% and 50 games will be won with a probability of 15%. And will win 100G on a 5% chance. Similarly, even in the bonus state based on the 1st BB, if the value of the out-of-counter is 21 or more, 30 games will be won with a probability of 40% and 50 games will be won with a probability of 30%. Win a 100 game with a 20% chance. That is, in the case where the game is shifted to the bonus state in the situation where many points are accumulated in the out-of-counter, the probability of winning in addition increases, and the number of added games at the time of winning also increases.

  Further, when comparing the first BB and the second BB, the second BB is set to have a higher winning probability and a higher number of additional games at the time of winning. For example, in the bonus state based on the 2nd BB win, if the value of the out-counter is 21 or more, it will win 30 games with a probability of 10%, 50 wins with a probability of 40%, 50% Win 100 games with a probability of

  After the number-of-games lottery process is executed in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the bonus is won. If the winning combination is not selected, the pseudo freeze flag is set in step S3803, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S3804, and the process for adding in BB is terminated. In this case, a pseudo freeze effect occurs at the start of rotation of the next game of the game.

  If it is determined in step S3802 that the addition is won, the process proceeds to step S3805. In step S3805, it is determined whether the number of added games is 30 games. If there are 30 games, processing to set the first freeze flag is executed in step S3806. If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined in step S3807 whether the number of added games is 50 or not. If the number of games is 50, at step S3808, a process of setting the second freeze flag is executed. A negative determination in step S3807 means that the number of additional games is 100, and in this case, in step S3809, processing for setting the third freeze flag is executed.

  After executing any one of steps S3806, S3808, and S3809, the process proceeds to step S3810. In step S3810, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. More specifically, processing is performed to add the number of games added this time to the number G3 of continuations of the attack mode. In the following step S 3811, processing is performed to add the current number of added games to the display remaining number counter HG. In step S3812, an addition command is set. In step S3804, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC, and the BB addition process is terminated.

  In this case, when the first freeze flag is set in step S3806, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), a middle stage red 7 match freeze effect is generated as an effect at the start of the rotation of the next game of the current game. After that, an additional notification effect of 30 games is generated as an effect at the time of all stops when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Further, when the second freeze flag is set in step S3808, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), a freeze effect of 7 sets of red rising as the right occurs as an effect at the start of the rotation of the game next to the current game. Thereafter, a 50-game additional notification effect is generated as an effect at the time of all stops when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Then, when the third freeze flag is set in step S3809, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the freeze effect of the upper seven reds is generated as an effect at the start of the rotation of the game next to the current game, Thereafter, an additional notification effect of 100 games is generated as an effect at the time of all stops when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. In addition, when each red 7 uniform freeze effect occurs, a display effect corresponding to the red 7 uniform freeze effect (for example, an effect of displaying a state in which a soldier character raises a male take) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Occur.

<Process for second simulated effect>
The second pseudo effect processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the second processing for pseudo-representation is processing performed in a game in which the third winning combination in BB is won in the restriction target bonus.

  In the second processing for pseudo-representation, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not it is a bonus transferred in the normal mode or the challenge mode. In addition, since the transition lottery of the display mode is not performed during the restriction target bonus, the result of the determination processing is different in the same bonus state by setting the attack mode winning flag as in the process of step S3602 afterward. There is no event.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the first pseudo effect process is executed in step S3902, and then the second pseudo effect process is terminated. The first pseudo effect process is the same as the process of FIG. 78, and a process for generating a pseudo freeze effect is performed according to the value of the off counter accumulated before the bonus shift.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901, it is determined in step S3903 whether a post-loading flag is set. If the post-loading flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3902, and processing for pseudo freeze effect is executed in the first processing for pseudo effect. If the post-loading flag is set, processing for pseudo top during BB is executed in step S3904, and the processing for the second pseudo effect is ended.

<Pseudo addition processing in BB>
The BB pseudo addition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, the process for pseudo-addition during BB is a case where the display mode is attack mode or VB mode, and the transition is made to the restriction bonus in the situation where the post-installation flag is set in the specialization zone. This will be done if you win the third role during the BB during the bonus. In the processing during the pseudo top during BB, processing for performing a pseudo top notification effect without performing the additional lottery is set for the additional lottery in which the execution is limited in the restriction target bonus.

  That is, in step S4001, a process of grasping the value of the post-loading counter BG is executed. As described above, the post-loading counter BG corresponds to the number of additional games for which the addition of the number of games in the attack mode has occurred but the notification to that effect has not been made. In a succeeding step S4002, it is determined whether or not the post-loading counter BG grasped in the step S4001 is less than 30. If it is less than 30, in step S4003, the first pseudo effect process is executed, and then the BB medium extra process is terminated. As described above, in the first pseudo effect process, the process for the pseudo freeze effect based on the off counter is performed.

  If it is determined in step S4002 that the retrofit counter BG is 30 or more, a notification game number lottery process is executed in step S4004. In the notification game number lottery process, a pseudo-addition notification effect (hereinafter also referred to as a “pseudo-addition notification effect”) is performed based on the first pseudo addition table acquired from the various table storage areas 105a and the post-addition counter BG. The number of informing games is In the first pseudo top table, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games are set as the number of informing games in the pseudo top notification effect. If the post-counter BG value is 30 or more and less than 100, 30 games are selected with a probability of 100%, and if the post-counter counter BG value is 100 or more and less than 200, 30 games and 50 games are 50%. If the value of the after-loading counter BG is 200 or more, the 30 games are selected 10%, the 50 games 40%, and the 100 games 50%. That is, the larger the value of the post-loading counter BG, the larger the number of games notified in the pseudo-additional notification effect, and the number of notifying games is the additional number in the additional lottery that occurs when the third winning combination is won in the limited non-target bonus. It is associated with the number of games.

  After the notification game number lottery process is executed in step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005. In step S4005, it is determined whether notification of 30 games is selected in the notification game number lottery process. If thirty games are selected, at step S4006, a process of setting a first freeze flag is executed. In step S4007, a process of subtracting 30 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and in step S4008, a process of adding 30 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, it is determined whether notification of 50 games has been selected in the notification game number lottery process. If 50 games are selected, in step S4010, a process of setting a second freeze flag is executed. In step S4011, a process of subtracting 50 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and in step S4012, a process of adding 50 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

  The case where a negative determination is made in step S4009 means that the notification of 100 games has been selected in the notification game number lottery process. In this case, in step S4013, processing for setting the third freeze flag is executed. In step S4014, a process of subtracting 100 from the post-loading counter BG is executed, and in step S4015, a process of adding 100 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

  After one of the processes in step S4008, step S4012, and step S4015 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4016. In step S4016, a process of inputting 2 to the freeze counter FC is executed. As a result, when the first freeze flag is set, the middle stage red 7 uniform freeze effect is generated when the next game starts rotating, and when the second freeze flag is set, the right is displayed when the next game starts rotating. When the rising red seven-set freeze effect occurs and the third freeze flag is set, the upper red seven-set freeze effect occurs at the start of the next game rotation.

  Then, in step S4017, a process of setting an overlay command is executed. The additional command includes information for generating an additional notification effect for the number of games added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S4008, step S4012 or step S4015 in the game. As a result, the additional display effect corresponding to the various 7 sets of freeze effects generated in the current game is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

  After executing the process of step S4017, it is determined in step S4018 whether or not the post-loading counter BG has become zero. If the post-loading counter BG is 0, processing to clear the post-loading flag is executed in step S4019. If a negative determination is made in step S4018, or after the process of step S4019 is performed, the processing for pseudo top during BB is ended.

  By doing as described above, during the restriction target bonus, an extra notification effect accompanied with various red seven-freeze effects is generated. This additional notification effect is not an actual addition lottery, but a pseudo effect.

  The relationship between the number of games that can be selected and the post-loading counter BG will be supplementarily described.

  Fifty games are selected as the number of informing games in the pseudo-addition informing effect only when the after-loading counter BG is 100 or more (100 to 199). Then, even if 50 games of the post-addition counter BG are notified as the pseudo superimposition notification effect of this time, the remaining 50 games or more remain in the post-addition counter BG. Further, 100 games as the number of notification games are selected only when the post-counter BG is 200 or more. Then, even if 100 games of the post-addition counter BG are notified as the pseudo superimposing notification effect this time, the remaining 100 games or more remain in the post-addition counter BG. On the other hand, as the number of notification games, 30 games are selected when the post-counter counter BG is 30 or more, and the post-counter counter BG can be zero due to this pseudo-addition counter notification effect. It is possible for the above to remain.

  That is, when the middle stage red 7 set freeze production occurs and the 30-game addition announcement production occurs as the pseudo-addition announcement production, addition for 30 games is added as the current addition announcement production, but what about the back-loading announcement afterward It can not be determined whether or not On the other hand, when a freeze effect with 7 colors rising upward to the right is generated as a pseudo-additional notification effect and a 50-game addition notification effect is generated, not only addition for 50 games is made as the current addition notification effect but also after the rest. This indicates that 50 games or more remain as extras. In addition, when the upper row red 7 set freeze effect is generated as the pseudo additional notification effect and the additional notification effect of 100 games is generated, the addition for 100 games is made as the additional notification effect of this time, and the remaining after This means that 100 minutes or more remain as minutes. Then, even if it is determined that the additional notification effect in the above-mentioned restricted object bonus is a pseudo thing, the information above the additional notification effect will be provided, and the additional notification effect will be motivated to confirm be able to.

<Pseudo addition notification is performed>
The relationship between the actual remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG when the post-addition notification and the pseudo additional notification are performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of tc1, the initial game number in the attack mode is the remaining game number ZG (more specifically, the attack mode continuation number G3). The same initial game number is input to the display remaining number counter HG. Thereafter, every time the game is consumed, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

  When an extra winning event occurs at the timing of tc2 or the timing of tc3 and an extra winning is made (for example, when the extra occurs based on a strong cherry), the number of additional games is added to the number of remaining games ZG. If the prompt notification is selected, the number-of-additional game is also added to the remaining display number counter HG at the timing of tc2 or at the timing of tc3.

  When it is not the immediate ride notification but the late ride notification is selected for the winning with tc 4 timing, the number of additional games is added to the remaining game number ZG, while the number of added games is added to the display remaining number counter HG. Is not performed. As a result, an event occurs in which the actual value of the remaining game number ZG and the value of the display remaining number counter HG are different. Thereafter, when the game is digested until the value of the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value (1) as the timing of tc5, an additional notification of the unreported portion occurs. As a result, the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes the same value (or a value close to) the value of the remaining game number ZG.

  It is also assumed that the post-notification notification is selected for the additional winnings at the timing of tc6, and thereafter, the restricted non-target bonus is won at the timing of tc7. As already described, even during the attack mode, during the bonus, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are not subtracted every time the game is consumed. On the other hand, also in the bonus in the attack mode, increase processing of the number AG of advantageous section games is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the effect during the bonus, the remaining game number display ZGP of the auxiliary display unit 65 is subjected to a subtraction stop display indicating that the update is stopped (FIG. , And the character display of "STOP" is displayed so as to overlap on the front side with the remaining game number display ZGP). On the other hand, for the display of the total number of games corresponding to the advantageous section game number AG, the subtraction stop display is not performed, and the player can grasp that the update has not stopped. In addition, in the effect during the bonus, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of remaining payouts corresponding to the number of remaining payouts of the bonus, and it is possible for the player to grasp how many more games can be consumed in the bonus. It has become.

  As described above, in the restricted non-target bonus, an additional lottery is carried out when the third combination is won during BB, and when the additional lottery is won, various red seven sets of freeze effects are generated as an additional notification. For example, in the case of winning the addition at the timing of tc8 or the timing of tc9, an addition notification effect occurs with a red seven set freeze effect corresponding to the number of added games. In this case, since the remaining game number ZG is added in the main controller 101, the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 is also added and updated by the corresponding game number. When the bonus state is ended at the timing of tc10, the subtraction processing of the remaining game number ZG and the remaining display number counter HG is also resumed.

  When the display remaining number counter HG reaches the predetermined value (1) at the timing of tc11, the extra amount generated at the timing of tc6 is notified as a post-notification. Thereafter, at time tc12, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG both become 0, and the attack mode (advantageous section) ends.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of td1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining as in FIG. 89 (a). It is input to the number counter HG. After that, an addition occurs at the timing of td2, timing of td3, timing of td4, and timing of td6. Of these, the addition of the timing of td2 and td3 is selected for immediate addition, and the addition of the timing of td4 and td6 is added later. It is assumed that notification has been selected.

  The additional amount at the timing of td4 is notified by the post-notification at the timing of td5 based on the display remaining number counter HG becoming a predetermined value. This is the same as the description of the timings tc4 and tc5.

  Unlike the restriction non-target bonus transferred at the timing tc7, it is assumed that the bonus transferred at the timing td7 is a restriction target bonus. As described above, in the restriction target bonus, even if the third combination in the BB is won, implementation of the extra lottery is restricted. However, in the present embodiment, during the restriction target bonus, a pseudo additional notification effect using the unannounced additional may be generated. In other words, if the third combination in the BB is won at the timing of td8, the pseudo-addition notification is generated using the extra portion generated at the timing of td6. In this case, a part of the number of added games generated at the timing of td6 is used as a pseudo-addition notification, and an additional notification effect accompanied by a red seven-match freeze effect is performed.

  Then, after the bonus state is ended at the timing td9, the post-notification of the remainder of the addition generated at the timing td6 is performed at the timing td10 at which the display remaining number counter HG becomes a predetermined value. Thereafter, the attack mode (advantageous section) ends when both the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG become 0 at the timing of td11.

  The restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus will be additionally described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the first BB and the second BB are mainly set as bonus combinations for shifting to the bonus state. In the first BB, a winning is established when the “red 7” symbols are aligned and stopped on the active line, and in the second BB, a winning is established when the “white BAR” symbols are aligned and stopped on the active line. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp which bonus from the winning mode. In addition, in the during-bonus effect setting process (FIG. 60) by the display control device 81, it is set such that different effects are performed corresponding to each bonus. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which bonus is the first BB and the second BB not only in the winning mode but also in the bonus state.

  The 1BB and 2BB are set as a single winning combination and a double winning combination. As a double winning combination, a double role with a transition opportunity such as strong cherry or strong watermelon (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, strong) Watermelon duplication 1, 2 etc), duplication role with 9th replay (specially rep A duplication 1, 2), duplication role with 9th replay and 10th replay (special rep AB duplication 1, 2) is set It is done.

  The winning combination of the single winning combination and the ninth replay is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability for both the first BB and the second BB. The second BB is a limited non-target bonus that does not limit the lottery regarding the instruction function. In addition, with regard to the overlapping roles of the ninth replay and the tenth replay, there is a setting difference in the winning probability for both the first BB and the second BB, and the first BB and the second BB triggered by the combination are This is a bonus subject to restriction that restricts the lottery regarding the instruction function.

  On the other hand, the duplicate combination with the transition opportunity combination is set so that no difference in the winning probability is set for the first BB, and the first BB triggered by the combination is a non-restricted bonus, For 2BB, there is a setting difference in the winning probability, and the second BB triggered by the combination is a restriction target bonus.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even if it is the same 1BB and 2BB, it is set so that the phenomenon which becomes a restriction | limiting object bonus or a restriction | limiting non-targeting bonus by a win opportunity may arise. Therefore, for example, when winning the third role during BB during the first BB and generating an additional notification effect accompanied by a red seven set freeze effect, is it an additional notification effect accompanied by an actual addition or is it an after? It is difficult to determine whether it is a pseudo additional notification effect using the unreported information.

  More specifically, when winning the third role in the BB during the first BB, when an additional notification effect accompanied by a red 7 set freeze effect is generated, the current bonus is a duplicate role with the transition trigger role or the ninth replay If it is a bonus triggered by an overlapping role and a single winning combination, the additional notification effect is an additional notification effect accompanied by an actual addition, while the current bonus is an overlap with the ninth replay and the tenth replay If the bonus is triggered by a combination, the additional notification effect is a pseudo additional notification effect. In addition, in the case of winning the third role in BB during the 2nd BB, when an additional notification effect accompanied by a red 7 set freeze effect occurs, the current bonus is triggered by the overlapping role with the ninth replay and the single winning combination In the case of a bonus, the additional notification effect is an additional notification effect accompanied by an actual addition, while the current bonus is an overlapping role with the transition trigger role or an overlapping role with the ninth replay and the tenth replay. If it is a bonus as an opportunity, the additional notification effect is a pseudo additional notification effect.

  In addition, particularly with regard to the overlapping role with the ninth replay and the overlapping role with the ninth replay and the tenth replay, it is set that the stopping numbers in the winning game are easily shared. Specifically, the ninth reel game and the tenth reel game share the same symbol for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but the symbol for the left reel 32L is “red bell” in the ninth reel game. It is a symbol or a "white bell" symbol, and the "youth" symbol is set in the tenth replay. Six “red bell” symbols and “white bell” symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, while only one “young man” symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L. In the left reel 32L, the “young man” symbol is arranged thirteenth, and the “white bell” symbol is arranged in the twelfth and the fifteenth immediately above it. Therefore, in the situation where both the 9th regame and the 10th regame are won, the target symbol of the 10th regame will be stopped on the active line of the left reel 32L so as to become the 10th regame prize. If so, it is necessary to stop at the timing when the 13th “Youth” symbol reaches the active line, and at other times, that is, from the 14th “First Replay” symbol to the 12th “White” If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the “bell” symbol reaches the active line, the target symbol of the ninth regame is stopped instead of the target symbol of the tenth regame.

  Therefore, in the special Lip AB duplicated 1 and 2 winning games, which are overlapping roles with the 9th regame and the 10th regame, basically the 9th regame prize is established, and the 10th regame prize is deliberately aimed. Only when the stopping operation is performed and the stopping operation is successful, the tenth replaying game winning is established. Then, in the special Lip A overlapping 1,2 winning game that is a duplicate role with the 9th regame, the stop game (stop game that becomes the 9th regame prize), the 9th game and the 10th game The stopping points in the special Lip AB overlapping 1,2 winning game which is a duplicate combination are basically the same, and it is difficult to determine which bonus combination is a trigger. In other words, it is difficult to determine whether the bonus is the restriction target bonus or the restriction non-target bonus from the stop appearance in the winning game, and whether the additional notification effect accompanied by the red 7 match freeze effect in the bonus is a pseudo thing It is difficult to determine whether or not.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The setting probability is provided for the winning probability, and during the restriction target bonus in which the implementation of the additional lottery is limited, a pseudo additional notification effect is generated by using an unannounced part of the post addition notification. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the restricted bonus while preventing the degree of advantage of the restricted bonus transitioning to the advantageous section from being too high.

  The pseudo additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus is configured to be executed based on the third position winning in BB that can be won in the restriction target bonus, and the winning probability of the third position in BB is the same regardless of the set value. It was a probability. By doing this, the appearance rate of the trigger for pseudo addition notification in the restriction target bonus can also be made the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, in the restriction target bonus whose transition rate varies depending on the setting value, not only is it aimed to improve the interest by the pseudo addition notification, but also the camouflage that the bonus is the restriction target bonus by the pseudo addition notification is well set. The effect of making it difficult to predict the value can also be expected.

  In the case where a pseudo addition notification effect in the restriction target bonus is performed, a freeze effect in which the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is limited is generated. The main control device 101 executes lottery for each game and the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, while the sub display control device 81 provides various effects such as the auxiliary display unit 65. Based on the premise that it will be executed, it is considered that the player is likely to have a suspicion that even if the above-described pseudo addition notification effect is performed as various effects on the sub side, it is a pseudo effect. In that respect, as described above, the pseudo addition notification effect accompanied by the freeze effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the main control device 101 side is not an addition notification effect as a mere effect but an actual addition effect. It will be easier to give the impression that the lottery has passed. Therefore, the effect of the additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus can be improved.

  In addition, the same kind of freeze effect to be executed with the pseudo additional notification effect is associated with the freeze effect that occurs when the addition is performed in the restricted non-target bonus, and the same type of additional notification effect is performed. It was configured to perform the freeze effect of. Also in this way, it is possible to reinforce the impression that the pseudo extra notification effect is an actual extra lottery.

  In the case where the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated even at the time of the third role winning during BB, the configuration is such that the pseudo freeze effect which does not develop into the various red 7 set freeze effects is executed. In this way, it is possible to further intensify the impression, which is the additional notification effect that has occurred after the lottery, by daringly showing that there is also a case where the lottery is missed. And since this pseudo freeze is also generated at the time of the addition non-winning in the restriction non-target bonus actually, from the relationship with the restriction non-target bonus, the reliability of the pseudo additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus It is possible to provide

  It is configured to generate a pseudo additional notification effect after making the stopping number corresponding to the lottery result that is triggered to appear, and more specifically, the next game in which the stopping number that becomes the third combination winning in BB has appeared The pseudo-addition notification effect is generated at the start of the operation. An event under the jurisdiction of the main control device 101 such as a stoppage is more effective than the event under the jurisdiction of the display control device 81 such as a display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65. From the point of view of the above, the configuration described above is configured to generate a pseudo additional notification effect after providing the reliability. By doing in this way, if you make an additional notification effect after making it reliable by stopping the appearance so that you can not suspect that the additional notification effect that can occur in the future is a pseudo thing, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the additional notification effect is false.

  In addition, after the reliability is given by the stop number, and the reliability is further given by the freeze effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the additional display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is generated. Further, the effect of preventing the added notification effect from being overlooked as being pseudo is enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, from the point of executing the pseudo addition notification effect based on the third winning combination during the BB as a game result, the impression that is an additional notification effect through the lottery on the main control device 101 side. The effect given is enhanced.

  Even if the third bonus combination in the BB is won in the bonus subject to restriction, the pseudo-addition notification effect is not generated depending on the value of the post-add counter BG. This makes it possible not only to simply win the third role in BB, but also to strongly give the impression that it is necessary to win some sort of lottery (additional lottery). In addition, if it is possible to generate a situation in which no additional notification is generated when the third winning combination is won in BB in this manner, a lottery table may be created such that the third winning combination in BB is not won according to the value of the post-loading counter BG It is not necessary to use a special configuration, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the bonus subject to restriction while avoiding a sense of incongruity such as a bonus that is difficult to win the third role in the BB with a simpler configuration. It becomes possible.

  In addition to the third role in the BB, the second role in the BB is provided as a role that can be won during the bonus subject to restriction, and the third role in the BB is a role that is won in the ninth replay and the tenth replay. On the other hand, the second part in BB is the part that wins the ninth regame, and the second part in the BB and the BB in the BB in that the 9th replay winning prize may appear at the time of winning. It is in common with the third role. And since the second role during BB does not generate the pseudo additional notification effect, it is the case where the stop number of the ninth re-game winnings appears, and the above pseudo additional notification effect is If it does not occur, it can not be determined whether it is due to the winning of three in BB or the winning of a second in BB. Thereby, even if there is a scene that does not generate an extra notification effect based on the third winning combination during BB, such as a scene in which the back-up counter BG is not accumulated, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that can be given.

  The second role in BB and the third role in BB are both roles to which replay is given, and it is possible for the player to make a difference such as presence or absence of generation of pseudo additional notification effect as described above. There is no difference in the degree of advantage of As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult to determine which of the second role in BB and the third role in BB is the generation trigger of the additional notification effect.

  In the attack mode or the like, the post-loading counter BG is easily accumulated by pushing order bell or pushing order replay. More specifically, push-to-play bells and push-to-play replays are more likely to be selected as an add-on notification when winning an add-on, rather than a so-called rare role such as strong cherry. As described above, accumulation of the post-counter BG is generated by a push order bell or the like having a relatively high winning probability, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp that the accumulation of the post-counter BG has occurred, and the bonus subject to restriction It is possible to make it hard to realize that it is the one using the post-loading counter BG even if the pseudo additional notification is generated in the above.

  When the restriction target bonus with the difference of the winning probability by the setting value is compared with the restriction non-target bonus without the difference of the selection probability with the setting value, the mode of the additional notification effect occurring during the bonus is common. From the aspect of the informing effect, it was not possible to identify which bonus is being played. In this way, it is difficult to distinguish between the restricted bonus and the restricted non-interest bonus, and by making the restricted bonus be considered as the restricted non-interest bonus, it is possible to improve the playability of the restricted bonus.

  In addition, if it is difficult to distinguish between the two bonuses that differ in the presence or absence of the difference in the probability of winning by the set value as described above, it becomes difficult to distinguish the difference in the probability of winning by the set value. It becomes easy to give. In other words, for example, even if a lot of game media are acquired by shifting to a limited bonus with a setting difference, if it cannot be distinguished from a non-restricted bonus, it is not due to the set value, It is also possible to give the impression of being earned by luck.

  The extra notification effect that is executed with the non-restricted bonus is the immediate announcement that is executed in a series of games triggered by the extra bonus, while the extra notification effect that is executed with the restricted bonus is a game that is won by the extra bonus. Although it is an after-loading notification that is executed in a later game and is determined after the game, the immediate-on notification and the after-on notification other than during bonus are different to the extent that the player can distinguish. However, it is possible to distinguish between the on-the-spot notification during bonus and the post-on notification. That is, it is possible to grasp that both notifications are the same notification by experiencing both notifications during the bonus on the premise that they can be identified except during the bonus.

  In particular, in the post-informing notification other than during the bonus, it can occur in a game in which the remaining game number display ZGP continuously displayed during the attack mode is 1, and the post-informing notification can be generated. While it is possible to detect in advance (from multiple games in advance), it is not possible to detect until after the BB 3rd prize in the after-loading notification in the restriction target bonus, from the game triggered by an instant notification other than during bonus It is included in the category of notifications performed in a series of games. Even from such a difference, it is easy to grasp that the additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus is not a post-informing notification, and strongly gives an impression that the post-informing notification is not a pseudo one. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from non-restricted bonuses.

  The winning probabilities of the third combination in the BB that triggers the additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus and the non-restriction bonus are common to both bonuses. Therefore, even from the appearance rate of the third combination in the BB, it is not possible to determine which of the bonuses, and the effect of improving the gameability of the restriction target bonus is enhanced.

  In addition, when an additional notification effect is generated at the time of winning the third combination during the BB, a stop event that becomes the ninth re-game winning is made to appear for any bonus. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish the bonus even from the stoppage, and as a result of the drive control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the main control device 101 side, the impression that the above-mentioned additional notification effect is generated is displayed. It is possible to strongly give, and to judge that the additional notification effect performed in the restriction target bonus is the one after the additional lottery, that is, an effect that makes the current additional notification effect appear to be the effect occurring in the restricted non-target bonus. Can be increased.

  Whether it is a restriction target bonus or a non-restriction bonus, no additional notification effect is generated when the second combination is won during BB. In addition, the stop appearance at the time of winning the second part in BB is common to the restricted bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, and the winning probability is also the same. That is, it is difficult to distinguish which bonus is from the stop appearance and the appearance rate even from a scene where the additional notification effect does not occur, and the effect of improving the gameability of the restriction target bonus can be enhanced.

  In the BB instruction lottery process, the restriction target bonus and the non-restriction bonus process differ from the middle when the third BB winning combination is selected, and the second pseudo effect process is executed for the restriction target bonus. In the bonus, the process for shifting to the BB mode and the process for adding in the BB are executed. As described above, the processing configuration is simplified in order to commonize the processing up to the middle of any bonus and to generate an additional notification effect that varies depending on the bonus type.

  Moreover, for example, the processing for setting various freeze flags or the like is common to both processing whether it is the processing during addition during BB or the processing for the second simulated effect. In other words, in the configuration in which the processing up to the middle is shared as described above and the processing from the middle is different, the common processing also exists in the different processing, so the processing configuration can be further simplified. ing.

  In the first BB, it is possible to shift to the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus, and in the second BB, it is possible to shift to the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus. In other words, it is not possible to distinguish between the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus from the winning and winning points at the time of bonus transfer (“Red 7” symbol alignment and “White BAR” symbol alignment). In addition, since effects by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are common to the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus, it is possible to distinguish between the restricted target bonus and the restricted non-target bonus in appearance after winning. It becomes like this. Also from this, the effect of enhancing the playability of the restriction target bonus is enhanced.

  Also in the winning game, the stopping points of the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus are basically the same, and for example, the restriction non-target bonus, Special Lip A Overlapping 1 and the restriction target bonus In the case of the special Lip AB overlapping 1 winning, basically, the ninth re-game winning as the special Lip A is established. By doing so, it becomes even more difficult to distinguish which bonus it is.

  However, if it is limited to the winning game, it is possible to discriminate between the restricted bonus and the restricted non-targeted bonus. In the above-mentioned special Lip A overlapping 1 winning and special Lip AB overlapping 1 winning, Depending on the success or failure of the game prize, the restricted bonus and the non-restricted bonus can be distinguished. In this way, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of a player who wants to enjoy the performance without distinguishing both bonuses and a player who wants to enjoy the performance after distinguishing both bonuses. .

  At the time of winning the special Lip AB duplicate 1, the 9th re-game can be more easily established than the 10th re-game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 at the stop operation timing corresponding to the 10th re-game win. Only when the player can stop the game, the tenth replay prize is established. A player who wants to enjoy the effects after making a distinction between the two bonuses is highly likely to be a player who is skilled in playing a game, and from that point of view, it is possible to distinguish between the two bonuses by adopting the configuration described above. It becomes possible to reduce the possibility that a player who wants to enjoy the effects without getting stuck will accidentally make the tenth re-game winning a prize.

  When executing the additional lottery in the restricted non-target bonus, the winning probability of the additional lottery is made to differ according to the situation before the bonus transition. More specifically, the winning probability of the bonus drawing during bonusing is made different according to the accumulation state of the out-of-counter before the bonus transition. In this way, after the awareness that the game situation before the bonus transfer can affect the winning probability of the extra lottery in the bonus, etc., in the restricted bonus, depending on the accumulation status of the post-counter counter BG before the bonus transfer By adopting a configuration that generates a pseudo-addition notification effect, it is possible to accept an event in which the additional notification effect in the bonus subject to restriction is easily generated or difficult to generate according to the value of the post-addition counter BG. It becomes possible.

  When comparing the restricted target bonus with the setting difference of the winning probability with the restricted non-targeted bonus without the setting difference, the ease of winning may be reversed depending on the set value. That is, for example, when the winning probabilities of the restricted bonus based on the special Lip A overlap 1 and the restricted non-target bonus based on the special Lip AB overlap 1 are compared, as shown in FIG. The winning probability is about 1/1010, and the special Lip AB overlap 1 is about 1/550, and the special Lip A overlap 1, that is, the bonus to be restricted is easier to win. On the other hand, in the setting 6, the winning probability for the special Lip A overlap 1 is about 1/1010, the special Lip AB overlap 1 is about 1/546, and the special Lip AB overlap 1, that is, the restriction non-target bonus is more It is easy to win. As described above, since the ratio between the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus varies depending on the set value, it may be difficult to distinguish whether or not the additional notification effect performed with both bonuses is pseudo. it can.

<Modification 1>
In the present modification, the processing configuration of the BB pseudo addition processing in the above embodiment is changed. FIG. 91A is a flowchart showing a part of the BB medium addition process in the present modification.

  In step S4101, the post-counter BG is grasped. In the following step S4102, a pseudo-addition lottery process is executed. In the pseudo-addition lottery process, the second pseudo-addition table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an addition notification effect accompanied by freeze effects of various types of red seven. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the second pseudo extra table is set so that the winning rate of the pseudo extra notification effect and the number of pseudo extra games at the time of winning differ according to the value of the post-add counter BG. . In particular, when the value of the afterload counter BG is equal to or less than 30, it is set so that the pseudo-addition of any game number does not occur.

  In step S4103, based on the processing result of step S4102, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-addition notice lottery has been won. If the pseudo extra notification lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S4104, the first pseudo effect process is executed, and then the BB pseudo extra process is terminated. The first pseudo rendering process is as described in step S4003 and the like. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, the process advances to step S4005 to execute processing for pseudo additional notification effect with various red 7 sets of freeze effects.

  That is, as in the above-described configuration, even if the red seven sets of freeze effects are generated after the pseudo added lottery, the value of the post load counter BG does not reach the minimum number of added games in the bonus state, the pseudo added If the player does not win the lottery, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience such as the post-loading counter BG becoming negative.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the second pseudo addition table is set so that the pseudo addition notification may not be won even if the value of the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more. That is, the notification selection rate is 0% if the post-loading counter BG is less than 30, the notification selection rate is 30% if it is 30 or more and less than 100, and the notification selection rate is 50% if it is 100 or more and less than 200. If the value is 200 or more, the notification selection rate is set to 70%, etc., so that the notification selection ratio increases as the value of the post-loading counter BG increases.

  In other words, even if there is a potential number of additional games for many extra games, there will be many situations in which a pseudo extra notification is not generated during the bonus, and the rarity of such extra notification can be enhanced. Not only that, but because of its rarity, the degree of joy when an additional notification is made is increased, and even if the third role in the BB is won in a scene where the back-up counter BG will be accumulated By deliberately showing a scene in which no additional notification is generated, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a suspicion that the additional notification is pseudo.

  A plurality of bonuses with different addition wins may be provided in the restricted non-target bonus, and the effects of each of the plurality of bonuses may be associated with the effects in the restricted target bonus with different notification selection rates. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the extra winning probability at the time of the third winning combination in the BB is set to be different according to the rank of the attack mode at the time of shifting to the bonus state. Specifically, for attack mode ranks 1 to 4 when winning the third role in BB, it is not won in rank 1 and is won in rank 2 with a probability of 30%, 50 in rank 3 The extra lottery table in the BB is set so that an extra win is won with a probability of%, and an extra win is awarded with a probability of 70% in rank 4. In rank 1, the effect in the bonus state is the first effect (background blue), in rank 2, the effect in the bonus state is the second effect (background yellow), and in rank 3, the effect in the bonus state is the third effect (background). (Green), in rank 4, the effect in the bonus state is set to be the fourth effect (background red), and each rank is set so that the player can clearly grasp the effect in the effect state in the bonus state.

  Under such a premise, the effect mode during the bonus state is made different depending on the notification winning rate of the pseudo additional notification during the restriction target bonus. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), if the value of the backcounter BG is less than 30, the effect in the bonus state is set as the first effect (background blue), and the value of the backcounter BG is 30. If it is less than 100, the effect in the bonus state is the second effect (background yellow), and if the value of the post-counter BG is 100 or more and less than 200, the effect in the bonus state is the third effect (background green). If the value of the retrofit counter BG is 200 or more, the effect in the bonus state is set as the fourth effect (background red). In this way, it is possible to grasp from the effect in the bonus state that the notification winning rate in the bonus state is high or low, and to add the effect with the non-restricted bonus and various red 7-freeze effects. Since the relationship with the occurrence rate of the notification effect is the same relationship with the restriction target bonus, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the additional notification effect generated during the restriction target bonus is a pseudo thing .

  In this case, the effect in the bonus state in the restriction target bonus may be configured to be able to reflect not only the value of the add-on counter BG but also the rank of the attack mode. For example, instead of setting the effects in the bonus state of the non-restricted bonus in a one-to-one correspondence according to the rank of the attack mode, the first effect is easily selected in rank 1, and the second effect to the fourth effect Although the effect is hard to be selected, the effect in the bonus state of the restriction object bonus is considered after the second effect to the fourth effect can be selected even if it is the restricted non-intention bonus in the attack mode of rank 1. It is preferable to select from the post-loading counter BG at the time of transition and the rank of the attack mode. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incompatibility between the rank of the attack mode and the in-bonus effect of the restriction object bonus.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the occurrence probability of the pseudo additional notification effect is made different according to the number of remaining payouts in the bonus state. FIG. 92 shows various pseudo addition tables in this modification.

  In the pseudo extra lottery process (step S4102) in the present modification, the current value of the remaining payout counter is grasped. Then, a pseudo additional table according to the value of the remaining payout number counter is acquired, and whether or not the pseudo additional notification effect is to be executed, and the number of informing games in the case of execution are determined by lottery.

  FIG. 92A shows a third pseudo addition table acquired in a situation where the remaining payout number counter is 150 to 216, and FIG. 92B shows a situation where the remaining payout number counter is 100 to 149. FIG. 92 (c) shows a fifth pseudo top table acquired in a situation where the remaining payout counter is 1 to 99. FIG. As already described, the remaining number counter is subtracted by paying out medals in the bonus state. Therefore, the larger the value of the remaining payout counter, the smaller the number of medals paid out in the bonus state (the smaller the number of winnings of the first combination in BB is less), in other words, the unsettled game in the bonus state. This shows a large number of situations. That is, the situation where the third pseudo extra table is acquired is a situation where the number of undigested games in the bonus state is greater than the situation where the fourth pseudo extra table or the fifth pseudo extra table is acquired. The situation in which the fourth pseudo extra table is acquired is a situation in which the number of undigested games is larger than the situation in which the fifth pseudo extra table is acquired, and is less than the situation in which the third pseudo extra table is acquired. . The situation in which the fifth pseudo extra table is acquired is a situation in which the number of undigested games is smaller than the situation in which the third pseudo extra table or the fourth pseudo extra table is acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the third pseudo additional table to the fifth pseudo additional table are set so that the pseudo additional notification effect does not occur in the situation where the post-add counter BG is less than 30 in any table. On the other hand, if the post-loading counter BG is 30 or more, the occurrence rate of the pseudo-adding notification effect is the lowest in the third pseudo-adding table when compared in a situation where the values of the post-loading counter BG are the same. The upper table is set to be the highest. Also, the number of notification games at the time of winning the pseudo extra lottery is set so that the third pseudo extra table is the smallest and the fifth pseudo extra table is the largest.

  By adopting the above-described configuration, it is difficult to generate pseudo added notification of a large number of games in the early stage of the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an event in which the post-loading counter BG is exhausted as the game progresses during the bonus state.

  In particular, in the restriction target bonus, since the post-loading counter BG is not replenished during the bonus state, the occurrence rate of the pseudo-additional notification tends to be different between the beginning and the end of the bonus state unless configured as described above. It can be a factor to realize that the additional notification effect is a pseudo thing. In that respect, by adopting the configuration as described above, it is possible to make the incidence rate of pseudo-additional notification close to an average over the whole bonus state, and it is difficult to realize that it is a pseudo one. Can be further increased.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the occurrence probability of the pseudo additional notification effect is made different according to the progress status of the attack mode. FIG. 93 shows various pseudo addition tables in this modification.

  In the pseudo extra lottery process (step S4102) in the present modification, the current advantageous section game number AG is grasped. Then, a pseudo additional table according to the value of the advantageous section game number AG is acquired to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo additional notification effect, and the number of informing games in the case of execution is determined by drawing.

  FIG. 93A shows a sixth pseudo addition table acquired in a situation where the advantageous segment game number AG is less than 100, and FIG. 93B shows a situation where the advantageous segment game number AG is 100 or more. 7 shows a seventh pseudo addition table obtained in (5). As described above, the advantageous section game number AG indicates the number of digested games after winning in the attack mode or the like. In other words, the situation where the sixth pseudo top table is acquired indicates that the bonus state in this time is the bonus state in which the number of digested games from the start of the advantageous section is less than 100 (the state immediately after the start). The situation in which the seventh pseudo extra table is acquired is that the current bonus state is a bonus state in which the number of digest games since the start of the advantageous section has reached 100 or more (a situation in which a certain period has elapsed since the start). Is shown. Note that the pseudo-addition table to be acquired may be made different depending on the number of games (number of digested games) from the start of the attack mode, instead of the number AG of advantageous section games.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (b), as in the second pseudo addition table and the like, the seventh pseudo addition table does not generate the post-notification effect if the post addition counter BG is less than 30, and the post addition counter If BG is 30 or more, the occurrence rate of the post-notification effect increases as the value increases, and the number of notification games at the time of occurrence increases. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), the sixth pseudo addition table is set so that the post-notification notification effect does not occur regardless of the value of the post-addition counter BG. In addition, although a partial false top notification effect may be generated also in the sixth false top table, the occurrence rate may be lower than that of the seventh false top table.

  In other words, in this variation, the bonus to be restricted that has been transferred in a situation shortly after the start of the advantageous section, such as the attack mode, does not generate a pseudo-addition notification effect, and a certain number of games from the start of the advantageous section such as the attack mode. In the restricted target bonus shifted in a situation where the user has digested the symbol, a pseudo-additional notification effect occurs.

  As described above, in a situation in which the attack mode has not been started, that is, in a situation where accumulation of the post-loading counter BG can not be expected, the pseudo-superimposed notification effect is simulated by not generating the pseudo-additional notification effect. The impression that is a thing can be further diluted. Accumulation of the post-loading counter BG is likely to depend on the number of wins for a specific role that can be expected to be added, but the situation where the attack mode has just started is often the number of wins for the specific role, The influence of the number of times itself on the post-loading counter BG becomes large. On the other hand, if the number of winnings of the specific combination increases, the influence of the selection rate between the immediate notification and the additional notification also increases, and the influence of the number of elections of the specific combination on the aftergage counter BG becomes relatively small. . In other words, with the above configuration, the pseudo-additional notification effect is not generated from the beginning when the event given by the player such as the number of winnings of the specific combination has a large influence, or the pseudo-additional notification effect By making it hard to occur, it becomes possible to make it hard to give the impression of notifying the content that has been won in advance.

  Furthermore, in the configuration in which selection between the immediate ride notification and the post ride notification is performed at the time of addition during the restriction non-target bonus, the selection ratio may be made different according to the progress status of the attack mode. When the post-notification notification is selected, only the process of adding the number of extra games to the post-addition counter BG is performed without generating an extra notification effect with various red seven-frozen freeze effects. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), in a situation where the advantageous segment game number AG is less than 100, the post-notification is always selected. The post-notification is selected at a ratio (30%). By doing in this way, regardless of whether the restriction non-target bonus or the restriction target bonus, in the early stage of the attack mode, the red 7 uniform freeze effect does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of varying the winning probability of the lottery with the pseudo-addition according to the progress status in the restriction target bonus.

  In addition, the pseudo freeze is generated when the post addition notification is selected in the restriction non-target bonus, and the pseudo freeze is generated at a predetermined ratio even when the pseudo addition notification effect is not generated in the restriction target bonus. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the freezing occurrence mode (occurrence ratio of the additional notification effect) in the restriction target bonus and that in the non-restriction bonus, and to increase the effect of making it impossible to distinguish between both bonuses. .

  In addition, in the early attack mode, the pseudo freeze may not be generated when the addition occurs during the restricted non-target bonus, that is, when the post-notification notification is selected. In this case, even in the bonus to be restricted, it is preferable that a pseudo freezing is not generated even if a lottery is not won in the pseudo-addition in the early attack mode. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impression that the bonus transferred in the early stage of the attack mode does not cause an extra or that the extra notification is always selected (with a high probability) even if an extra occurs. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo overlay notification effect and the actual overlay notification effect.

<Modification 4>
In the present modification, the incidence rate of the pseudo-additional notification effect differs depending on the set value. FIG. 94 shows a pseudo overlay table in the present modification.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the eighth pseudo addition table of this modification, in the situation where the post-addition counter BG is 30 or more, the occurrence rate of the pseudo addition notification effect and the number of notification games at the time of occurrence differ depending on the set value. For example, in a situation where the back-up counter BG is 30 to 99, the probability that a 30-game pseudo additional notification effect will occur is 30% for settings 1 and 2, 35% for settings 3 and 4, and 40 for settings 5 and 6. The higher the setting value, the higher the incidence rate of the pseudo additional notification effect. Further, in a situation where the post-loading counter BG is 100 to 199, the 50 G pseudo-superimposed alerting effect is set not to occur in settings 1 and 2 but to occur in setting 3 or more. Furthermore, the pseudo-addition notification effect of 100 games is set so that it can be selected only in the situation where the back-up counter BG of the settings 5 and 6 is 200 or more. , Settings 5 and 6 are confirmed.

  By doing this, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the pseudo-additional notification effect, and further, even if the player is convinced that the additional notification effect is a pseudo thing, It is possible to suppress an event that the player feels that the additional notification effect is a meaningless effect.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the pseudo additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus is made to differ depending on the winning mode in the winning game of the restriction target bonus. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a winning result corresponding process for the BB winning game in the present embodiment. The BB winning game winning result handling process is a process that is performed along with the above-described winning result handling process (FIG. 44), and is, for example, a process that is performed before step S1401.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether or not it is a first BB or second BB winning game. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in which the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, or if any flag is set but set in a game prior to the game, the main BB The processing for the winning game is ended. By making an affirmative determination in step S4201, the process proceeds to step S4202.

  In step S4202, it is determined whether the game result of the current game is the special rep AB duplication 1 or the special rep AB duplication 2. When the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is set in response to a game result other than these, the processing for the present BB win game is ended. If the BB winning flag is set triggered by these game results, the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, processing for grasping the winning result of the current game is executed. As already described, when a winning combination is won in each game, priority / non-priority may be set in the winning order depending on the type of winning combination. The slot machine 10 is configured such that the replay is preferentially won in the duplicate combination of the replay and the bonus as in the special Lip AB duplication 1 and 2. The replay is a game result that does not cause a miss, and in the special Lip AB overlapped 1, 2 winning game, either the ninth regame or the tenth regame will win. The process of step S4203 is a process for grasping which of the ninth re-game prize and the tenth re-game prize is established.

  In step S4204, based on the processing result of step S4203, it is determined whether or not a tenth regame prize (special Lip B prize) has been established. If the tenth replay winning is not established, that is, if the ninth replay winning is established, the processing for the present BB winning game is ended. If the tenth re-game win has been established, in step S4205, a process for setting a freeze limit flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the process for the BB winning game is ended.

  As described above, in the situation where the ninth replay and the tenth replay are dually won, the ninth replay win is overwhelmingly easier to be achieved, and a specific stop operation mode (effective line of the left reel 32L The tenth replay prize is established only when the stop operation is performed in the stop operation mode performed at the timing when the 13th “youth” symbol arrives. That is, in the process for the BB winning game, the freeze limit flag is basically not set, and the freeze limit flag is set only when a stop operation is performed in a specific stop operation mode in the BB winning game. Is done.

  Next, the second processing for pseudo-representation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the current bonus state has shifted to the normal mode or the challenge mode. If the mode has been shifted to the normal mode or the challenge mode, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is set, the processing for the second pseudo-effect is ended. If the freeze restriction flag is not set, the first pseudo effect process is executed in step S4303, and then the second pseudo effect process is terminated. As already described, the first pseudo-effect process is a process for generating a pseudo-freeze effect. That is, when the freeze restriction flag is set, the first pseudo effect process is not executed and the pseudo freeze effect does not occur.

  If it is determined in step S4301 that the mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, it is determined in step S4304 whether the post-loading flag is set. If the post-loading flag is set, the second pseudo effect processing is terminated after executing the BB mid-pump processing in step S4305. If the post-loading flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4302, and as described above, the processing of whether to generate the pseudo freeze effect is performed depending on the presence or absence of the freeze limit flag.

  Next, processing for pseudo top during BB in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The pseudo-addition process during BB in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the process in the first embodiment, and the difference is whether or not a pseudo-freeze effect and various red 7-freeze freeze effects are generated. It is different depending on the presence or absence of a flag.

  That is, as in steps S4001 and S4002, a process of grasping the post-loading counter BG is executed in step S4401, and it is determined in step S4402 whether the post-loading counter BG is less than 30 or not. If it is less than 30, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not the freeze restriction flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the first pseudo effect process is executed in step S4404, and then the BB pseudo extra process is terminated. On the other hand, when the freeze restriction flag is set in step S4403, the processing for pseudo addition during BB is ended as it is. That is, when the freeze limit flag is set, the pseudo freeze does not occur in the situation where the post-loading counter BG is less than 30.

  If the post-loading counter BG is 30 or more, in step S4405, a notification game number lottery process is executed. In step S4405, as in step S4004, the number of notification games is determined based on the first pseudo addition table and the back-up counter BG.

  Thereafter, in step S4406, it is determined whether or not the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, in steps S4408 to S4422, as with the processes in steps S4006 to S4019, the process for generating an additional notification effect accompanied by a freeze effect with various types of 7 reds Run. If it is determined in step S4406 that the freeze restriction flag is set, in step S4407 the freeze non-generation processing is executed, and then the BB pseudo addition processing is ended.

<Process for non-freeze occurrence>
The freeze non-generation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the processing result of the notification game number lottery processing in step S4405 is a pseudo-addition notification effect of 30 games. If it is a pseudo-add notification effect of 30 games, a process of adding 30 to the post-BB notification counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S4502, and the post-loading counter BG 30 is added in step S4503. After the process of subtraction is performed, the freeze non-generation process ends. In other words, in this case, the first freeze flag is not set, a freeze effect with the same middle red 7 is not generated, and no additional notification of 30 games is generated. The post-BB notification counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the subtraction amount of the post-loading counter BG that does not generate such a freeze effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process proceeds to step S4504, and it is determined whether or not a pseudo-addition notification effect for 50 games has been selected. If it is a pseudo-addition notification effect of 50 games, a process of adding 50 to the post-BB notification counter is executed in step S4505, and a process of subtracting 50 from the post-addition counter is executed in step S4506. , Freeze non-occurrence processing ends.

  The case where a negative determination is made in step S4504 means that the processing result of the current notification game number lottery processing is a pseudo-addition notification effect of 100 games. In this case, a process of adding 100 to the post-BB notification counter is executed in step S4507, and a process of subtracting 100 from the post-loading counter BG is executed in step S4508, and then the freeze non-occurrence process is terminated. To do.

  As described above, in the bonus state triggered by the special lip AB duplicate 1 and 2 wins, pseudo freeze and various red 7 freeze effects are realized by establishing the tenth replay prize in the special lip AB duplicate 1 and 2 win games. Execution is restricted. As described above, in the special REP AB duplicate 1 and 2 winning game, basically, the ninth re-game winning is easy to be established, and the tenth re-game winning is hard to be established. In other words, in the special Lip AB overlapping 1 and 2 winning games, the 10th regame prize will not be established unless a stop operation is performed aiming at the 10th regame prize.

  Depending on the player, it is considered that not only the player who wants to enjoy the performance but also the player who wants to prioritize the progress of the game, the above-described pseudo-up-notification effect is substantially effective for the player's advantage. It is also considered that for the player who wants to give priority to the game progress, the above configuration in view of the rendering effect may be felt to be bothersome, since the difference does not occur. Therefore, as in the configuration described above, if the tenth re-game winning combination is established, the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated, so that the game progresses while expecting the effect effect by the effect. It is possible to meet the needs of players who want to prioritize

<Process for Notification at End of BB>
The BB end notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The BB end notification process is performed when the remaining payout number becomes 0 in the end determination process (FIG. 46) by the main control apparatus 101. For example, between the processes of steps S1603 and S1604 It is a process to be performed.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether the post-BB notification counter is greater than zero. That is, it is determined whether the bonus to be ended this time is the restriction target bonus and the execution of the pseudo additional notification effect is restricted during the bonus. When the post-BB notification counter is 0, the processing at the end of BB is finished. If the post-BB notification counter is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S4602.

  In step S4602, processing is performed to add the value of the post-BB notification counter to the display remaining number counter HG. In step S4603, processing for setting an addition command for notifying that the addition of the addition has occurred is executed. In the display control device 81 that has received this extra command, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), an extra notice effect for the number of games corresponding to the post-BB notice counter is performed as an extra notice effect in the all-stop effect. Control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. Note that the additional notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 without causing the various red 7 sets of freeze effects.

  In a succeeding step S4604, a process of clearing the post-BB notification counter to 0 is executed. Then, after the process of clearing the freeze restriction flag is executed in step S4605, the process for informing the BB end is ended.

<Relationship between winning game stoppage and various freeze effects>
With reference to FIG. 100, the relationship between the halted appearance in the bonus winning game in the special rep A duplications 1 and 2 and the special rep AB duplicates 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of the pseudo freeze effect and various red 7 perfect freeze effects explain.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the first BB and the second BB are provided as a bonus, and most of them are based on the special lip A duplicate 1, 2 or the special lip AB duplicate 1, 2 winning (see FIG. About 87%, see FIG. 90).

  In the winning games of the special Lip A overlaps 1 and 2 and the special Lip AB overlaps 1 and 2, the ninth re-game winning as the special Lip A can be established. When the 9th re-game winning is established in the winning game, not only whether it is a special Lip A overlapping 1 winning game or a special Lip A overlapping 2 winning game, but also whether it is a special Lip AB overlapping 1 winning game or a special Lip AB Even if it is a duplicate two-winning game, it cannot be determined from the stoppage.

  Among these, whether it is the special lip A duplicate 1 and the special lip AB duplicate 1 or the special lip A duplicate 2 and the special lip AB duplicate 2 is the stop point in the game to be transferred to the bonus state ("red 7 And “white BAR” symbol alignment).

  On the other hand, whether the special Lip A overlaps 1 or 2 or the special Lip AB overlaps 1 or 2 cannot be discriminated in the subsequent game if the ninth regame winning is established in the winning game as described above. It has become. More specifically, for example, even in the special repeat A duplicate 1 or the special repeat AB duplicate 1, a pseudo freeze effect occurs in the second role winning game in BB, and a false in the third role winning game in BB. Although there is a difference in whether or not it is a typical one, an additional notification effect accompanied by a red seven-frozen freeze effect that is the same effect in the effect is generated. In the said 1st Embodiment, it was set as the structure which raises the production effect in special lip AB duplication 1 and 2 which is a restriction | limiting object bonus using such production.

  On the other hand, when the 10th replay winning prize is established in the winning game of the special Lip AB duplication 1 and 2, the game is not the special Lip A duplication 1 or 2 win game, but the special Lip AB duplication 1 or 2 win game. It can be clearly determined that

  Therefore, based on the establishment of the tenth replaying game in this manner, in the bonus state based on the special replay AB duplication 1 and 2, the pseudo freeze effect at the time of the second winning in BB and the third winning in BB The pseudo-addition notification effect with the freezing effect of 7 red matches at the time of winning is not generated. In other words, if the current bonus is a bonus based on the special repeat AB duplicate 1 and 2 wins, and there is a high possibility that the player is grasping that the bonus is a restriction target bonus, the pseudo additional notification is performed. I tried not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the waste that causes the effect to be generated in a situation where it is determined that the effect is a pseudo effect.

  In particular, the pseudo-addition notification effect in the slot machine 10 is configured to generate various red 7-freeze effects as rotation effects of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereby, compared with the structure which produces | generates a pseudo | simulation addition notification effect with a mere display effect, the effect which weakens the pseudo impression can be anticipated now. On the other hand, since the stop operation and the like are invalidated during the freeze production, if it is realized that the freeze production is a pseudo addition notification production, the effect of the freeze production is Not only can it not be expected, but on the contrary, there is a possibility that the game will be frustrated by interrupting the progress of the game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, according to the possibility of determining whether or not the bonus is the restriction target bonus, it is configured to switch the presence or absence of the occurrence of the freeze effect, thereby producing the effect by the freeze effect It becomes possible to make it more suitable for the situation.

  As described above, while the pseudo additional notification effect is not performed, the freeze addition effect is not generated because it is configured to notify the number of added games for the amount that should have been notified in the pseudo additional notification effect at the end of the bonus. As described above, even if the tenth re-game winning combination is established, the inconvenience that the number of added games can not be grasped does not occur. This makes it possible to prioritize the progress of the game, but not to cause an inequality such as a difference in the amount of information provided (the number of added games).

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the special effects are duplicated depending on the winning mode in the special Lip A overlaps 1 and 2 and the special Lip AB overlaps 1 and 2 winning games. Explain the bonus based on the trigger.

  As already explained, as a bonus winning opportunity role, in addition to special lip A duplicate 1 and 2 and special lip AB duplicate 1 and 2, overlapping role with transition trigger such as strong cherry or weak watermelon (strong cherry duplicate 1 , 2 and weak watermelon overlap 1, 2, etc.), and a single first BB and a single second BB for winning a bonus alone. Unlike the special Lip A duplications 1 and 2, and the special Lip AB duplications 1 and 2, which are duplicates with the replay, the so-called duplicate role with the transition opportunity and the bonus single role do not win any of the roles in the winning game. It can also be missed.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the present modification, when a drop is caused in the winning game, an additional notification effect or the like is generated including a pseudo add, and a drop is not generated. In addition to pseudo effects, it is intended not to generate additional notification effects. More specifically, in the overlapping combination with the transition opportunity combination, for example, the strong cherry overlap 2 of the strong cherry overlaps 1 and 2 is a bonus to be restricted. Then, in the strong cherry duplication 2 winning game, when a strong cherry win is established, a pseudo restriction notification effect is not generated by setting a freeze restriction flag. On the other hand, in the strong cherry duplication 2 winning game, if a strong cherry prize is not established, a pseudo additional notification effect is generated by not setting the freeze limit flag.

  Here, among the overlapping roles with the transition trigger role, the overlapping role with the 1st BB is the restriction non-target bonus, and the overlapping role with the 2nd BB is the restriction target bonus, but it is triggered by the overlapping role with the transition triggering position When the bonus is shifted to the bonus game, whether the bonus is the restricted bonus or the restricted non-subject bonus can be clearly determined by the stopping appearance of the bonus winning game. That is, when the game is transferred to the bonus state with "red 7" symbol alignment triggered by the overlapping role with the transition opportunity role, the bonus is a restricted non-target bonus, and triggered by the overlapping role with the transition opportunity role, "white" In case of transition to the bonus state due to "BAR" symbol alignment, the bonus is a restriction target bonus, and if the player understands such a role configuration, an additional notification during the bonus state triggered by the transition trigger role is given. It is possible to clearly determine whether it is a pseudo one or not.

  It is considered that the presence or absence of the above-mentioned combination configuration is different depending on the degree of understanding of the specification of the gaming machine by the player, and in general, it is considered that the player with high degree of gaming skill has a high degree of understanding. Therefore, in the above-described modification, in the case where the transition trigger combination is dropped in the winning game of the overlapping combination with the transition trigger combination, the pseudo additional notification effect is generated on the assumption that the game proficiency is low. When the transition trigger winning combination is established, the pseudo additional notification effect is prevented from being generated as the game having a high degree of proficiency. Thus, it becomes possible to produce a suitable production effect according to the situation by generating the production according to the player's understanding level.

  In the BB winning game winning result corresponding process (FIG. 95) in this modified example, in step S4202, an affirmative determination is made even for a bonus winning game other than the special Lip AB duplication 1 and 2, and in step S4204. Whether or not a winning combination is established for each combination (special Lip B, strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.) that is a duplicate of the bonus and for which the determination of whether or not a pseudo-addition notice effect has occurred If it is determined that the winning is achieved, the freeze restriction flag is set in step S4205. If the winning is not established, the freeze restriction flag may not be set.

  Further, for example, even in the non-restricted bonus such as the strong cherry overlap 1, the presence / absence of the extra notification effect may be varied depending on whether or not the winning game is missed. More specifically, a freeze limit flag is set when a transition trigger winning prize can be established in a duplicate role winning game with a transition trigger. In addition, in the process for adding during BB during the BB third role winning in the non-restricted bonus (FIG. 84), if the freeze restriction flag is set, the red 7 uniform freeze effect at the time of winning the additional bonus is accompanied. It is good to set it as the structure which alert | reports the number of additional games collectively at the time of BB completion | finish, without performing an additional alerting | reporting effect. More specifically, before the process of setting various flags such as the first freeze flag (step S3806, step S3808, step S3809), it is determined whether there is a freeze limit flag and the freeze limit flag is not set. , Set the corresponding freeze flag. If the freeze limit flag is set, processing such as adding the number of games added this time to the post-BB notification counter without setting the freeze flag is performed. As a result, even during the restriction non-target bonus, it is possible to generate an additional notification effect at the end of the bonus state without performing various freeze effects.

  As described above, even during the restriction non-target bonus, the occurrence of the freeze effect in the restriction target bonus can be generated by making the presence or absence of the occurrence of the freeze effect different depending on the stop appearance (the presence or absence of the drop etc.) of the bonus winning game. The relationship between the presence / absence of the game and the stop appearance in the bonus winning game (such as the presence / absence of missing) matches, and the impression that the freezing effect occurs or does not occur due to the stop appearance in the bonus winning game can be strengthened. In other words, it is not determined whether the freezing occurs depending on whether the bonus is a restricted bonus or a non-restricted bonus, but it is determined whether the freezing occurs due to the stoppage of the bonus winning game, To make it more difficult for a player with low game skill to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the freeze is due to a pseudo additional notification effect while making a troublesome effect for the player with high game skill not to occur. Is possible.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the fact that the freeze restriction flag is set is treated as being valid over one advantageous section. FIG. 102A is a flowchart showing the BB end notification process in the present modification, and FIG. 102B is a flowchart showing the attack mode end process in the present modification. The attack mode end process is a process executed by main controller 101 in the game in which the remaining number of games in the attack mode (attack mode continuation number G3) is zero.

  The process at the time of BB end notification in the present modification is the same as the process of the second embodiment except that the process of clearing the freeze restriction flag is not performed (FIG. 99 (a)). That is, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the post-BB notification counter is greater than 0. If so, the post-BB notification counter value is added to the remaining display counter HG in step S4702, and in step S4703. Set the add command. As a result, when the bonus ends, an additional notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like occurs. Thereafter, in this modification, after the process of clearing the post-BB notification counter to 0 in step S4704, the BB end notification process is terminated without clearing the freeze limit flag.

  The freeze limit flag is cleared by the process for the end of the attack mode.

  That is, in step S4801, it is determined whether the game is an attack mode end game. If the game is an end game, it is determined in step S4802 whether the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is set, the limit flag is cleared in step S4803, and then the end-time process is terminated. When a negative determination is made in step S4801 or step S4802, the processing for end of main time is ended as it is.

  In this way, if the freeze restriction flag is successfully set by, for example, making the tenth game reappearance in the bonus winning game during one advantageous section (attack mode), the state is taken over, and the subsequent state Even if the tenth replay prize or the like is not established in the bonus winning game, the freeze effect (particularly, pseudo extra notification) during the bonus state does not occur. Thereby, the gameability is improved, and even if the stop operation for establishing the tenth regame prize is failed, a meaningless freeze effect does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably generate the freeze effect.

<Modification 3>
In the present modification, it is possible for the player to clear the freeze restriction flag after the freeze restriction flag is set. FIG. 103 (a) is a flowchart showing a winning result corresponding process for BB winning game according to the present modification. The process for the BB winning game is a process performed in the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 44) by the main control device 101.

  In step S4901, it is determined based on the winning result whether or not the current game is a BB winning game. In other words, as a result of winning the game this time, the “red 7” symbol on the active line is stopped and the first BB winning is established, or the “white BAR” symbol is stopped on the active line and the second BB winning is established. In step S4901, the determination is affirmative. If it is not a BB winning game, the processing for this BB winning game is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether the freeze limit flag is set. If the freeze limit flag is not set, the processing for the BB winning game is ended as it is. If the freeze limit flag is set, it is determined in step S4903 whether or not the stop operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game is a predetermined specific operation mode. In the present modification, the specific operation mode is a reverse push (right stop switch 44 first stop operation) operation, but other operation modes may be used. If a negative determination is made in step S4903, the processing for the BB winning game is ended as it is. If affirmation determination is made in step S4903 and the bonus winning is achieved in the specific operation mode, the freeze restriction flag is cleared in step S4904, and the processing for the bonus winning game is ended.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), for example, based on the fact that the freeze limit flag is set, for example, when the tenth replay winning is established in the special Lip AB overlapping 1, 2 winning game, The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to perform notification indicating that a pseudo additional notification effect is not generated (indicated as “actual addition mode” in the drawing). Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), by performing the above-mentioned specific operation mode in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, a configuration is provided to notify that the state in which the pseudo overlay notification effect is not generated can be cancelled. It is good to do.

  In this way, the freeze restriction flag may be set unintentionally, or the freeze restriction flag may be set, for example, the mind may be changed after the freeze restriction flag is set, and the freeze effect is not generated against the player's intention. The scene can be reduced.

  In this case, since the operation difficulty for the operation for clearing the freeze restriction flag is lower than the operation for setting the freeze restriction flag, the player with low skill of the game unintentionally freezes It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the flag cannot be cleared when the restriction flag is set.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the mode of the pseudo additional notification effect in the restriction target bonus is different. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the BB pseudo addition process in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, first, at step S5001, processing is executed to grasp the number of remaining games ZG in the attack mode (more specifically, the number G3 of continuing attack modes). Then, in step S5002, a pseudo added lottery process is executed. In the seventh pseudo top table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the number of informing games to be selected in the case of performing pseudo top notification effects is set to be different depending on the number of remaining games ZG. Specifically, when the remaining number of games ZG is less than 50, a setting is made so that a pseudo additional notification effect is not generated and the pseudo additional notification effect is more likely to occur as the remaining number of games ZG increases. It is done. In addition, as the remaining number of games ZG increases, it becomes easier to select a pseudo-add-on notification effect with a larger number of games.

  In step S5003, based on the processing result in step S5002, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-addition lottery has been won. If not elected, the first pseudo effect process for pseudo freeze is executed in step S5004, 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S5005, and the pseudo add-on process in BB is ended. . In this case, a pseudo-freeze effect is generated in accordance with the outage counter, similar to step S4103 and step S4204.

  If it is determined in step S5003 that a pseudo-addition lottery has been won, it is determined in step S5006 whether or not a pseudo-addition alert effect of 30 games has been won. If 30 games are won, the process advances to step S5007 to execute a process for setting the first freeze flag. In a succeeding step S5008, a process of adding 30 to the advance counter MG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advance counter MG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games for which the pseudo additional notification effect has been performed. In the subsequent step S5009, a process of adding 30 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5006, it is determined in step S5010 whether or not a pseudo-addition notification effect of 50 games has been won. If 50 games are won, the process proceeds to step S5011 to execute processing for setting the second freeze flag. In step S5012, a process of adding 50 to the advance counter MG is executed. In step S5013, a process of adding 50 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

  The case where a negative determination is made in step S5010 means that a pseudo-addition notification effect of 100 games is won. In this case, the process advances to step S5014 to execute processing for setting the third freeze flag. Then, in step S5015, processing for adding 100 to the carry-in counter MG is executed, and in step S5016, processing for adding 100 to the display remaining number counter HG is executed.

  After executing any of the processes in step S5009, step S5013, and step S5014, in step S5017, an additional notification effect of the number of games added to the display remaining number counter HG in each process is performed. The superimposition command including information is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then 2 is input to the freeze counter FC in step S5005, and then the processing for pseudo top during BB is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of the value of the post-loading counter BG, the pseudo additional notification effect is generated by lottery in the third winning combination winning combination game among BB of the restriction target bonus. For this reason, a difference may occur between the actual remaining game number ZG in the attack mode and the display remaining number counter HG, and the display remaining number counter HG may be larger than the actual remaining game number ZG.

  Next, the processing for notification of addition in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the advance counter MG is a value greater than zero. If it is greater than 0, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the value of the advance counter MG is greater than the number of additional games this time. If so, the process advances to step S5103 to execute a process of subtracting the current number of added games from the first installation counter MG, and then the present addition notification process ends. In this case, an additional notification is not generated in the current game, and a process for an additional notification is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S5102 that the current additional game number is equal to or greater than the advance counter MG, the process proceeds to step S5104. In step S5104, a process of subtracting the value of the carry-in counter MG from the current number of added games is executed. Then, in step S5105, processing is performed to clear the first-in counter MG to zero.

  If it is determined in step S5101 that the carry-in counter MG is 0, or after the process of step S5105 is executed, the process for immediate ride notification and post ride notification is performed in steps S5106 to S5112. From this, the extra notification processing is terminated. The processing from step S5106 to step S5112 is the same as the processing from step S3001 to step S3007.

  That is, the number of informing games of the additional informing effect which is generated in a pseudo manner in the above-mentioned processing during pseudo additional addition in BB is stored as the first-in counter MG. Then, based on the additional opportunity generated after that, the number of currently added games is subtracted from the first-in-place counter MG, and when the first-in-place counter MG becomes 0, the remaining number of games is added. That is, it is a structure which supplements the part of the additional notification effect performed previously, when a pseudo additional notification effect is performed previously and the actual additional opportunity arises. By doing this, it is possible to generate a pseudo additional notification effect regardless of the value of the after-loading counter BG, and it is possible to diversify the generation pattern. In addition, in the following description, the above-described pseudo additional notification effect is also referred to as a first notification effect in relation to the subsequent notification effect.

  The section display second process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as in the processes of steps S1801 to S1809, in steps S5201 to S5209, based on the upper limit (1500) of the number AG of advantageous zone games or the number of continued games in the attack mode and the challenge mode. Then, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. However, in this embodiment, the process in the case of making an affirmative determination in step S5209 and ending the advantageous section based on the digest of the number of continuous games in the attack mode or the challenge mode is different.

  That is, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5209, it is determined in step S5210 whether or not the remaining display counter HG is greater than zero. If the remaining display counter HG is greater than 0, a process for clearing the remaining display counter HG to 0 is executed in step S5211, and then a special effect command is output to the display control device 81 in step S5212. Execute the process to set as. If a negative determination is made in step S5210, or after the process of step S5212 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5205, and a process of clearing the number-of-interest-zone game number AG to 0 is performed. The processing after step S5205 is as described above.

  That is, as described above, when the first-in-one notification effect is generated, the second-in-place counter MG is decremented when the additional trigger occurs later, and the number of informing games of the first-in first notification effect is compensated. On the other hand, if there is no additional opportunity or the additional game number does not reach the number of notified games even if the additional opportunity occurs (the first-loading counter MG does not become 0), the actual remaining The attack mode or the like ends in a state where the display remaining number counter HG is larger than the game number ZG. That is, before the display remaining number counter HG reaches 0, the actual remaining game number ZG becomes 0 and the attack mode or the like can be ended.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when such a situation occurs, a special effect is generated. The special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 shows the special effect table stored in the various table storage area 105a, and FIG. 109 shows an outline of the special effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65.

  When a special effect is generated by the display control device 81, the end effect at the end of the attack mode is controlled to be an effect different from the normal effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the end effect at the end of the attack mode is a normal effect, the number of continued games in the current attack mode (“game number” in the figure) is displayed along with a display indicating that the attack mode has ended. ) And the number of medals earned in the current attack mode (in the figure, “get number” is displayed).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effects are set as the special effects. For example, when the special effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), in the end effect at the end of the attack mode, the attack mode Along with the display of the number of continued games and the number of acquired medals, a predetermined character (in the figure, a soldier character holding a weapon in his hand) is displayed. For example, when the special effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), in the end effect at the end of the attack mode, the special effect A is displayed together with the display of the number of continued games and the number of acquired medals in the attack mode. In this case, a character different from the character (in the figure, a military character raising a weapon held in his hand and raising a male snake) is displayed.

  In the effect setting process at the end of the attack mode in the display control device 81, which of the special effect A and the special effect B is selected depends on the value of the display remaining number counter HG at the end and the set value. It is set to. As shown in FIG. 108, when the remaining display counter HG is 0, the special effect A and the special effect B are not selected, and the effect at the end of the attack mode is selected as the normal effect (FIG. 109 (a)). Ru. When the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 9, the selection ratio between the normal effect and the special effect A differs depending on the set value. More specifically, if setting 1 or setting 2, normal effect and special effect A are selected by 50% each. If setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is selected at 40%, and the special effect A is selected at 60%. If setting 5 or setting 6, normal effect is selected at 30%, and special effect A is selected at 70%. That is, when the setting value becomes high, the selection rate of the special effect A is set to be high, and when the attack mode is ended in a situation where the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 9, the special effect A The higher is selected, the higher the setting can be expected.

  When the display remaining number counter HG is 10 or more, the setting value is set to be easier to narrow down than when the display remaining number counter HG is less than 10. That is, when the display remaining number counter HG is 10 to 99, if setting 1 or setting 2, the normal effect is selected at 60%, and the special effect A is selected at 40%. If setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is selected at 10%, the special effect A is selected at 70%, and the special effect B is selected at 20%. In the case of setting 5 or setting 6, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 60%, and the special effect B is selected at 40%. In other words, when the attack mode ends in a situation where the display remaining number counter HG is 10 to 99, it is possible to determine that the setting is 3 or more when the special effect B is selected, and the normal effect is selected. It can be determined that the setting is 4 or less. Further, when the special effect A is selected, the possibility of setting 3 or setting 4 becomes high, and when the special effect B is selected, the possibility of setting 5 or setting 6 becomes high.

  When the display remaining number counter HG is 100 or more, if setting 1 or setting 2, the normal effect is selected at 90% and the special effect A is selected at 10%. If setting 3 or setting 4, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 90%, and the special effect B is selected at 10%. In the case of setting 5 or setting 6, the normal effect is not selected, the special effect A is selected at 10%, and the special effect B is selected at 90%. In other words, when the attack mode ends in a situation where the display remaining number counter HG is 100 or more, it is possible to determine that the setting is set 1 or 2 when the normal effect is selected. Further, when the special effect A is selected, the possibility of setting 3 or setting 4 is high, and when the special effect B is selected, the possibility of setting 5 or setting 6 is high, and it is easy to narrow down. Is easier than the situation where the display remaining number counter HG is less than 100.

  As described above, as a result of the advance notification effect, there is a difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual remaining game number ZG, and the attack mode ends even if the display remaining number counter HG does not become zero. However, in such a scene, special effects that can narrow down the set values can occur. Thus, the regret that the attack mode ends before the remaining display counter HG becomes 0 can be compensated by the joy of being able to narrow down the set value.

  A state in which the first notification effect is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of te1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is input to the remaining game number ZG, and the display remaining number counter HG The same initial game number is input. Thereafter, every time the game is consumed, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

  When the restriction target bonus is started at the timing of te2, the advance notification information generation may occur during the bonus state up to the timing of te5. For example, when the advance presentation information effect occurs at the timing of te3 or te4, although the addition for the display remaining number counter HG is performed, this effect is a pseudo one, so the actual addition of the remaining game number ZG is It does not happen. As already described, the pre-informing notification effect is also an additional notification effect with various red 7 set freeze effects, and the above-mentioned freeze effect occurs when the reel rotation of the next game of the third combination winning game in BB is started.

  When the bonus ends at the timing of te5, thereafter, the subtraction of the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is resumed for each game consumption. Then, when an actual additional opportunity is generated at the timing of te6 or te7, the compensation of the number of informing games in the advance presentation alerting at the timing of te3 or te4 is performed, and in the figure, the remaining number counter for display HG and the remaining Deviation from the number of games ZG is eliminated. As a result, when the remaining game number ZG becomes 0 at the timing of te8 and the attack mode ends, the display remaining number counter HG also becomes 0.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the attack mode is started as an advantageous section at the timing of tf1, the initial number of games in the attack mode is input as in FIG. 110 (a). Each time the game is completed, the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG are subtracted.

  When the restriction target bonus is started at the timing of tf2, a notification effect can be generated in advance during the bonus state up to the timing of tf5. For example, when the advance presentation information effect occurs at the timing of tf3 or tf4, the addition of the display remaining number counter HG is performed, but since this effect is a pseudo one, the addition of the actual remaining game number ZG is It does not happen. These prior notification effects are the same as the previous notification effects at the timings of te3 and te4.

  When the bonus ends at the timing of tf5, thereafter, the subtraction of the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is resumed for each game consumption. In FIG. 110 (b), an actual additional opportunity occurs at the timing of tf6, and the number of notification games is compensated for by the advance notification effect at the timing of tf3, while the advance notification effect at the timing of tf4 is performed. It shows the case where the compensation of the number of informing games in is not performed. In this case, when the remaining game number ZG becomes 0 at the timing of tf7 and the attack mode is ended, the display remaining number counter HG is not 0, and the notification game in the advance notification effect at the timing of tf4. The attack mode ends with the number remaining. In this case, the display remaining number counter HG is forcibly decremented to 0 in the end game, and a special effect is generated to suggest the set value.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Regardless of the value of the back-up counter BG, the pseudo-upward notification effect is generated during the restriction target bonus for which the extra lottery is restricted, so that the rate of occurrence of the additional notification effect shifts to the restriction target bonus. It does not depend on the situation, it can be a more flexible presentation.

  The difference between the remaining game number display ZGP and the actual remaining game number ZG due to the advance notification effect is compensated by an additional opportunity that may occur later. As a result, it is possible to reduce the scene where the attack mode ends with the occurrence of the above-mentioned divergence, and it is possible to more suitably produce the rendering effect by the first-aid notification effect (effect by determining that the actual addition is performed). It can be demonstrated.

  The preload notification effect is likely to occur when the number of remaining games in the attack mode is large, and is difficult to occur when the number of remaining games is small. In this way, it is possible to generate a notification effect in advance according to the ease with which the above compensation is performed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the attack mode is small, etc., in a situation where compensation can not be performed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the first-in-one notification effect as much as possible. It can be reduced.

  When the attack mode ends with the above deviation occurring, a setting value suggesting effect is generated as a special effect. As a result, it is possible to follow a feeling of regret that the attack mode ends before the remaining game number display ZGP on the display becomes zero.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, another form of display of the number of games to be notified in the advance notification effect will be described. In other words, in the third embodiment, the number of games notified in the advance notification effect is added to the display remaining number counter HG, so that it can be distinguished from the display not including the advance notification effect as the remaining game number display ZGP. However, in this modified example, the display is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the display that does not take into account the advance notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the number of games for the advance notification separately from the remaining game number display ZGP. In the figure, the display of the number of games corresponding to the advance notification is displayed as “number of games”. In this case, when the display control device 81 determines that the current additional notification effect is the first-on notification effect based on the additional command received from the main control device 101, the remaining game number display ZGP, not the remaining game number display ZGP. A process of updating the number-of-games display for the additional notification by adding the number of additional games this time is performed. Each time the game is consumed, the remaining game number display ZGP is decremented by 1 and updated, while the game number display for the advance notification is not subtracted every time the game is consumed. Further, when the addition of the number of games occurs after that and the addition notification effect is limited, the change of the display of the remaining game number display ZGP is also limited as in the third embodiment, and the additional notification amount is further added. The display of the game number display is not changed. Then, when the remaining game number display ZGP reaches a predetermined number (1), the number of the game number display for the advance notification is added to the remaining game number display ZGP as an additional notification effect as the compensation is performed. It is good to have a configuration to do.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make it clear that the number of games added by the advance notification effect is an indeterminate amount. On the other hand, it is configured to limit the addition notification at the time of subsequent addition winning, and to display the undecided part as it is, so that it can not be determined whether the compensation for the advance notification information has been performed. It is possible to raise interest about whether or not the unconfirmed portion has been confirmed, and it is possible to suitably increase the attention level of each game that does not generate an additional notification, and it is possible to entertain the attack mode until the end It becomes.

  It should be noted that, in the case where an additional opportunity occurs, the mode of displaying the number of games for the advance notification may be changed. For example, when an additional opportunity is generated, the color, the shape, and the background of the number-of-games indication for the introductory notification may be changed according to the additional expectation. By doing in this way, when the remaining game number display ZGP becomes a predetermined value, it becomes possible to detect in advance the expected degree of occurrence of the post-notification effect for the amount of compensation.

  In addition, regarding the number-of-games display for the advance notification, not only the notification game number for which the advance notification effect was performed, but also the number of notification games for the additional notification effect actually selected as an additional event (by lottery etc.) It is good also as composition to do. By doing in this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that the game number display will be added afterwards, without displaying the game number display for the advance notification only for the indeterminate amount.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, as in the third embodiment, the notification game number of the advance notification effect is added to the remaining game number display ZGP and the remaining game number display ZGP is displayed. The number of games can be changed to a special display that is difficult to distinguish.

  In FIG. 111 (b), the display of the number portion indicating the number of games in the remaining game number display ZGP (numerical display) is shown as “???” as a special display, and after that, the advantageous period ends. It is difficult or impossible to determine how many later games the number of subsequent games will be triggered. For example, the display control device 81 may have a configuration in which a change lottery is performed when a pre-notification effect is generated, and the number display is changed to a special display when the change lottery is won. In this way, even if the advantage section ends without compensation for the advance notification, it becomes difficult to detect the end game in advance, and a sense of loss that the player may feel Can be reduced.

  The change to the special display may be performed in a game in which at least a number equal to or more than the number of games for the advance notification is indicated in the number portion of the remaining game number display ZGP. For example, in the display control device 81, in each game, a process of grasping the value of the remaining game number display ZGP is performed, and a numerical display indicating a specific value (for example, 150) equal to or greater than the number of games for the advance notification is displayed. The above-described change lottery may be performed. By doing this, the configuration can be such that the number display is changed to the special display even when the advance notification is not completely compensated.

  In addition, even when the pre-announcement notification effect does not occur, a configuration in which the number display of the remaining game number display ZGP is changed to the specific display in a game in which the number display of the remaining game number display ZGP becomes a predetermined number display (eg, “0150”) Good. In this way, even if the number of games is counted from the display before the change to the specific display, it may end with the number of games as counted, and the remaining number-of-games display ZGP is pre-determined by the notification effect. It becomes possible to weaken the impression that it is a numerical display including.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the configuration of the additional notification process is different when an additional event occurs after the first notification information effect. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a part of the extra notification process in the present modification.

  In step S5301, it is determined whether the first-pass counter MG is 1 or more. If the game result is one or more, the process proceeds to step S5302, where it is determined whether the game result that has triggered the addition this time is a transition trigger. If it is not a transition trigger role, that is, if it is determined that a winning probability such as pushing order bell or pushing order replay is relatively high based on a so-called regular combination, the above steps S5102 to S5105 are performed in steps S5303 to S5306. Similarly to the above, a process of subtracting the number of added games this time from the advance counter MG is performed. In step S5302, if the winning combination is based on a so-called rare combination that has a relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry or weak watermelon, the process proceeds to step S5106 and subtraction from the advance counter MG is performed. Without executing, the process (steps S5106 to S5112) for adding and notifying the number of games itself is executed.

  From the point that the extra lottery at the time of rare role winning is easier to add and win than the extra lottery at the time of normal role winning, in the rare role winning game, it is said that there is a great expectation for the extra notification production to occur Conceivable. Under such an assumption, in the above configuration, the addition based on the regular combination with a high appearance rate in each game is used to compensate for the advance presentation alert effect, and the addition based on the rare combination with a low appearance rate in each game The configuration is such that the additional notification is performed as it is without being used for the compensation of the advance notification information effect. As a result, in a game in which there is a high degree of expectation for the generation of the additional notification effect, the player is less likely to notice the game without giving a sense of loss or discomfort that the additional notification effect is not generated. It is possible to compensate for the number of informing games of the informing effect effect.

  Although it is a structure that differs depending on whether or not the winning combination at the time of winning the extra notification effect after the occurrence of the first notification effect is used to compensate for the first notification effect, the result that triggers the first notification effect (third role in BB) ) And the situation will not affect the decision as to whether or not it will be used for the compensation at the time of the extra winning. That is, it can be said that the determination as to whether or not the compensation is made at the time of the later addition winning is a process performed independently of the content of the advance notification information except for the value of the advance counter MG. By doing in this way, it is less likely to cause an event that the content of the presentation at the time of winning the extra ride is significantly different depending on the content of the advance notification effect, and the effect of the effect by the advance notification effect is provided without giving a sense of incongruity of the effect. Can be increased.

  It should be noted that, depending on the number of remaining games ZG in the attack mode, it may be configured such that the ease of being used for the supplementary notification effect at the time of extra winning is different. Even in this way, it is possible to make the compensation determination independently from the content of the presentation notification effect. In this case, the smaller the remaining number of games ZG, the easier it is to make up for the compensation, thereby reducing the number of events in which the divergence remains when the remaining number of games ZG becomes zero.

<Modification 4>
The present modification is based on the third embodiment in which the number of informing games of the informing effect is added to the remaining game number display ZGP (the value of the remaining game number display ZGP becomes equal to the display remaining number counter HG), In a game in which the display remaining number counter HG has a predetermined value, the number of notification games for the first notification effect is subtracted from the value of the remaining game number display ZGP. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an after-loading notification process in the present modification.

  If it is determined in step S5401 that it is in the advantageous section, a subtraction process for the display remaining number counter HG is executed in step S5402. In step S5403, it is determined whether the remaining display counter HG after the subtraction process is the first predetermined number (102, 52, 32). The first predetermined number is a number corresponding to the number of games (100, 50, 30) that can be notified in the start-up notification effect, and more specifically, the notification is made for the number of games that can be notified in the start-on notification effect It is the number obtained by adding the number of games for use (2). If it is determined in step S5403 that the number is the first predetermined number, it is determined in step S5404 whether the post-add flag is set. If the post-add flag is set, it is determined in step S5405 whether the post-add counter BG is greater than a second predetermined number (100). The second predetermined number in step S5405 is set to be a relatively large value as the number of additional games in one additional opportunity. In the case of an affirmative determination in step S5405, This is the case where the on-board notification occurs.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, a process for generating a freeze effect at the start of the next game rotation is performed in step S5406. Specifically, a process of setting the fourth freeze flag and inputting 1 to the freeze counter FC is executed. Although detailed description of the process is omitted, in the rotation effect process (FIG. 74) in the present modification, when the freeze counter FC is 0 and the fourth freeze flag is set, the fourth freeze flag is cleared. In addition, a delay freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R over a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) is set. Therefore, in the next game in which the fourth freeze flag is set, the start of reel rotation is delayed for a predetermined period. In a succeeding step S5407, a process for controlling the display control device 81 is executed so that the intermediate addition freeze effect is executed in the next game. More specifically, the intermediate addition freeze command is output to the display control device 81. In step S5407, in the next game, when the value of the post-counter BG is added to the display remaining number counter HG and the added amount is subtracted from the post-counter BG and the post-counter BG becomes zero. A process (for example, a process of setting a flag for that) is performed so that the process of clearing the post-loading flag is performed.

  The halfway effecting freeze effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  The halfway addition freeze effect is an effect performed during the above-described predetermined period in which the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is delayed. In the effect, the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 shown in FIG. 114 (a) is an effect that is updated by addition and changed as shown in FIG. 114 (c). In this case, the illusion effect (special notification) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is executed before the change to the display in FIG. 114 (c). In the fantasy production, while displaying a male character wrapped in flames, a loud voice of a man uttered from the speaker 64 that “You were watching only a ghost!” An explanation is given that the display was a pseudo display. It is more preferable that the words be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as well. The illusion effect is executed over the predetermined period, and when the predetermined period elapses, the illusion effect ends, and the remaining game number display ZGP in FIG. 114 (c) is displayed after the change. By delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the player can grasp that the illusion effect occurs, and the start of the rotation is delayed, and the fantasy effect can not be performed during a predetermined period during which the game operation can not be performed. Can be expected to have the effect of preventing the oversight of fantasy effects and improving the level of attention.

  If it is determined in step S5404 that the post-loading flag is not set, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the preload counter MG is the third predetermined number (100, 50, 30). The third predetermined number is a number corresponding to the number of games (100, 50, 30) that can be notified in the start-up notification effect, and more specifically, is the number of games that can be notified in the start-on notification effect. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S5408 indicates a case where the number of informing games is not completely compensated after the first-in-one notification effect.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, processing for generating a freeze effect at the start of the next game rotation is performed in step S5409. Specifically, a process of setting the fourth freeze flag and inputting 1 to the freeze counter FC is executed. In the subsequent step S5410, processing for controlling the display control device 81 is executed so that the subtraction freeze effect is executed in the next game. More specifically, the freeze command for subtraction is output to the display control device 81. In addition, in step S5410, in the next game, a process of subtracting the value of the carry-in counter MG from the display remaining number counter HG and subtracting the subtraction from the carry-in counter MG is performed (for example, Process to set the flag for

  The freeze effect for subtraction will be described with reference to FIG.

  The freeze effect for subtraction is an effect corresponding to the freeze effect for midway addition, and the freeze effect for midway addition and the operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are the same, and only the display content in the auxiliary display unit 65 is different Production. That is, the subtraction freeze effect is an effect that is performed during the predetermined period in which the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is delayed based on the fourth freeze flag. In the effect, the remaining game number display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 shown in FIG. 114 (a) is an effect that is updated by being subtracted and changed as shown in FIG. 114 (d). In this case, before the change to the display of FIG. 114 (d), the illusion effect (special notification) shown in FIG. 114 (b) is executed. The illusion effect is as described above, and a male character wrapped in flame is displayed, and a notification for explaining that the display so far is a pseudo display is made. The difference from the halfway addition freeze effect is whether the remaining game number display ZGP is updated after addition or subtraction after the fantasy effect.

  If it is determined in step S5403 that the display remaining number counter HG is not the first predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S5411, and the display remaining number counter HG is the same as steps S3104 to S3110 in steps S5411 to S5417. After the process for performing the post-notification effect when the fourth predetermined number (1) is reached, the post-notification process is terminated. Note that the fourth predetermined number is a value smaller than the first predetermined number, and the post-incoming notification effect is an effect that can occur in a game after the freeze effect for intermediate addition or the freeze effect for subtraction. If a negative determination is made in either step S5401 or step S5405, or after any one of steps S5407 and S5410 is executed, the post-notification process is terminated.

  As described above, when the value of the display remaining number counter HG becomes the first predetermined number and the remaining game number display ZGP becomes a value corresponding to the number of notification games of the advance notification effect, A subtraction freeze effect may occur. In the freezing effect for midway addition, the remaining game number display ZGP is greatly added and changed, and in the freezing effect for subtraction, the remaining game number display ZGP is greatly subtracted and changed. One of the two extreme events will occur. As a result, it is possible to bring an interest to a freeze effect for addition during the addition and a freeze effect for subtraction, and to particularly enhance the pounding feeling in the middle of the illusion effect that is the turning point.

  The above-described freeze effect for subtraction occurs when the amount of the pre-notification notification effect is not completely compensated, and when the partial compensation is performed, as shown in the third embodiment. In addition, a special effect is generated and a set value is suggested. That is, the display remaining number counter HG becomes the first predetermined number, and even if the subtraction freeze effect does not occur, the display remaining number counter HG is finally displayed (when the display remaining number counter HG becomes the fourth predetermined number). The difference between the remaining number counter HG and the remaining game number ZG can be subtracted. The subtraction when the fourth predetermined number is reached is less than the subtraction with the first predetermined number. Then, if it is possible to avoid the freeze effect for subtraction by the first predetermined number, then the post-notification notification may be generated by the fourth predetermined number, all may be compensated, or all may not be compensated. It is expected that a special effect will be generated, and it becomes possible to create not only the effect by the first-aid notification effect but also new game characteristics using the subtraction of the difference.

<Other Embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above or each modification, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications by combining some or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each configuration to be a combination be secured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of a combination of the embodiments and the modified examples, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) Although the difference in winning probability according to the setting value is provided as the restriction target bonus, and the pseudo additional notification is generated during the restriction target bonus, it is sufficient if there is a setting difference in the restriction target bonus transition rate. The bonus to be transferred after the transfer lottery may be set as the restriction target bonus when the number of times of winning and the number of winnings of the small winning combination having the setting difference reach the specific number.

  (2) When an additional notification effect is generated during the bonus, the additional notification effect is generated at the start of the game next to the game in which the third winning combination during BB is started. The additional notification effect may be generated in the lost game, or the additional notification effect may be generated in a plurality of games after the game in which the third part in BB is won. However, if the game that won the third role during BB and the game that generates the additional notification effect are too far apart, there is a possibility that the third role during BB may be won again. In that respect, it is preferable that the notification content is not complicated if it is at the start of the game in which the third winning combination in BB or the next game starts.

  In this case, the freeze counter FC may be changed to be input according to the additional notification effect, for example, if the freeze effect is to be generated in the game winning the additional lottery, for example, the freeze counter If 1 is input to FC and a freeze effect is generated after 2 games of the winning game, it is preferable to input 3 to the freeze counter FC.

  (3) Although the freeze notification is included as the bonus notification during bonusing, the freeze notification may be generated also when the bonus notification is performed in an attack mode other than during bonus.

  (4) The restriction target bonus (or the non-restriction bonus) in the first BB or the second BB has been described. However, a setting difference is provided in the winning probability of the CB, and a pseudo-addition notification effect is generated during the CB state that becomes the restriction target bonus. A configuration may be adopted. In this case, by setting a CB that has no setting difference in the winning probability and a setting probability that has a setting difference, a CB state that becomes a restriction target bonus and a CB state that becomes a non-restriction bonus occur. The effects of the relationship between 1BB and 2BB can be expected in both CB states. This is not limited to CB, but can be applied to a single bonus (SB), a middle bonus (MB) whose upper limit of the number of remaining payouts is smaller than BB, a regular bonus (REG), and the like.

  (5) Although the restriction target bonus (and the restriction non-target bonus) in the first BB and the second BB that shift to the bonus state as the gaming state has been described, the transition state is not limited to the bonus state, and is a predetermined RT state. It is also good. In other words, it may be configured to limit the execution of the extra lottery in the specific RT state where there is a setting difference in the transition rate and to execute the pseudo extra notification effect during the specific RT state. In this case, in the normal RT state where there is no setting difference in the transfer rate, the effect of the relationship between the restriction target bonus and the non-restriction bonus can be expected in both RT states by not restricting the execution of the extra lottery. .

  (6) A configuration in which an extra in the non-restricted bonus is executed on the occasion of the third winning combination in the BB, and a pseudo informing notification effect in the restricted bonus is executed on the occasion of the third winning in the BB. However, it is good also as a structure from which the opportunity of the extra in a restriction | limiting non-target bonus differs from the opportunity of the pseudo | simulation addition notification effect in a restriction | limiting target bonus. For example, the pseudo extra notification effect in the bonus subject to restriction may be configured to be triggered by the second winning combination during BB. In this case, the pseudo freeze effect in the restriction target bonus may be configured to be triggered by the third winning combination during BB.

  (7) Although the lottery table for each game in the bonus state is shared by the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-object bonus, and the same lottery table is used, different lottery tables may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which uses a different lottery table in each game of a 1BB state and a 2nd BB state.

  (8) Although the pseudo extra notification effect is executed during the restriction target bonus in which the extra lottery is restricted, it may be executed in a state where the extra lottery is restricted. For example, as a configuration that is executed during the carryover state It is also good. In this case, since the addition lottery is limited not only in the carryover state of the restriction target bonus but also in the carryover state of the restriction non-target bonus, the false addition notification effect can be performed.

  (9) The freeze effect generated in the pseudo-notification notification effect or the increase notification effect is not limited to the above. For example, it is good also as a freeze effect of the aspect by which the rotation start of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is delayed over a predetermined period. In this case, the degree of expectation of the number of games notified in the pseudo additional notification effect may be different according to the length of the predetermined period to be delayed.

  (10) In the freeze effect, the "red 7" symbol alignment is temporarily stopped, but may not be temporarily stopped, or the symbol combination to be temporarily stopped may be changed. It is good also as a structure which suggests the expectation degree of an additional alerting | reporting game number by the number of the specific symbols (for example, "red 7" symbol) which stops on an active line.

  (11) The number of games to be notified in the pseudo-additional notification effect is not limited to the above, and there may be cases where the number of games smaller than 30 may be notified, or the number of games larger than 100 is notified The number of informing games may be different depending on the situation at the time of bonus transition. By adopting a configuration in which the number of games less than 30 games can be notified, it is possible to generate a pseudo-addition notification effect even when the accumulated amount of the post-addition counter BG is small.

  (12) In the pseudo-additional notification effect, a freeze effect is generated as rotation effect processing by the main control device 101, and the “red 7” symbol alignment temporarily stops to indicate the degree of expectation of the number of informing games However, it may be changed as follows.

  For example, an operation mode combination in which the winning results differ depending on the order of the stop operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided, and when the stop operation is performed in the first order, the first result is established and the stop is performed in the second order different from the first order. It is assumed that a second result different from the first result is established when the operation is performed. Then, for example, the stop outcome at the time of the first result winning is a stop outcome in which the “red 7” symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-up line L5, and the stop outcome at the second outcome winning is, for example, “red” on the upper line L1. 7 "The symbol will be aligned and stop. Then, it is assumed that an additional notification effect (pseudo-addition notification effect) is generated based on the operation mode winning combination, and whether to execute the first notification of order in the first result winning according to the number of games to be notified , 2nd result It is decided whether order notification of the second order to be a prize is to be executed. In this case, in any order notification, a stop instruction effect such as “Aim for Red 7!” May be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, for example.

  Further, for example, the stop turn at the time of the first result winning is a stop turn at which the “red 7” symbols are aligned and stopped at the right upward line L5, and the stop output at the second result winning is “red” at the right upward line L5. 7) “Red 7” symbol stops at a position different from the upward line L5 at a predetermined reel (for example, the final stop reel in the second order) although the symbol is tempering When the stop operation is performed in one order, the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stop, and when the stop operation is performed in the second order, the "red 7" symbol is set to lose the balance. Then, at the time of winning the operation mode combination, when the extra lottery is won or when the pseudo-superior notification effect is performed (when there is an unreported superimposition that is the target of the pseudo-superior notification effect) When the stop instruction effect such as “!” Is executed and the first order order notification is executed, and when the extra lottery is not won or when the pseudo additional notification effect is not generated (the unreported target for the pseudo additional notification effect) It is preferable that the stop instruction effect is executed and the second order notification is executed when there is no surplus.

  In these cases, it is preferable that the stop instruction effect and the order notification based on the stop order described above are executed instead of or in addition to the freeze effect as the additional notification effect and the pseudo additional notification effect.

  Also in this manner, it is possible to enjoy the additional notification effect in combination with the stop appearance, and the reliability given to the player is improved more than the additional notification effect on the simple display screen. However, for the player who understands the game characteristic of the advantageous section that the winning combination is different depending on the operation order of the stop operation, the order notification of the first order and the order notification of the second order are pseudo overlay notification It can be easily predicted that it is a part of the production, and it is considered that the additional notification production accompanied by the freeze production under the jurisdiction of the main controller 101 side can obtain the player's trust.

  (13) Although the superimposing notification process is executed by the main control apparatus 101, the display control apparatus 81 may be used. However, in the case where a pseudo addition notification effect is performed using the drive control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc., the value of the back-up counter BG is set to a control device that performs the drive control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the configuration is such that the display control device 81 performs the extra notification process (configuration in which the display control device 81 manages the post-addition counter BG), the above-described pseudo The display control device 81 may manage the drive control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that is performed together with the additional notification effect.

  (14) In the configuration in which the generation mode of the pseudo additional notification effect differs depending on the setting value, not only the generation rate and the number of notification games but also the effect at the time of generation (for example, the content of the effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65) The configuration may be different depending on the value. Further, the difference depending on the setting value of the generation mode and the ease of narrowing down the setting value are not limited to those of the above configuration, and any setting mode for the generation mode as long as it is a distribution mode that assists the game for predicting the setting value. The difference due to is optional.

  (15) By setting the freeze restriction flag, it is configured such that the pseudo-addition notification effect with various red seven-match freeze effects is limited. It is good also as a structure which generate | occur | produces the additional alerting | reporting effect by the auxiliary | assistant display part 65 grade | etc., After not generating. That is, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who does not like to prevent the progress of the game by the effect if the freeze effect which restricts the start and the progress of the game operation and the control is not generated.

  (16) The freeze limit flag is set to limit the execution of the pseudo additional notification effect, and the limit notification is performed at the end of the BB. However, the limit notification is performed at the end of the BB. It is good also as a structure which does not perform an additional alerting | reporting. The superimposition notification of that amount is notified in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG has a predetermined value at least as the post addition notification, and the substantial difference in the player's advantage is obtained by the notification at the end of the BB. It is because it does not cause it.

  (17) Although the freeze limit flag is set when the BB winning game is stopped, the freeze limit flag may be set based on the operation of the player. For example, even in a configuration in which the freeze limit flag is set according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the BB winning game or the BB winning game (for example, a configuration in which the freeze limit flag is not set if it is a forward press and a reverse press is set). Configuration that sets the freeze restriction flag when the length of the period during which the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed (turned on) is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, set when pressed for 3 seconds or longer) Configuration) or may be set based on the operation of other operation means.

  Also, although the freeze restriction flag is set by stopping the eyes of the BB winning game to limit the execution of the pseudo additional notification effect, the control during BB is different depending on the stopping eyes of the BB winning game. If it is For example, in the configuration where the number of slips of sliding control in BB is changed, the lottery table in BB is changed, or the contents of effects in BB are changed by stopping appearance (when the flag is set) There may be.

  (18) The configuration may be such that the freeze restriction flag can be set in advance (before winning the BB). However, in this case, the operation means (credit input switch 56 to 58, start lever 41, stop switch 42 to 44) used for normal game operation and so as not to be set unintentionally by the normal game operation May be configured to set the freeze limit flag using different operating means.

  (19) The freeze limit flag can be cleared by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of BB winning, but the freeze limit flag can be cleared by operation of other operation modes or other operation means. Good. In this case, it is preferable that the operation is easier than the operation of setting the freeze limit flag, and the freeze limit flag can be cleared.

  (20) If a bonus is won by a winning combination with a combination that may cause a drop, a freeze restriction flag is set if the stop operation is performed so as not to cause a drop in the double combination winning game (in the case of a winning combination). However, it is also possible to set the freeze limit flag in the case where a loss occurs. In this way, the importance of the stop operation is re-recognised to the player who has low skill of the game and the player who wants to enjoy the freeze effect, and the improvement of the game operation technology is stirred up to generate the freeze effect. Is possible. In addition, for a player who is highly skilled in the game, a stop operation is performed so as not to cause a dropout and a freeze effect is generated, or a dropout is generated and a freeze effect is not generated. It will If a drop is generated, it is difficult to identify the winning trigger role, so it is difficult to determine whether the bonus is a limited bonus or a limited non-target bonus, and as a result, it may be a configuration that enjoys the effect. In other words, the choices for highly skilled players are all options that can be used to entertain some kind of game production, and give players the freedom to enjoy the game production. It becomes the composition which can be provided.

  (21) By setting the freeze limit flag, all the freeze effects in the bonus are not generated. For example, when 100 games are selected in the informing game number lottery process (step S4004 and the like), a pseudo overlay notification effect with freeze effect (upper stage red 7 match freeze effect) occurs, and 50 games and 30 games are selected. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which freezing does not occur. Even if the player understands that it is a pseudo-superimposed notification effect, it is considered that a large amount of the super-announcement effect is happy, and as described above, the pseudo-superimposed notification of a predetermined game number or more (100 games or more) If it is a production, it is possible to expect an effect that pleases the player to some extent if it is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the freeze limit flag.

  Also, although the freeze restriction flag is set, the freeze effect (various red 7-freeze effect and pseudo freeze effect) related to the pseudo add-on notification effect is not generated, but due to other triggers different from the pseudo add-on notification effect A freeze effect (for example, a freeze for notifying that a premier role has been won) may be generated.

  (22) Special Lip A overlaps 1 and 2, which are the winning combination with the 9th replay (Special Lip A), are set as non-restricted bonuses, and the 9th Regame (Special Lip A) and 10th Replay (Special Lip B) The winning probabilities are set so that the special Lip AB duplicates 1 and 2 that are duplicated wins) become bonuses to be restricted, but these relationships may be reversed. That is, a setting difference is provided for the winning probability of Special Reip A duplication 1 and 2 that will be double winning with the 9th replay, and set as a restriction target bonus, and a special rip with double winning with the 9th replay and 10th replay It is good also as a structure made into a restriction non-target bonus, without providing a setting difference in the winning probability of AB duplications 1 and 2. In this case, the operation for aiming at and stopping the tenth game rendition at the time of winning is an operation for determining that the additional lottery is actually performed, and the additional lottery in the above embodiment is actually performed. The operation for determining that the bonus is not performed is an operation with the opposite intention, but it is possible to determine whether or not the bonus is to be restricted.

  (23) A configuration may be used in which a first-in-notification effect and a pseudo-in-notification-indication effect based on the rear-end counter BG are mixed. In other words, even when the post-mounting counter BG is sufficiently accumulated at the time of winning the third combination during BB, it may be configured to generate the pre-loading notification effect instead of the pseudo additional notification effect based on it.

  (24) After performing pre-notification notification production, it is configured to limit the addition notification as compensation of the pre-notification notification production when an additional opportunity occurs, but the selection between the pre-loading notification and the post-on notification is performed In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the notification on one side when the post-notification is selected or when the advance notification is selected is not limited on the other side (notification is performed and no compensation is made).

  (25) After performing the first-aid notification effect, subtraction processing in the case where there is a difference between the remaining game number ZG and the display remaining number counter HG is performed with a predetermined first predetermined number or fourth predetermined number Although it was set as a structure, it is good also as a structure which performs a subtraction process when performing an execution lottery in each game and winning an execution lottery. In this case, it is also possible to realize a game that makes it possible to enter which one of the winning of the execution lottery and the compensation for the advance notification effect (additional winning) is completed first.

  (26) The subtraction process after performing the advance notification effect may be performed when the result of the game becomes a specific result. For example, the subtraction process is performed according to the number of times the player who has won the specific role who has won the additional role is not elected and the number of times the user who wins the predetermined role (for example, strong cherry) among the specific roles is not won. It may be configured to execute.

  (27) In the case of a carryover state before the transition of the bonus when the bonus and the attack mode or the like are simultaneously winning, it may be configured to execute a ride-on notification effect. The bonus which can be won simultaneously with the attack mode or the like is the restricted non-target bonus, and the additional drawing can be executed during the bonus. On the other hand, even if it is a non-restricted bonus, the extra lottery is restricted in the bonus carry-over state, and therefore there is a gap between the bonus state and the carry-over state in the non-restricted bonus depending on whether or not the extra lottery is possible. Therefore, if it is configured to generate advance notification information during the carryover state, there is a high possibility that the compensation will be made after the fact (in the bonus, or in the subsequent attack mode, etc.), and the above gap can be filled. It is possible to favorably secure the effect balance using the first notification effect.

  (28) In the restriction target bonus, not only the addition lottery but also the execution of the mode transition lottery are restricted according to the transition condition, but the result notification of the mode transition lottery may be performed in a pseudo manner. In this case, for example, when the third role in BB during the restriction target bonus won in the normal mode is won, the upside-right, red seven assortment freeze effect corresponding to having won the attack mode transition lottery is generated. Then, after the end of the restriction target bonus, the effect of preparing the attack mode (notification of being in the status of waiting for promotion replay winning) is executed, and when the attack mode is won during the preparation Shift to attack mode (generate push order notification at promotion replay win), and if the attack mode is not won during the preparation (if the attack mode is not won for a predetermined number of games), for example, the above-mentioned fantasy effect is generated After having made it, it is good also as composition which ends an effect in order.

  (29) Although the configuration has been described in which the suggestion of the setting value can be executed by the pseudo-additional notification effect during the restriction target bonus having the setting difference, the setting value can be suggested regardless of the pseudo-additional notification effect during the restriction target bonus It is possible to add a benefit to the restricted bonus as a substitute for the advantage of the restricted bonus over the restricted non-targeted bonus. In addition, it is premised that the suggestion of the setting value may occur in both the restriction target bonus and the restriction non-target bonus, and the restriction target bonus has a higher occurrence rate of the indication of the setting value than the restriction non-target bonus. Even if the configuration is such that a setting value is easily suggested, the privilege can be added to the restriction target bonus.

  (30) Although it is configured such that the presence or absence of the extra notification effect is different depending on the stop appearance at the time of winning the bonus, it is only necessary that the appearance aspect in the bonus is different. It is good also as a structure from which the background color of production differs.

  (31) Although the freeze limit flag is set according to the stoppage at the time of winning the bonus, the freeze limit flag may be set depending on the game from the bonus win to winning.

  (32) A configuration may be adopted in which a freeze limit flag is set depending on the stopping appearance in the bonus. That is, between the time of winning the second winning combination during BB and the time of winning the third winning combination during BB, it is common in that both will be the ninth replay winning, while the tenth winning combination during the BB will be the tenth replay winning, The second combination in the BB is different in that the tenth replay is not won. In other words, if the player succeeds in establishing the tenth game, it can be determined that it is based on the third winning in BB, and the pseudo freeze is based on the third in BB. It is possible to determine whether it is based on the second combination in the BB. Therefore, if the stop limit to become the tenth game reappearance during the bonus appears, the freeze restriction flag is set, and in particular, if it is configured to limit the occurrence of the pseudo freeze, the additional lottery is not executed. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable by performing pseudo-freezing despite the fact that the image has been determined.

  (33) Although the processing for notifying the addition is performed after the processing for adding the number of games is performed when the lottery for winning the number of games in the attack mode is won, the processing is performed before the processing for adding the number of games. It is good also as a structure which performs the process for alerting | reporting. That is, it is good also as a structure which determines the alerting | reporting timing before adding the number of additional games this time to the number of remaining games of an attack mode. In this case, for example, when post-notification is selected, an addition counter BG addition process is performed in the game, and the number-of-games extra process is executed in the game in which the post-notification is executed. . When it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of executed games in the attack mode and the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit game number, the upper limit game number is also added taking into consideration the value of the afterload counter BG for which the above-mentioned post notification is selected. It is preferable to be configured to determine whether or not

  (34) The post-loading lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, according to the value of the post-loading counter BG and the type of the specific combination, either the post-loading notification or the immediate-loading notification is selected, but both the post-loading notification and the immediate-loading notification are selected. In some cases, the number of added games at the time of winning the winning combination may be assigned to the post-notification and immediate notification. In this case, the ratio allocated to the post-loading notification and the immediate-loading notification may be different depending on the number of additional games, the specific combination, the value of the post-loading counter BG, and the like.

  Specifically, for example, when winning 100 games on the basis of strong cherry winning, 50 games are allocated for post-notification notification, and the remaining 50 games are allocated for instant riding notification, but based on strong cherry winning. If 30 games have been won, all 30 games are allocated for immediate notification and not for post-notification notification, and the allocation ratio may be different according to the number of additional games. Also, if 100 games are won based on the weak cherry win, 80 games will be allocated to the after-call notification, and the remaining 20 games will be allocated to the prompt notification, etc. The ratio of allocation may be different depending on the type of role. Furthermore, if the after game counter BG is 30 or more in the case of winning 100 games on the basis of a strong cherry, 50 games will be allocated for after game notification and the remaining 50 games will be allocated for quick notification However, if the post-counter BG is less than 30, the allocation ratio may be different depending on the value of the post-counter BG, such that all 100 games are allocated to post-notification.

  (35) Although the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 have been described as an example of the section indicator, the configuration of the section indicator is not limited to the above. The section indicator may be configured to explicitly display whether or not it is an advantageous section at least by switching the display mode. For example, the arrangement position and the size of the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display portion N9 The display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from the above. For example, the operation unit of the start lever 41 and a part or all of predetermined credit insertion switches 56 to 58 can be controlled to emit light, and the operation unit and credit insertion switches 56 to 58 emit light based on an advantageous section. It is good also as a structure which secures the function as an area indicator with a predetermined | prescribed operation part. As described above, the display of the section indicator is started at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the next game of the start game, and the predetermined operation unit is an operation target that is the end of the start timing. As described above, by displaying the advantageous section at or near the predetermined operation unit, it becomes easier to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

  In addition, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 may include a display unit having a section display function. In this case, at least the display unit having the function of the section indicator is preferably controlled by the main control device 101. The main control unit 101 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 itself, and the function of the section display unit is controlled. The main control device 101 may be configured to control the display unit together with the display unit.

  In addition, as a section indicator, an accessory that can be displaced between a predetermined first position and a second position that is different from the first position is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize it (for example, the front portion of the gaming machine). It is notified whether or not it is an advantageous section by a display mode including the bonus item by arranging the bonus item in the first position and a display mode including the bonus item by arranging the bonus item in the second position. It is good also as composition.

  (36) In the indication monitor 68, the display mode of the push order information ("1" to "6") using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, as a push order, the winning combination depends on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are initially stopped, and the stop order of the second reel and the third reel includes a three-select push order that is not related to the winning combination. The first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7 are turned on, the push order information (display of “7”), and the first display segments N1 to N1. Push display information (display of “8”) displayed by lighting the 7 display segment N7, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display A configuration may be adopted in which the push order notification of these three choices of push order is performed based on the push order information (display of “9”) displayed by turning on the segment N7.

  (37) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing at which the push order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is turned off is not limited to the time when the third reel stop is turned on. The push order notification only needs to be performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be grasped (the push order information only needs to be displayed). For example, the second reel stop ON operation may be performed, or the second reel stop OFF operation may be performed. Further, when the push order notification of the push option of 3 options is performed, the first reel stop ON operation may be performed, or the first reel stop OFF operation may be performed. Further, the light may be turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed since these operations.

  Further, the timing may be later than the time when the third reel stop is turned on, the time may be when the third reel stop is turned off, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) from the time when the third reel stop is turned off. The configuration may be such that the light is extinguished after a lapse of time, or at the end of the medal payout.

  (38) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, or the payout number display unit 62. In these cases, the push order notification is performed in the display units 60 to 62 at the timing when the push order notification is performed, while the original display of each display unit 60 to 62 is performed at the timing when the push order notification is not performed. It is good to carry out.

  In the case where the credit display unit 60 is also used, at least until the bet operation is performed, the credit display unit 60 displays the credit, and then the push order notification is performed (based on the operation of the start lever 41). The push order notification ends at least before the timing at which the number of medals acquired (delivered) in the game is increased and updated (the timing at which medal payout is started) (the push order information is extinguished) For example, it may be configured to end by the time of the third reel stop ON operation, and when the medal payout is started, the configuration is switched to the credit display.

  The remaining payout amount display portion 61 is a display portion that displays the number of remaining payouts during a bonus. For example, the bonus state is a playability that increases the probability of winning a small winning combination and increases medals, and then the pushing order A game in which the number of remaining payouts is displayed by the remaining payout amount display unit 61 and a game in which the notification of push order is performed are assumed to have a configuration in which notification is not performed (a game characteristic different from the game characteristic of increasing medals by push notification). You may make it not overlap. In this case, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 may be generated during the bonus.

  When used in combination with the payout number display portion 62, it is preferable that at least the payout number display portion 62 ends the push order notification at a timing before the display of the payout medal number of the game is started. For example, when the third reel stop ON operation is finished, the push order notification is terminated (the push order information is turned off), and when the payout combination wins, the payout number is displayed at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. It is good to do. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout amount display unit 61.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which performs pushing order alerting | reporting using these display parts 60-62. In the game panel 25, the credit display unit 60 is on the left, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is in the middle, and the payout number display unit 62 is located on the right (FIG. 1), in association with the respective stop switches 42-44. When the left stop switch 42 is to be operated, the credit display unit 60 is displayed. When the middle stop switch 43 is to be operated, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is displayed. When the right stop switch 44 is to be operated, the payout is performed. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports a pressing order, for example by displaying the number display part 62. FIG. In this case, as described above, from the time when the betting operation is performed to the time when the third reel stop is turned on, the display units 60 to 62 are notified of the push order for all the display units 60 to 62. However, when the original display function is secured, the period from the time when the bet operation is performed to the time when the third reel stop is turned ON is set as the period during which the display unit 60 to 62 performs the push order notification. In the period, it is preferable that the original display of each of the display units 60 to 62 is performed.

  (39) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which a push order notification corresponding to a winning relating to the maximum payout number occurs at least once. More specifically, in a push order bell in which 9, 3, or 0 medals can be paid out according to the stop order, a push order notification that causes 9 medals to be paid out occurs at least once. The section that becomes

  (40) In addition to the first BB and the second BB, CB (first CB to fourth CB) is provided as a transition combination in which the small role probability can be changed by the transition of the gaming state, but in addition to or instead of these transition combinations Other transitional roles may be provided. Other transition roles are MB (middle bonus) that does not have a limit on the number of slips, REG (regular bonus) that has a lower limit on the number obtained with the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and that it is possible to execute a 1-game JAC game. SB (single bonus) or the like to be considered. Further, the upper limit acquisition number in each bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number in the CB state may be 3 less than 15 or 0.

  (41) Although the medal payout is not performed at the time of winning of the transition combination (the first BB, the second BB, and the CB), the medal payout may be performed.

  (42) The lottery is performed based on the lottery result with no setting difference so that the set value does not cause a difference in the probability or the advantage of the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the addition lottery depending on the set value. Although a lottery is performed based on a certain lottery result, a setting difference may not be generated by adjusting a benefit (winning probability such as a bonus or a transfer lottery or the number of added games) at the time of winning. For example, in setting 1, a winning combination with a probability of 1/100 is set, and in setting 6, a specific winning combination with a probability of 1/10 is provided, and the winning probability of the extra lottery in the attack mode at the time of the specific winning combination is set to 1 Then, in the setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing this, the total added winning probability is 1/200 at any setting value, and there is no setting difference.

  (43) Transition to the attack mode etc. By winning the lottery or the additional lottery basically an event advantageous to the player is generated, but for example, it may be configured to carry out the lottery for the attack mode etc. And it is good also as a structure which performs the subtraction lottery of the continuation game number.

  (44) Although the game in the situation where the bet number is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game where the bet number is 1 and a 2-bet game where the bet number is 2. For example, the display start mode table of the section indicator is selected in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the 1 bet game or the 2 bet game and in the case of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the 3 bet game. It is good also as a structure from which the display start aspect of an area indicator differs by making it differ.

  (45) The forcible termination game of the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less than that.

  (46) The forcible termination condition of the advantageous section is not limited to the limitation of the upper limit game number (1500), but may additionally or alternatively be provided with the upper limit payout medal number (3000 pieces).

  (47) The additional lottery table and the additional game number lottery table are not limited to those described above, but the probability of winning or the range and average of the number of additional games at the time of winning may be arbitrary. For example, the number of games (2000 games or the like) exceeding the upper limit number of advantageous sections may be selected as the number of additional games.

  (48) The VB mode as a pseudo bonus can be shifted only during the attack mode, but may be shifted even during the normal mode. In this case, when the winning lottery for transition to the VB mode is won, the selected game is set as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started at a timing prior to allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. And it is sufficient. In this case, when the first BB or the second BB is won simultaneously with the VB mode, a game in which a winning to the first BB or the second BB is established may be set as the start game.

  (49) Transition to an advantageous section As a specific role that triggers lottery or additional lottery, etc., a combination of medals such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc., and winnings with these strong cherries etc. Although specific replays having common aspects and overlapping roles of these small roles and specific replays and bonuses have been described as examples, the result of the lottery trigger is not limited to these results. For example, it may be configured to perform a single combination of a predetermined bonus, a lottery to shift to an advantageous section even in normal replay, and the like. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a transfer lottery etc. based on the number of digest games, the cumulative number of points provided separately based on each result, etc. In any case, it is only necessary that the lottery or the like for the transition to the advantageous section does not cause a difference in the winning probability or the occurrence frequency according to the set value.

  (50) At the time of pushing order bell and pushing order Replay, the winning combination differs depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the notification of the stop order is performed after the award provided is different. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage for the player is made different depending on whether or not the player is used, but it is sufficient to use a role that causes the degree of advantage for the player to be different by notifying the stop operation.

  For example, in the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, "black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (for example, "red 7" symbol) can not be simultaneously aimed at positions (five symbols or more apart) )Deploy. Then, the first symbol of the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol), the predetermined symbol of the right reel 32R (for example, the "first replay" symbol or When the "second replay" symbol) stops at the effective line, the first result prize is established, and the second symbol of the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol or " "Second Replay" symbol) and a predetermined symbol on the right reel 32R (for example, "First Replay" symbol or "Second Replay" symbol) stop at the effective line so that the second result winning will be established, The winning mode of the first result and the second result is set. In this case, although the first result prize may be established by aiming at the first symbol at the time of winning the first result, the first result prize is achieved if the stop operation is aimed at the second symbol instead of the first symbol. It is not established and the corresponding privilege is not granted. Similarly, the second result winning may be established by aiming at the second symbol at the time of winning the second result, but if the stopping operation is aimed at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result winning is It is not established and the corresponding privilege is not granted. In addition, a specific combination for which either the first result or the second result will be won is provided, and which of the first result and the second result is won when the specific combination is won (the first symbol and the first result) It is possible to notify of which of the two designs the left reel 32L should be stopped and aimed at). Also in such a configuration, it is possible to win a result (one of the first result and the second result) winning by the notification, and the degree of advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of a mode in which such notification is likely to be performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to a mode in which the notification is easily performed is high, and a mode that has been won in the lottery for transition to these modes is before transition. A situation including any of the above modes may be used as an advantageous section, and a situation including at least one of the modes described above may be used as an advantageous section including the above modes and modes based on the pressing order.

  That is, even if the winning combination is the same, the stop operation for changing the stop appearance is not limited to the stop order, and any stop operation mode including the stop operation timing may be used, and the notification for causing the stop operation mode to be performed. Is not limited to the push order notification, but may be a mode notification related to the operation mode.

  (51) With regard to the advantageous section, although the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, number of added games, etc.) are common regardless of the setting value, the winning probability etc. differs depending on the setting value It is also good. In this case, depending on the type of the result of the lottery, such as transition lottery, there is a difference between the probability due to the set value and the benefit at the time of winning, and the case where there is no difference between the probability due to the set value and the benefit at the time of winning It is good also as composition to do.

  (52) Although the number of continued games in the advantageous section is managed by the advantageous section game number AG or the like, for example, until the predetermined number of games is exhausted (for example, 50 games) or until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, A configuration may be adopted in which one set is set until three replays are won, and the number of sets is managed. Specifically, the attack mode is determined by setting a predetermined number of games (50 games) as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the start of the attack mode or at the attack mode shift lottery. Then, the attack mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is consumed. In this case, if the measurement conditions are met, such as during the attack mode, etc., when the specified conditions are met, an additional lottery will be performed as an additional lottery for the attack mode, and if such a lottery is won, depending on the contents of the winning It is preferable that the number of sets be increased.

  In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games (1,500 games) in the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) is set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay) If the number of specific games (e.g. 50 games) is consumed as one set, the maximum number of games divided by the predetermined number of games or the number of specific games (30 sets) It is good also as a structure which makes it an upper limit set number and forcibly ends an advantageous area by digesting the said upper limit set number. In this case, it is preferable that the number of sets of the advantageous section be grasped by a predetermined counter, and the forcible termination is performed when the counter reaches the upper limit (30). If the challenge mode or precursor mode is added, the configuration in which the challenge mode or precursor mode is added to the number of sets (for example, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games for the precursor mode and the challenge mode is one set) If these counters reach the upper limit value including these modes, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be reached. In a configuration in which the number of games per set can vary (a configuration in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied or a specific number of games is consumed as one set), the number of games is smaller than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. The counter of the set number may become the upper limit value.

  In the relationship with the pseudo-addition notification effect, it is preferable to use a configuration in which, as described above, the fact that the number of sets has been added in the bonus to be limited is notified in a pseudo manner using the unreported number of sets.

  (53) The push order notification may be performed also in the challenge mode or the prognostic mode. More specifically, when transitioning to a specific gaming state as an advantageous section, including an attack mode, a challenge mode, a precursor mode, etc., the advantageous section continues until at least a predetermined number (one) of push order notifications occur. It is good also as composition which does not end.

  (54) A configuration in which the payout rate varies depending on each set value, where the setting 1 has the lowest output rate and the setting 6 has the highest output rate. What is necessary is just a structure where the increase / decrease rate and increase / decrease mode of this change. For example, it may be configured such that the set payout rates of some setting values are the same, and the set payout rates of other set values are different, such as the set payout rates of setting 1 and setting 2 being the same. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may be configured such that the rate of increase / decrease in the ball is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may be configured such that the rate of increase / decrease in the ball is low. In addition, setting 1 and 5 increase the predetermined amount of balls in a short time and decrease the predetermined amount in a long time, and settings 2, 3 and 4 require a longer time than setting 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The predetermined amount may be reduced in a shorter time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease in the number of balls hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

  (55) The slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reels and five corresponding stop switches are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, it is sufficient that there are at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Although the slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one in the case where the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the number of active lines may be five.

  (56) Although an example embodied for the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine of a type in which the slot machine and the pachinko machine are integrated. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-cylinder revolving game machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  For example, in a pachinko machine or ball-cylinder revolving type gaming machine, it is configured to have a plurality of setting values that change the payout rate etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied as an indication or teaching effect of these setting values. Good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and entering a predetermined ball entry section In a pachinko machine having a high entering state and a low entering state in which the ball rate is high and low, the above-mentioned inventions may be applied with the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 as the high entering state.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

  The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups are “A pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. is known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, specifically, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is performed and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. In the case where the result corresponds to the result of (1), a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In the gaming machine illustrated above and the like must increase player's interest in the game, in this regard, in which the invention that there. "Is still room for improvement has been made with the problems to be solved.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing),
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set A function of executing a process of setting a winning probability by 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (for example, the special Lip AB overlap 1) and the transition picture combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the valid position. Advantageous transition means for shifting the state to an advantageous state (restriction target bonus) for the player (function to execute a process of shifting to the restriction target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set. Different,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function),
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous interval based on
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increasing means, a first increase notification (immediate notification) that the increase process has been performed based on a game that satisfies the specific condition that triggered the increase process. A first increase notification execution means (function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81) that can be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, a second increase notification that the increase process has been performed based on a game after the game that satisfies the specific condition that triggered the increase process. Second increase notification execution means (function of executing an additional effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing (additional notification) by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
About the result of the increase process to be the target of the second increase notification by the second increase notification executing means, an unnotified part grasping means for grasping the result of the unnotified part (recognizing the post-counter counter BG by the main control device 101) Functions to execute processing etc.),
Based on the result of the unreported part by the unnotified part grasping means, a third increase notification executing means capable of executing the second increase notification during the advantageous state (the BB pseudo addition process by the main control device 101). Function to execute)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops. It shifts to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game.

  Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can trigger the end of the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition, and as a result, the first increase notification or the second increase notification Done. Therefore, in the gameability that waits for the winning to the advantageous state while enjoying the benefit by the state notification of the specific gaming state, the waiting state while enjoying the benefit can be extended by the increase processing, the above-mentioned advantageous state A chain with a specific gaming state is more likely to occur. And the winning probability of the advantageous state differs depending on the setting value that causes a change in the increase mode of the game medium, etc., and if it is a setting value that easily shifts to the advantageous state, it will frequently shift to the advantageous state during the specific gaming state. Therefore, the chain between the specific gaming state and the advantageous state is likely to occur, and if the setting value is difficult to shift to the advantageous state, the chain between the specific gaming state and the advantageous state is difficult to occur. It can have a great influence on the game. Then, it is considered that a player wants to play a game machine with a set value that is likely to cause chaining, and plays a game with a desired set value in a game hall in which a plurality of game machines can be installed. It can also provide the fun of finding a stand.

  On the other hand, if the difference in increase / decrease in game media becomes too large depending on the set value, the operating rate of the game tables other than the game table having the desired set value can be greatly reduced, and the game with too much desired desired set value is desired. It may happen that the player pays attention only to the acquisition of a large amount of media, and that the player can not enjoy the full play effect. That is, if the advantage of the advantageous state in the game of the above chain is too high, the above-mentioned inconvenience may become apparent as the difference between the increase and decrease in the game medium by the setting value becomes too large. However, in the game of chain between the prevailing advantageous state and the specific game state, if each state simply goes back and forth, even if the chain is generated, the relationship between each other's state is diluted, and the game It becomes easy to get bored.

  Therefore, in the above-described configuration, during the advantageous state where the transition rate varies depending on the set value, the second increase notification non-notification portion for notifying the result in the game after the increase processing game can be executed. The configuration. In this way, by using the unreported portion of the second increase notification, there is no need to increase the advantage of the advantageous state by performing an increase process of the specific gaming state during the advantageous state, etc. While not increasing the difference, it becomes possible to strengthen the relationship between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state.

  Note that, regarding the “first increase notification execution unit”, “when the increase process is performed by the increase unit, in a series of games triggered by the game that satisfies the specific condition that triggered the increase process” First increase notification execution means (display control device 81 for setting an extra effect) capable of executing first increase notification (immediate notification) that the increase processing has been performed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). The function that executes the process) ”or the“ second increase notification execution means ”,“ when the increase process is performed by the increase means, the trigger of the increase process is described above. The second increase notification (post-notification) that the increase processing has been performed in a game that is later than the game that satisfies the specific condition and that is determined after the fact is a predetermined notification means (auxiliary On display 65) Viable second increase notification executing means and (function of performing setting processing plus effect by the display control unit 81) "may be expressed. This is also applicable in the following other features.

  The “normal transition means” may be expressed as follows.

  Based on the “normal transition means for transitioning to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state is over”, and “the specific gaming state is normally determined based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state. “Normal transition means for transition to gaming state”.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising a limiting unit (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the execution of the increase process by the increase unit in the advantageous state. .

  The game in the advantageous state is a game that does not substantially affect the advantage in the specific gaming state, because the execution of the increase process is restricted by the restricting means. Under such a premise, if the notification for the unreported second increase notification can be executed during the advantageous state as in the feature A1, the game in the advantageous state can be performed without excessively increasing the advantageous degree of the advantageous state. It is possible to enhance the impression that the game is capable of affecting the advantage of the specific gaming state.

  Feature A3. When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second increase notification is sent by the third increase notification executing means. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the probability of being executed is common.

  According to the above configuration, although the transition rate to the advantageous state varies depending on the set value, the probability that the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state is common regardless of the set value. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the second increase notification. In particular, considering that the range of increase / decrease in game media according to the set value should be reduced, it is considered that there should be no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value with respect to a specific gaming state, and execution of an increase process is performed. It is considered that the rate, that is, the occurrence rate of the increase notification should not be different from the set value. Then, as long as the occurrence rate of the second increase notification during the advantageous state is not caused to differ by the set value as in the above configuration, the relationship between the first increase notification and the second increase notification during the specific gaming state No hesitation occurs and the second increase notification during the advantageous state can be enjoyed without a sense of incongruity.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the third increase in the predetermined game in the advantageous state” Configuration in which the probability that the second increase notification is executed by the notification execution means is common.

  In addition, “the probability is the same” may be expressed as “the probability is the same or substantially the same”. The expressions “common” and “same or substantially identical” include configurations that do not completely match, and it is only necessary that the winning probabilities match to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify. The degree to which the expressions “common” and “identical or substantially identical” indicate is the same as in the case of other features.

  Feature A4. When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the third increase notification executing means performs the first setting value in a predetermined manner. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the probabilities of execution of the two-increase notification are different.

  According to the above configuration, not only the transition rate to the advantageous state, but also the probability that the second increase notification is performed in a predetermined manner during the advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, for example, it is all advantageous in the setting value in which both the transition rate to the advantageous state and the execution rate of the second increase notification in the predetermined mode become high, and the setting value in which both the transition rate and the execution rate become low. The difference in the number of occurrences of the second increase notification in the total predetermined mode in the state becomes large, the impression received at the higher setting value (a nice image because a lot of second increase notification is executed) and the lower setting value The difference from the impression received in (the image that is not happy because the second increase notification is not easily executed) is also increased. On the other hand, as described in feature A1, since the advantage is not affected even if the execution rate of the second increase notification in the advantageous state is increased, the number of occurrences of the second increase notification in the predetermined mode during the entire game The difference between them does not affect the advantage. In this way, it becomes possible to increase the difference in impression given rather than the difference in substantial advantage due to the difference in setting value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while ensuring the fairness of the game it can.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the third increase in the predetermined game in the advantageous state” There is a difference in the probability that the second increase notification is executed in a predetermined manner by the notification execution means.

Feature A5. First control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the drive control means, and second control means (display control device 81) having the second increase notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the unreported part grasping means is included in the first control means.

  According to the above configuration, the lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and the lottery related to the player's profit is performed in the game of stopping the revolving unit based on the operation of the stop operation means to establish winning. By providing the first control means with drive control means for performing drive control of the means and the circulating body, and providing the second control means with a configuration for notification such as second increase notification execution means, it is possible to By making the processing suitably executable, and consolidating the means related to the benefit to the first control means, it becomes possible to preferably take measures against fraud and the like.

  In addition, it is possible to reflect the grasp result of the unreported part grasping means in the processing on the first control means side by providing the unnotified part grasping means on the first control means side. That is, for example, the grasping result of the unreported part grasping means can be reflected in the lottery by the lottery means, and the grasping result of the unnotified part grasping means can be reflected in the driving control of the circulating body by the drive control means. Is possible. By doing in this way, even if the second increase notification by the third increase notification executing means is performed as an effect, the effect is produced as compared with the configuration in which only the display screen for the effect controlled by the second control means is performed. The effect can be further enhanced.

  In the above configuration, “a predetermined information output can be performed from the first control unit to the second control unit, and a predetermined information output is performed from the second control unit to the first control unit. By providing the “not present” configuration, the significance of providing the unreported part grasping means on the first control means side is further enhanced.

Feature A6. The normal game operation wherein the drive control means causes the orbiting members to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbiting members when the stop operation means is operated age,
When the second increase notification is executed by the third increase notification execution means, special drive control means for controlling each circuit body so that a specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted is performed ( The gaming machine according to feature A5, further comprising a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, when the second increase notification is performed during the advantageous state, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game operation in which the start and the progress of the normal game operation are restricted. If it does in this way, it will become possible to grasp | ascertain that a 2nd increase alerting | reporting will be performed through the progress, such as a start or stop of a circulation body being restricted, and freezing, and the 2nd increase alerting | reporting will be carried out during the said freeze. , The second increase notification is also suppressed from being missed. Therefore, the degree of attention to the second increase notification can be suitably increased, and the effect of performing the second increase notification during the advantageous state can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature A7. The third increase notification executing means is capable of executing the second increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (third role during BB) in the advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, the second increase notification can be executed in the game in which the lottery result in the advantageous state is a special result. By doing this, it is possible to intensify the impression that the second increase notification in the advantageous state has occurred because the special result was drawn as the lottery result, not the one whose execution was previously determined or a mere effect. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect that makes it appear as if the increase processing has actually been performed.

Feature A8. In the advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, an execution lottery means for performing an execution lottery whether or not to execute the second increase notification (a pseudo-addition lottery process by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the third increase notification execution means executes the second increase notification according to a lottery result by the execution lottery means.

  According to the above configuration, the second increase notification is not executed only when the special result is won, but the second increase notification is executed after the execution lottery. Therefore, the second increase notification may not be executed when the special result is won. By doing in this way, the increase notification is performed in a flow closer to the actual increase process flow, and the effect of making it seem as if the increase process has been performed is enhanced.

  In addition to that, with the above configuration, when the lottery result in the advantageous state is a special result, it is difficult to give a sense of discomfort even if the second increase notification is not performed. That is, as described in the feature A1, the third increase notification execution unit is configured to execute the second increase notification based on the unreported amount by the second increase notification execution unit, and there is no unreported amount. May require a special configuration that does not need to execute the second increase notification, such as changing the lottery table so that the special result is not won. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the execution lottery is passed as in the above configuration, if there is no unreported portion, the execution lottery may be simply unwinned, without using a special configuration. It is possible to manage the presence or absence of execution of the second increase notification.

  Feature A9. When the execution lottery means shifts to the advantageous state in the first situation, the winning probability of the execution lottery is set to the first probability, and when the execution lottery shifts to the advantageous state in a second situation different from the first situation In the gaming machine according to the feature A8, it is possible to set the winning probability of the execution lottery to a second probability higher than the first probability.

  According to the above configuration, the execution probability of the second increase notification at the time of winning the special result is varied according to the state of transition to the advantageous state, the execution mode of the second increase notification is diversified, and the advantageous state is In the game by the second increase notification, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

  Feature A10. The execution lottery means the situation where the number of games after the transition to the specific gaming state is less than a predetermined number is the first situation, and the situation where the number of games after the transition is the predetermined number or more is the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9 characterized in that it is possible to

  If the number of digested games after transition to the specific gaming state increases, the possibility that the specific condition to be subjected to the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means becomes high, and the second increase notification execution is performed There is a high possibility that there is an unreported portion of the second increase notification by the means. In addition, if it is the number of digested games, it does not depend on whether or not the specific condition is established before the transition to the advantageous state, and it is determined whether the first situation or the second situation. Therefore, with the above configuration, the increase notification during the advantageous state is the second increase notification while adjusting the execution rate of the second increase notification without a sense of discomfort in relation to the unreported part of the second increase notification. This can be made difficult to predict directly from the success or failure of the specific condition.

  Feature A11. The execution lottery means the situation where the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state is less than a specific number is the second situation, and the situation where the number of games after the transition is the specific number or more is the first situation. A game machine according to feature A9 or feature A10 characterized in that it is possible.

  If the number of digested games in the advantageous state increases, the possibility that a game with a special result that triggers the execution of the second increase notification has increased. Then, on the condition that the increase process that triggers the second increase notification is not performed during the advantageous state, the unreported portion decreases as the second increase notification is executed during the advantageous state. Therefore, with the above configuration, as the number of digested games in the advantageous state increases, the second increase notification becomes more difficult to be executed, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event in which an unreported amount is exhausted. Therefore, the execution rate of the second increase notification can be adjusted without a sense of incongruity in relation to the non-notification amount of the second increase notification.

  Feature A12. The execution lottery means sets the first situation as a situation in which the uninformed portion of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is less than the number of games of the second increase notification based on the special result winning this time. Any of the features A9 to A11, wherein the second situation can be a situation in which the unreported amount is equal to or greater than the number of games of the second increase notification based on the special result winning this time. The gaming machine according to 1.

  In the above configuration, the number of unannounced games is directly determined to make the winning probability of the execution lottery different, and the second increase notification is to be executed when the unannounced part is absent or small. Occurrence can be avoided more reliably.

Feature A13. The privilege granting unit grants a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery unit is the special result and a special pattern combination predetermined in the effective position is stopped. ,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (second role in BB) that does not trigger execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means is provided,
The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A7 to A12.

  According to the said structure, the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result which can become an execution opportunity of a 2nd increase alert | report can appear also except at the time of special result winning. Since the second increase notification is not executed based on the special result other than at the time of the special result winning, the second increase notification is not necessarily executed just because a special picture combination appears. By doing in this way, it is possible to resemble the event when the increase process is actually performed including the scene where the second increase notification is not executed. As for the second increase notification in the advantageous state, the increase process is performed. The effect is reminiscent of as if it were broken.

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein a privilege corresponding to the special result and a privilege corresponding to the special result are common.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop outcomes at the time of winning the special result and at the time of winning the special result are made common, the bonus given regardless of the result is shared, so that the second increase notification is made. It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to understand the execution timing of

Feature A15. A first special lottery means capable of executing a first special lottery whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result (such as an attack mode by the main control device 101 or the like) Function to execute lottery process with additional number of games),
When the lottery result by the first special lottery means is the result that the specific condition is satisfied, the aspect of the increase notification about the increase process based on the specific condition satisfied is the first increase by the first increase notification execution means Second special lottery means capable of executing a second special lottery that selects one aspect from a plurality of aspects including the aspect of the notification and the aspect of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution means (by the main control device 101 Function to execute post-loading lottery process),
With
As the trigger result, a high probability trigger result (push bell, push replay) and a low probability trigger result (rare role such as strong cherries and weak watermelons) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is relatively positive are set. Has been
In the second special lottery when the winning result is obtained in the first special lottery based on the high probability trigger result, the case in which the winning result is obtained in the first special lottery based on the low probability trigger result The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the aspect of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution unit is easier to be selected than the second special lottery.

  According to the above configuration, the increase process based on the high probability trigger result is more likely to be the target of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution unit than the increase process based on the low probability trigger result. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a result with a low probability opportunity and is called a so-called rare role, in general, a flashy production is performed, so that the player is not only easily aware of the winning, It is easy to recognize that the trigger for the increase process has occurred. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a high-probability trigger result, it is difficult to recognize that it is a trigger for the increase process, as compared to the case of a low-probability trigger result. Under such a premise, the increase process based on the high-probability trigger result as described above is configured to be subject to the second increase notification, so that the increase process has been performed and the second increase notification execution means It becomes difficult to realize that the unannounced part due to is accumulated. By doing in this way, when the second increase notification is performed during the advantageous state, it is difficult to understand what the result is that the second increase notification is the increase notification.

  In addition, when the above configuration is limited to a configuration in which “the first special lottery based on the low-probability trigger result is easier to win than the first special lottery based on the high-probability trigger result”, a high probability It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to realize that the increase processing has been performed based on the trigger result.

Feature A16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, the transition result winning is reserved until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position,
The drive control means includes a plurality of pattern combinations including a pattern combination for the first winning and a pattern combination for the second winning different from the pattern combination for the first winning at the effective position when the transition result is won. Is to control each orbiting body so that can be stopped,
When the pattern combination for the first winning is stopped, the second increase notification is allowed to be performed by the third increase notification executing means, while when the pattern combination for the second winning is stopped Features A1 to A15 comprising means for restricting execution of the second increase notification by the third increase notification execution means (function for executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the said structure, the presence or absence of execution of the 2nd increase alert | report in the advantageous state transferred afterwards changes with the stop appearance at the time of a transition result winning. More specifically, in the transition result winning game, the second increase notification is executed when the first winning symbol combination is stopped, and the second increase notification is restricted when the second winning symbol combination is stopped. The These stop appearances appear on the basis of the operation of the stop operation means by the player. Whether the symbol combination for the first winning or the symbol combination for the second winning will stop. Basically, it can be said that the matter is left to the player's operation. In other words, the player can select whether or not to execute the second increase notification during the advantageous state, and it is possible to generate effects according to the player's various needs.

Feature A17. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
Low-advantageous transition means for shifting the high-advantaged state to the low-advantaged state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second section display process by the main control device 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number in the high advantageous state (the number of advantageous area remaining games ZG);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, a first increase notification execution that can execute an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed by a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65). Means (a function of performing processing for executing an additional notification effect by the main control device 101);
An unexecuted portion for grasping an unexecuted portion for which the increase processing by the increasing means has not been executed although the specific condition is satisfied, or for which the increase notification has not been executed although the increase processing has been performed by the increasing means. Grasping means (function of executing a process of grasping the post-loading counter BG by the main control device 101);
Second increase notification execution that allows the predetermined notification means to execute the increase notification of the unexecuted portion grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means during a predetermined restriction period in which establishment of the specific condition is restricted Means (function of executing processing for pseudo addition on BB by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state where the player's advantage is relatively high, and the high-advantage state increases the remaining number of high-advantage states when a specific condition is satisfied. Since it has a so-called addition function and an increase notification corresponding to an increase in the remaining number is performed, a sense of expectation for the establishment of the specific condition is enhanced. In addition, in the above configuration, during a predetermined restriction period in which the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, an increase notification may be performed based on an unexecuted portion of the increase process or the increase notification. Also, the high degree of attention has been raised. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest during the high advantage state while preventing the actual number of remaining items and the number of times of notification from being generated.

  The above “low advantage transition means” may be expressed as follows.

  "Low advantageous transition means for shifting to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state is completed" or "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state, the high advantageous state is "Low-advantageous transition means for shifting to a low-advantageous state".

  Note that the configuration indicated by the features A1 to A16 may be applied individually to the configuration of the feature A17, or may be applied in combination with the configuration indicated by the features A1 to A16. In this case, “high advantageous state” is “specific gaming state”, “low advantageous state” is “normal gaming state”, “predetermined limited period” is “advantageous state”, and “first increase notification executing means” is “first The “1st increase notification execution means”, “second increase notification execution means”, and “second increase notification execution means” may be appropriately replaced with “third increase notification execution means”.

Feature A18. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing),
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1) and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result is stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a restricted target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific advantageous state (restricted target bonus) advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
Low-advantageous transition means for shifting the high-advantaged state to the low-advantaged state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second section display process by the main control device 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number in the high advantageous state (the number of advantageous area remaining games ZG);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, a first increase notification execution that can execute an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed by a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65). Means (a function of performing processing for executing an additional notification effect by the main control device 101);
An unexecuted portion for grasping an unexecuted portion for which the increase processing by the increasing means has not been executed although the specific condition is satisfied, or for which the increase notification has not been executed although the increase processing has been performed by the increasing means. Grasping means (function of executing a process of grasping the post-loading counter BG by the main control device 101);
Second increase notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification of the unexecuted part grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means by the predetermined informing means during the predetermined specific advantageous state (by the main control device 101 Function to execute pseudo-superimposed processing during BB),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is granted by the bonus grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the specific transition result is When stopped, it shifts to a specific advantageous state advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high-advantage state increases the remaining number of high-advantage states when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, an increase notification corresponding to the increase in the remaining number is performed, so that the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is enhanced. Moreover, during the specific advantageous state, the increase notification may be performed based on the non-execution part of the increase processing or the increase notification, and the degree of attention regarding the high advantageous state is increased. In this case, since it is not necessary to actually establish the specific condition if it is an increase notification of the unexecuted portion, for example, the configuration in which the specific condition cannot be established in the specific advantageous state or the establishment of the specific condition is limited. Increase notification can be executed even in a configuration in which the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest during the high advantage state while preventing the actual remaining number and the number to be notified from being confused.

  The above “low advantage transition means” may be expressed as follows.

  "Low advantageous transition means for shifting to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state is completed" or "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state, the high advantageous state is "Low-advantageous transition means for shifting to a low-advantageous state".

  Feature A19. The gaming machine according to feature A18, further comprising means for restricting establishment of the specific condition in the predetermined specific advantageous state (a function of executing the process of step S3601 by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, the increase notification can be executed even if the specific condition is not established in the advantageous specific advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved without excessively enhancing the advantage of the specific advantageous state. Is possible.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “In the predetermined specific advantageous state, the establishment of the specific condition is limited”.

Feature A20. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to Feature A18 or Feature A19, characterized by having a common probability.

  According to the above configuration, since the probability that the increase notification is executed during the specific advantageous state is common regardless of the set value, it is difficult to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the increase notification during the specific advantageous state. Can do. In particular, considering that the range of increase / decrease in game media due to the set value should be reduced, it is considered that there should be no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value in the highly advantageous state, and the increase process is executed. It is considered that the rate, that is, the occurrence rate of the increase notification should not be different from the set value. Then, as long as the increase notification occurrence rate during the specific advantageous state does not cause a difference due to the set value as in the above configuration, no wrinkle occurs in relation to the increase notification during the high advantageous state, and the specific advantageous state It becomes possible to enjoy the increase notification during the operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the first setting value in the predetermined game in the predetermined specific advantageous state” 2) The probability that the increase notification is executed by the increase notification execution means is common. "

Feature A21. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The increase by the second increase notification execution means in the predetermined mode is performed when the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, wherein the probability that notification is performed is different.

  According to the above configuration, the probability that the increase notification is executed in a predetermined manner during the specific advantageous state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, for example, there is a large difference in the number of occurrences of increase notification between a setting value at which the execution rate of the increase notification in a predetermined mode is high and a setting value at which the execution rate is low, and the impression received by the higher setting value ( The difference between the image that is happy because the increase notification is executed and the impression that is received at the lower setting value (the image that is not happy because the increase notification is not easily executed) also increases. On the other hand, the increase notification during the specific advantageous state does not affect the advantage even if the execution rate is increased. Therefore, the difference in the number of occurrences of the increase notification during all games does not affect the advantage. In this way, it becomes possible to increase the difference in impression given rather than the difference in substantial advantage due to the difference in setting value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while ensuring the fairness of the game it can.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “The first set value is set by the setting means, and the second set value is set different from the first set value, and the second set value in the predetermined specific advantageous state is set as the first set value. 2) The probability that the increase notification is executed in a predetermined manner by the increase notification execution means is different. "

Feature A22. First control means (main control device 101) having at least the low-advantage transition means, and second control means (display control device 81) having the first increase notification execution means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A21, wherein the unexecuted part grasping means is included in the first control means.

  According to the above configuration, the low advantageous state transition means related to the player's profit is provided in the first control means, and the notification control structure such as the first increase notification execution means is provided in the second control means. It is possible to preferably execute measures such as fraudulent actions by enabling each process to be suitably executed while decentralizing, and by consolidating means involved in profit in the first control means.

  In addition, by providing the unexecuted part grasping means on the first control means side, it becomes possible to reflect the grasped result of the unexecuted part grasping means in the process on the first control means side. That is, for example, it is possible to reflect the grasped result of the unexecuted part grasping means in the lottery of each game, and the manner of notifying the unintended part grasping means of the result of each game (reel control of slot machine, etc. ). By doing in this way, even if the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is performed as an effect, the effect of the effect is achieved as compared with a configuration in which only the display screen for the effect controlled by the second control means is performed. It becomes possible to raise more.

  In the above configuration, “a predetermined information output can be performed from the first control unit to the second control unit, while a predetermined information output is performed from the second control unit to the first control unit”. By providing the “not present” configuration, the significance of providing the unexecuted part grasping means on the first control means side is further enhanced.

Feature A23. The normal game operation wherein the drive control means causes the orbiting members to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbiting members when the stop operation means is operated age,
When the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means, special drive control means (main control) that controls each circuit body so that a specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature A22, comprising a function of executing a process for rotation effect by the device 101).

  According to the above configuration, when the increase notification is performed during the specific advantageous state, a so-called freeze occurs as the specific game operation in which the start and the progress of the normal game operation are restricted. In this way, it becomes possible to grasp that the increase notification is performed through the fact that the start and stop of the circulation of the orbiting body is restricted and frozen, and if the increase notification is performed during the freeze, It is also suppressed that the increase notification is missed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the increase notification, and to preferably achieve the effect of performing the increase notification during the specific advantageous state.

  Feature A24. The second increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (third role in BB) in the predetermined specific advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A23, which is characterized in that

  According to the said structure, the increase alert | report based on an unexecuted part can be performed in the game where the lottery result in the specific advantageous state became a special result. By doing this, it is possible to intensify the impression that the increase notification in the specific advantageous state occurred because the special result was drawn as the lottery result, not the one whose execution was previously determined or a mere effect. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect that makes it appear as if the increase processing has actually been performed.

Feature A25. Execution lottery means for performing execution lottery whether or not to execute the increase notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the predetermined specific advantageous state (a pseudo extra lottery process by the main control device 101 Have the ability to perform
The game machine according to Feature A24, wherein the second increase notification execution means executes the increase notification according to a lottery result by the execution lottery means.

  According to the above configuration, the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is not executed only by winning the special result, but the increase notification is executed through the execution lottery. Therefore, the increase notification may not be executed when the special result is won. By doing in this way, the increase notification is performed in a flow closer to the actual increase process flow, and the effect of making it seem as if the increase process has been performed is enhanced.

  In addition, by using the above-described configuration, when the lottery result in the specific advantageous state becomes a special result, it is difficult to give a sense of incongruity without executing an increase notification. In other words, as described in the feature A18, the second increase notification execution unit is configured to execute the increase notification based on the unexecuted portion. If there is no unexecuted portion, for example, the special result is not won. It may be necessary to have a special configuration that does not require execution of increase notification, such as changing the lottery table. In that respect, if there is no unexecuted portion as long as it is a configuration that undergoes an execution lottery as in the above configuration, it is sufficient to simply not win the execution lottery, and without using a special configuration, It is possible to manage the presence or absence of the increase notification.

  Feature A26. The execution lottery means determines that the winning probability of the execution lottery is a first probability when the execution proceeds to the predetermined specific advantageous state in the first situation, and the second is different from the first situation to the predetermined specific advantageous state. It is possible to make the selection probability of the execution lottery the second probability higher than the first probability when transitioning in a situation is made, the gaming machine according to the feature A25.

  According to the above-described configuration, the execution probability of the increase notification at the time of winning the special result is varied according to the state of transition to the specific advantageous state, the execution mode of the increase notification is diversified, and the increase notification during the specific advantageous state In the game played by the player, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

  Feature A27. The execution lottery means the first situation is a situation where the number of games after the transition to the highly advantageous state is less than a predetermined number, and the second situation is a situation where the number of games after the transition is not less than the predetermined number. The gaming machine according to feature A26, characterized in that it is possible to

  As the number of digested games after the transition to the high advantage state increases, the possibility that the unannounced part of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means is present also increases. Moreover, if it is the number of digest games, it will be decided whether a 1st condition or a 2nd situation is not influenced by whether specific conditions were satisfied before shifting to a specific advantageous state. Therefore, the increase notification during the specific advantageous state is based on the non-executed portion while adjusting the execution rate of the increase notification without a sense of incongruity in relation to the non-executed portion of the increase notification by using the above configuration. It is possible to make it hard to predict directly from the success or failure of a specific condition.

  Feature A28. The execution lottery means the situation where the number of games since the transition to the predetermined specific advantageous state is less than the specific number is the second situation, and the number of games after the transition is the specific number or more The gaming machine according to Feature A27 or Feature A27, characterized in that the first situation can be set.

  If the number of digested games in the specific advantageous state increases, it is considered that the possibility that a game that can be subjected to increase notification has occurred increases. And in the structure which does not perform the increase process used as the opportunity of an increase alert | report in a specific advantageous state, the unexecuted part decreases so much, so that an increase alert | report is performed in a specific advantageous state. Therefore, by adopting the above-described configuration, the increase notification is less likely to be executed as the number of digested games in the specific advantageous state increases, and an event in which the unexecuted portion is exhausted can be less likely to occur. Therefore, the execution rate of the increase notification can be adjusted without a sense of incongruity in relation to the unexecuted portion.

  Feature A29. The execution lottery means sets the situation in which the unexecuted portion of the increase notification is less than the number of games in the increase notification by the second increase notification execution portion as the first situation, and sets the unexecuted portion as the second state of the current time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A26 to A28, wherein a situation that is equal to or greater than the number of games of increase notification by the increase notification execution means can be the second situation.

  In the above configuration, the number of unexecuted games is directly determined to vary the winning probability of the execution lottery, and the second increase notification executing means tries to execute the increase notification when there is no or less unexecuted portion. Occurrence of an event such as a failure can be avoided more reliably.

Feature A30. The privilege granting unit grants a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery unit is the special result and a special pattern combination predetermined in the effective position is stopped. ,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, there is provided a special result (second part in BB) which does not become an execution trigger for the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means,
The bonus granting means is capable of granting a bonus corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special symbol combination is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A29.

  According to the above configuration, a special pattern combination corresponding to a special result that can be an execution trigger of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means can appear even when the special result is won. Since the increase notification is not executed based on the special result, the increase notification is not always executed just because a special pattern combination appears. By doing this, it is possible to make it resemble an event when the increase processing is actually performed, including a situation where the increase notification is not executed, and as to the increase notification in a predetermined period, as if the increase processing was performed. The reminiscent effect is enhanced.

  Feature A31. The gaming machine according to Feature A30, wherein a privilege corresponding to the special result and a privilege corresponding to the special result are common.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop outcomes at the time of winning the special result and at the time of winning the special result are shared, the bonus given for any result is further shared to execute the increase notification It is possible to further enhance the effect of making the opportunity unclear.

Feature A32. A first special lottery means capable of executing a first special lottery whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result (such as an attack mode by the main control device 101 or the like) Function to execute lottery process with additional number of games),
When the lottery result by the first special lottery means is the result that the specific condition is satisfied, the execution state of at least one of the increase processing and the increase notification based on the specific condition is determined by the unexecuted part grasping means A second special lottery means (a function for executing a post-loading lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second special lottery that selects one aspect from a plurality of aspects including a target aspect;
With
As the trigger result, a high probability trigger result (push bell, push replay) and a low probability trigger result (rare role such as strong cherries and weak watermelons) in which the winning probability by the lottery means is relatively positive are set. Has been
In the second special lottery when the winning result is the first special lottery based on the high probability opportunity result, the winning case is the first special lottery based on the low probability opportunity result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A31, wherein the aspect to be grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means is more easily selected than the second special lottery.

  According to the above configuration, the specific condition based on the high probability trigger result is more likely not to be subjected to the increase processing or the increase notification than the specific condition based on the low probability trigger result, and becomes easier to be grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a low probability trigger result and is a result called a so-called rare role, generally, a flashy effect is performed and the player is not only easily noticed the winning, It is easy to recognize that the trigger for the increase process has occurred. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the high probability trigger result, it is more difficult to recognize that it becomes a trigger for the increase process than in the low probability trigger result. Under such a premise, as described above, the increase process and the increase notification based on the high probability trigger result are not likely to be executed, the unexecuted part to be subjected to the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means It becomes difficult to realize that is accumulated. In this way, when the increase notification is performed during the specific advantageous state, it becomes difficult to realize which result is the increase notification from which the increase notification is.

  In the above configuration, when the configuration of “the first special lottery based on the low probability trigger result is more likely to be a winning result than the first special lottery based on the high probability trigger result” is limited, the high probability is obtained. It is possible to further enhance the effect of making it difficult to realize that the increase processing has been performed based on the trigger result.

Feature A33. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific transition result, the specific transition result winning is reserved until the transition picture combination stops at the effective position,
The drive control means includes a plurality of pattern combinations including a pattern combination for the first winning and a pattern combination for the second winning different from the pattern combination for the first winning at the effective position when the transition result is won. Is to control each orbiting body so that can be stopped,
When the symbol combination for the first winning is stopped, the second increase notification execution means permits execution of the increase notification, while the second winning symbol combination is stopped. 2 Any one of the features A18 to A32 characterized by comprising means for limiting the execution of the increase notification by the increase notification execution means (a function for executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control apparatus 101). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, the presence or absence of the execution of the increase notification in the specific advantageous state which will occur thereafter differs depending on the stopping time at the specific transition result winning. More specifically, in the transition result winning game, the increase notification is executed when the symbol combination for the first win is stopped, and the execution of the increase notification is restricted when the symbol combination at the second win is stopped. Ru. These stop numbers appear based on the operation of the stop operation means by the player. Whether the symbol combination for the first winning is stopped or the symbol combination for the second winning is stopped: Basically, it can be said that the matter is left to the player's operation. That is, the player can select whether or not to perform the increase notification during the specific advantageous state, and it is possible to generate effects according to various needs of the player.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing),
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the first transition pattern combination corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. First advantage transitioning means for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous state (restriction non-target bonus) advantageous to the player for the player (the processing to shift to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1), and the symbol combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on the second advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous state (restriction target bonus) advantageous to the player (processing for transitioning to restricted non-relevant bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function),
Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous interval based on
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase processing is performed by the increase unit, an increase notification execution unit (display capable of executing increase notification (instant notification) on the result of the increase processing by a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65) A function of executing setting processing of additional effects by the control device 81),
With
The increase notification execution means is capable of executing the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state,
In the first advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third in BB), the specific condition may be satisfied, while in the second advantageous state, the lottery is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied when the lottery result by the means becomes the special result.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and these first transition results or When the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the transition is made to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can occur in each game.

  Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be an end trigger of the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game characteristic which waits for the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state to be won while enjoying the profit by the notification of the specific gaming state, the increase processing can prolong the waiting state while enjoying the profit. Thus, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state is more likely to occur. Not only that, when shifting to the first advantageous state, the increase process can be performed even during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when shifting to the second advantageous state, the increase process can not be performed during the second advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of advantage is largely different depending on which of the advantageous state is transitioned to during the specific gaming state, and from such a point of view, the gaming property is significantly improved.

  As described above, by not performing the increase process in the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the first advantageous state and to increase the fluctuation width of the game media. On the other hand, looking at the second advantageous state alone, from the player who was expecting the transition to the first advantageous state, the game in the second advantageous state is not interesting and there is a concern that the degree of attention may be reduced. However, in the second advantageous state, even if the increase notification is performed as a mere effect, the difference from the fact that the increase processing is not performed is severe, and there is a possibility that it may become a factor of reducing attention.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, the increase notification is performed while the increase notification is not performed in the second advantageous condition, and the increase notification in the second advantageous condition is performed in the first advantageous condition. In this case, a special result which is a game result is executed as a trigger. That is, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification is executed in a game having a special result, and the increase notification performed during the second advantageous state is the lottery result by the actual lottery means. It will be based on. Therefore, when the increase notification is performed without passing the increase processing in the second advantageous state, the impression that the increase notification is not performed as a mere effect is strengthened, and the impression that the increase notification is actually the increase notification that has been subjected to the increase processing Is possible. This makes it possible to preferably increase the degree of attention of the second advantageous state.

The above configuration is
“The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined in the first advantageous state. While the specific condition can be satisfied when a special result (third role in BB) is obtained, in the second advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, the specific condition is It does not hold ",
“The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, and the specific condition can be satisfied in the first advantageous state, 2 is not established in the advantageous state, and in the first advantageous state, the specific condition can be established when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third combination in BB). On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, the specific condition may not be satisfied.

  Further, the above "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

  “Normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state is finished” or “Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. “Normal transition means for transition to gaming state”.

  Feature B2. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result in the first advantageous state is common to the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, the rate of increase notification in the first advantageous state and the rate of increase notification in the second advantageous state are common, and increase notification in the second advantageous state is increased in the first advantageous state. The effect of imitating the notification can be further enhanced.

Feature B3. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. Yes,
The increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in a game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position in the first advantageous state, and the special symbol combination in the second advantageous state. The game machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the increase notification can be executed in a game that can be stopped at the effective position.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which an increase notification can be performed at the time of winning the special result in both advantageous states, not only the lottery result but also the stop event is common, and the executed increase notification is an increase notification based on the lottery result Can be further strengthened. Therefore, it becomes possible to more suitably exhibit the attention level improvement effect in the second advantageous state of the feature B1.

  In particular, it is based on the premise that the main control device performs lottery by means of lottery means related to the player's profit and the driving of the orbiter and the like and the effects such as the display screen are performed by the sub control device. For example, it is considered that the player relies more on the action and the stop of the orbiter under the control of the main side than the effect contents under the control of the sub side. That is, it is considered that the possibility of being seen as a mere effect is high with regard to the contents shown only by the effect such as the display screen without the motion of the orbiting body and the number of stopped eyes. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the effect contents of the increase notification in the second advantageous state and the increase notification in the first advantageous state coincide with each other including the stop point, it is not a mere effect but an increase actually There is a high probability that it will be determined that processing has been performed.

Feature B4. The special result is a first special result;
The bonus granting means corresponds to the first special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and the special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. Benefits can be granted,
In the first advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined second special result (first part in BB), the specific condition is not satisfied, and in the second advantageous state The specific condition is not satisfied even when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second special result,
The increase notification execution means does not execute the increase notification when the second special result is won in the first advantageous state, and the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature B3, wherein the increase notification is not performed when the second special result is won in the advantageous state and the special symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position.

  In any case, the first special result and the second special result in which the stopping point is common are provided as a special pattern combination, and in the first advantageous state, the increase processing can be executed when the first special result is won, If the second special result is won, the increase process is not executed. Further, in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed even if any of the first special result and the second special result is won. In this way, it becomes difficult to understand whether the increase notification that can be executed during the first and second advantageous states is the increase notification triggered by either the first special result or the second special result. It is possible to make it difficult to realize that the increase notification in the second advantageous state is one that has not undergone the increase processing.

  Feature B5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second special result in the first advantageous state is common to the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second special result in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special symbol combination stops during the first advantageous state, and the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special symbol combination stops during the second advantageous state are: In common, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification in the second advantageous state resemble the increase notification in the first advantageous state.

  Feature B6. The feature B3 is characterized in that the increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state at a timing after the special symbol combination is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

  According to the above configuration, when the special symbol combination can be stopped, the increase notification is performed, and the increase notification is executed after the special symbol combination is stopped. The above configuration can be said to be a configuration that gives the reliability of the notification content prior to the increase notification on the premise that the effect of making the player stop is more reliable than the notification such as the display effect and the like. That is, it is the structure which performs increase alerting, after judging or convinced that increase processing was actually performed by stop appearance. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification in the second advantageous state seem to be accompanied by the increase processing.

Feature B7. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, it is possible to execute a determination process for determining whether the game having the special result is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. Determination means (function to execute the process of step S3601 by the main controller 101),
The increase notification execution means executes a first process when the determination means determines that the first advantageous state is achieved, and performs a first process when the increase notification execution means determines that the second advantageous state is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that a process different from the above is executed.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase notification is performed using the same special result in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification processing is performed based on the determination result by the determination unit. It differs in processing. That is, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the processing configuration at the time of winning the special result is in common to the middle, and the complex configuration of the processing configuration is suppressed in achieving the excellent effects of the above respective features. .

  Feature B8. In the first process and the second process, the first process and the second process are set so that at least a predetermined common process (addition process of the display remaining number counter HG by the main controller 101) exists. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized in that:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the process after the determination process when the special result is won differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the common process is set for the process after the determination process. Therefore, while making it easy to distinguish the advantageous state in the gaming machine, the processing configuration becomes similar, and the processing configuration can be further simplified.

Feature B9. The increase notification execution means is
In the first advantageous state, it is possible to execute the increase notification about the result of the increase process performed based on the special result winning in the first advantageous state,
In the second advantageous state, the increase notification about the result of the increase process executed before shifting to the second advantageous state can be executed based on the special result winning. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the above configuration, it is premised that the increase notification corresponding to the result of the increase process performed based on the special result winning in the first advantageous state is executed during the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state In the middle, an increase notification corresponding to the result of the increase process performed before the transition to the second advantageous state is executed based on the special result winning. In this way, even in the configuration in which the specific condition does not hold in the second advantageous state, the increase notification can be executed in the second advantageous state, and the increase notification is performed in the increase process executed in the advantageous state. It is possible to strengthen the impression that is corresponding.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, characterized in that the first transition pattern combination and the second transition pattern combination are in common.

  According to the above configuration, the first transition pattern combination that shifts to the first advantageous state and the second transition pattern combination that shifts to the second advantageous state are common. From this point on, it is impossible to judge which one of the advantageous conditions this time is. This makes it difficult to determine whether the increase notification to be executed is an increase notification that has undergone an increase process or an increase notification that is not so, and can appropriately increase the degree of attention during the second advantageous state.

Feature B11. The first transition result and the second transition result both include an advantageous result (first BB) enabling transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and one of the first and second advantageous results is one of the advantageous results. Is a result including a different duplicate result (special Lip B),
The privilege giving means is a symbol combination corresponding to the overlapping result at the effective position, and the symbol combination for overlap different from the symbol combination for the first transition and the symbol combination for the second transition is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein a privilege corresponding to the duplication result is given based on the fact.

  According to the above configuration, there is a difference between the first transition result and the second transition result whether or not the winning contents include the overlapping result, and the overlapping result is the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern for the second transition. It wins by stopping the pattern combination for duplication different from the combination. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is achieved by stopping the overlapping picture combination and establishing the overlapping result winning. As a result, as described above, it is determined that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not been subjected to the increase process while obtaining the effect that the increase notification during the second advantageous state is assumed to have undergone the increase process. If possible, it becomes possible, and it becomes possible to meet conflicting needs between a player who wants to enjoy the production and a player who does not.

Feature B12. When the stop operation means is operated in the first mode in which the overlapping picture combination corresponding to the duplication result can be stopped, the overlapping picture combination can be stopped, while the first mode. When the operation is performed in a second mode different from the above, another pattern combination different from the overlapping pattern combination stops.
The gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the other pattern combination can be stopped regardless of which of the first transition result and the second transition result is won.

  According to the above configuration, in order to establish the duplicate result winning and determine the first transition result and the second transition result, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means in the first mode. If the second mode is not used, the first transition result and the second transition result cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the increase notification is the first increase notification or the second increase notification only when the stop operation means can be operated as the first aspect. If it does in this way, if it wants to enjoy production, what is necessary is just to operate in a 2nd aspect, and if it is not so, it will be sufficient to operate only in a 1st aspect. It is possible to draw on the machine side.

  Feature B13. The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the second aspect is an aspect that allows a player to more easily operate than the first aspect.

  According to the above configuration, in order to be able to determine the type of the increase notification, it is necessary to operate in the more difficult first mode, and the increase notification is made in the playability of the slot machine which proceeds the game by operating the stop operation means. Even the presence / absence of the type can be incorporated into the game.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “In each of the orbiting members, the number of arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the overlapping symbol combination is smaller than the arrangement number of the symbols corresponding to the other symbol combinations in the specific circulation member (left reel 32L) "A period during which the operation of the stop operation means is in the first mode is shorter than a period during which the second mode is the operation".

  Feature B14. The specific condition may be satisfied in the game won in the first transition result, but not in the game won in the second transition result, according to any one of the features B1 to B13, Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the winning game is adjusted to match the relationship between the first advantageous state in which the specific condition can be established and the second advantageous state in which the specific condition is not realized, and the balls are adjusted according to the success or failure of the specific condition. Can be expected.

  In particular, if the present configuration is applied to a configuration in which the winning point of the winning game can be different as in the feature B11, the game will be performed while paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the winning game. As a matter of course, the stop operation of each stop operation means is likely to be a careful operation, and it is easy to be interested in stopping the winning game. Therefore, the effect of the feature B11 can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature B15. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the probabilities are common, but the probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result are different.

  According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state in which the increase process is performed (specific condition may be satisfied), the winning probability is common regardless of the set value, and the increase process is not performed (specific condition is not satisfied) 2.) In the second advantageous state, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. In this way, the game property in which the winning result and the degree of advantage are different depending on the stop operation mode is realized regardless of the set value by the second advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is winning probability by the set value. Similar to the first advantageous state where is different, it is also possible to give an impression as if the setting value is involved in the playability of the stop operation mode.

Feature B16. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to execute processing),
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the first transition pattern combination corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. First advantage transitioning means for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous state (restriction non-target bonus) advantageous to the player for the player (the processing to shift to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101 Function to execute)
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second transition result (for example, special lip AB duplication 1), and the symbol combination for the second transition corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on the second advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous state (restriction target bonus) advantageous to the player (processing for transitioning to restricted non-relevant bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function),
Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous interval based on
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
First increase notification execution means capable of executing increase notification (instant notification) of the result of the increase process by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) when the increase process is performed by the increase means (A function for executing the setting process of the extra effect by the display control device 81);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, execution of the increasing process by the increasing means is permitted, while when the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase by the increasing means Specifying means for restricting the execution of the process (an additional drawing table set to allow an additional drawing in the restricted non-target bonus by the main control device 101 and restrict an additional drawing in the restricted target bonus);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase process by the increase means is not executed, or although the increase process is performed by the increase means, the increase notification is not executed. Second increase notification execution means (function to execute a process for pseudo addition during BB by the main control device 101) which can execute the increase notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) based on an execution amount;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and these first transition results or When the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the transition is made to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain of an advantageous state and a specific gaming state can occur in each game.

  Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be an end trigger of the specific gaming state based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game characteristic which waits for the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state to be won while enjoying the profit by the notification of the specific gaming state, the increase processing can prolong the waiting state while enjoying the profit. Thus, the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state is more likely to occur. Not only that, when shifting to the first advantageous state, the increase process can be performed even during the first advantageous state. On the other hand, when shifting to the second advantageous state, the increase process cannot be performed in the second advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of advantage is largely different depending on which of the advantageous state is transitioned to during the specific gaming state, and from such a point of view, the gaming property is significantly improved.

  As described above, by not performing the increase process in the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree of advantage from the first advantageous state and to increase the fluctuation width of the game media. On the other hand, looking at the second advantageous state alone, from the player who was expecting the transition to the first advantageous state, the game in the second advantageous state is not interesting and there is a concern that the degree of attention may be reduced. However, in the second advantageous state, even if the increase notification is performed as a mere effect, the difference from the fact that the increase processing is not performed is severe, and there is a possibility that it may become a factor of reducing attention.

  Therefore, in the above configuration, although the increase processing is not performed even if the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, the increase notification is performed based on the non-execution part of the increase processing or the increase notification. It is possible to improve the playability in the second advantageous state while preventing the remaining number and the number to be notified from being in conflict. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased without excessively increasing the degree of advantage in the second advantageous state.

  The “normal transition means” may be expressed as follows.

  “Normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state is finished” or “Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. “Normal transition means for transition to gaming state”.

  Feature B17. The gaming machine according to Feature B16, wherein the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state and the probability that the specific condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state are common.

  According to the above configuration, the rate of increase notification in the first advantageous state and the rate of increase notification in the second advantageous state are common, and increase notification in the second advantageous state is increased in the first advantageous state. The effect of imitating the notification can be further enhanced.

Feature B18. The specific condition can be satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third role in BB),
The specifying means allows the increase process to be executed when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the first advantageous state, while the lottery result by the lottery means in the second advantageous state is The gaming machine according to Feature B16 or Feature B17, wherein execution of the increase process is restricted when a special result is obtained.

  According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the game result serving as the trigger for establishing the specific condition becomes common as a special result. By doing this, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the increase processing has been performed, even for the increase notification in the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase processing is actually limited.

Feature B19. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the special result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and a special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. Yes,
When the execution of the increasing process is permitted during the first advantageous state by the specifying means, and when the execution of the increasing process is limited during the second advantageous state, the special position is The gaming machine according to feature B18, characterized in that a combination of symbols on the panel can be stopped.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration where the increase notification can be performed at the special result winning time, not only the lottery result but also the stop appearance is common, and the executed increase notification further strengthens the impression that the increase notification is Is possible. Therefore, the attention level improvement effect in the second advantageous state can be more suitably exhibited.

  In particular, it is based on the premise that the main control device performs lottery by means of lottery means related to the player's profit and the driving of the orbiter and the like and the effects such as the display screen are performed by the sub control device. For example, it is considered that the player relies more on the action and the stop of the orbiter under the control of the main side than the effect contents under the control of the sub side. That is, it is considered that the possibility of being seen as a mere effect is high with regard to the contents shown only by the effect such as the display screen without the motion of the orbiting body and the number of stopped eyes. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the effect contents of the increase notification in the second advantageous state and the increase notification in the first advantageous state coincide with each other including the stop point, it is not a mere effect but an increase actually There is a high probability that it will be determined that processing has been performed.

Feature B20. The special result is a first special result;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a second special result (second role in BB) different from the first special result is set,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the special symbol combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position, a privilege corresponding to the first special result can be given. Yes,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and when the special picture combination stops at the effective position, a privilege corresponding to the second special result can be given,
The gaming machine according to Feature B19, wherein the specific condition is not satisfied when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second special result (third role in BB).

  In any case, the first special result and the second special result in which the stopping point is common are provided as a special pattern combination, and in the first advantageous state, the increase processing can be executed when the first special result is won, If the second special result is won, the increase process is not executed. Further, in the second advantageous state, the increase process is not executed even if any of the first special result and the second special result is won. In this way, it becomes difficult to understand whether the increase notification that can be executed during the first and second advantageous states is the increase notification triggered by either the first special result or the second special result. It is possible to make it difficult to realize that the increase notification in the second advantageous state is one that has not undergone the increase processing.

  The "second special result" is expressed as "a second special result different from the first special result as a lottery result by the lottery means in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state", It is possible to more clearly exhibit the effect of winning the second special result during the two advantageous states.

  Feature B21. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second special result winning in the first advantageous state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means in the second advantageous state becomes the second special result winning are common. The gaming machine according to Feature B20, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special symbol combination stops during the first advantageous state, and the occurrence rate of the increase notification when the special symbol combination stops during the second advantageous state are: In common, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification in the second advantageous state resemble the increase notification in the first advantageous state.

  Feature B22. The game according to any one of features B19 to B21, wherein the second increase notification execution means is capable of executing the increase notification at a timing after the special picture combination stops at the effective position. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the special symbol combination can be stopped, the increase notification is performed, and the increase notification is executed after the special symbol combination is stopped. The above configuration can be said to be a configuration that gives the reliability of the notification content prior to the increase notification on the premise that the effect of making the player stop is more reliable than the notification such as the display effect and the like. That is, it is the structure which performs increase alerting, after judging or convinced that increase processing was actually performed by stop appearance. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making the increase notification in the second advantageous state seem to be accompanied by the increase processing.

Feature B23. The specific condition can be satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (third role in BB),
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, it is possible to execute a determination process for determining whether the game having the special result is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. Determination means (function to execute the process of step S3601 by the main controller 101),
The first increase notification execution means executes a first process after the determination means determines that the first advantageous state is established,
The second increase notification execution means performs a second process different from the first process after being determined by the determination means to be in the second advantageous state, any one of the features B16 to B22 The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the increase notification is performed using the same special result in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the increase notification processing is performed based on the determination result by the determination unit. It differs in processing. That is, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the processing configuration at the time of winning the special result is in common to the middle, and the complex configuration of the processing configuration is suppressed in achieving the excellent effects of the above respective features. .

  Feature B24. In the first process and the second process, the first process and the second process are set so that at least a predetermined common process (addition process of the display remaining number counter HG by the main controller 101) exists. The gaming machine according to Feature B23, which is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the process after the determination process when the special result is won differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the common process is set for the process after the determination process. Therefore, while making it easy to distinguish the advantageous state in the gaming machine, the processing configuration becomes similar, and the processing configuration can be further simplified.

  Feature B25. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B16 to B24, wherein the first transition pattern combination and the second transition pattern combination are in common.

  According to the above configuration, the first transition pattern combination that shifts to the first advantageous state and the second transition pattern combination that shifts to the second advantageous state are common. From this point on, it is impossible to judge which one of the advantageous conditions this time is. This makes it difficult to determine whether the increase notification to be executed is an increase notification that has undergone an increase process or an increase notification that is not so, and can appropriately increase the degree of attention during the second advantageous state.

Feature B26. The first transition result and the second transition result both include an advantageous result (first BB) enabling transition to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state, and one of the first and second advantageous results is one of the advantageous results. Is a result including a different duplicate result (special Lip B),
The privilege granting unit stops at the effective position a pattern combination corresponding to the overlap result, which is different from the first transition pattern combination and the second transition pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B25, wherein a privilege corresponding to the duplication result is given based on the result.

  According to the above configuration, there is a difference between the first transition result and the second transition result whether or not the winning contents include the overlapping result, and the overlapping result is the pattern combination for the first transition and the pattern for the second transition. It wins by stopping the pattern combination for duplication different from the combination. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is achieved by stopping the overlapping picture combination and establishing the overlapping result winning. As a result, as described above, it is determined that the increase notification during the second advantageous state has not been subjected to the increase process while obtaining the effect that the increase notification during the second advantageous state is assumed to have undergone the increase process. If possible, it becomes possible, and it becomes possible to meet conflicting needs between a player who wants to enjoy the production and a player who does not.

Feature B27. When the stop operation means is operated in the first mode in which the overlapping picture combination corresponding to the duplication result can be stopped, the overlapping picture combination can be stopped, while the first mode. When the operation is performed in a second mode different from the above, another pattern combination different from the overlapping pattern combination stops.
The game machine according to Feature B26, wherein the other symbol combination can be stopped regardless of which of the first transition result and the second transition result is won.

  According to the above configuration, in order to establish the duplicate result winning and determine the first transition result and the second transition result, it is necessary to operate the stop operation means in the first mode. If the second mode is not used, the first transition result and the second transition result cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the increase notification is the first increase notification or the second increase notification only when the stop operation means can be operated as the first aspect. If it does in this way, if it wants to enjoy production, what is necessary is just to operate in a 2nd aspect, and if it is not so, it will be sufficient to operate only in a 1st aspect. It is possible to draw on the machine side.

  Feature B28. The gaming machine according to Feature B27, wherein the second mode is a mode in which a player can operate more easily than the first mode.

  According to the above configuration, in order to be able to determine the type of the increase notification, it is necessary to operate in the more difficult first mode, and the increase notification is made in the playability of the slot machine which proceeds the game by operating the stop operation means. Even the presence / absence of the type can be incorporated into the game.

  The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

  “In each of the orbiting members, the number of arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the overlapping symbol combination is smaller than the arrangement number of the symbols corresponding to the other symbol combinations in the specific circulation member (left reel 32L) “The period during which the operation of the stop operation means is in the first mode is shorter than the period during which the second mode is.”

  Feature B29. The gaming machine according to any one of features B16 to B28, wherein the specific condition can be satisfied by winning the first transition result, but is not satisfied even by winning the second transition result. .

  According to the said structure, it corresponds with the relationship between the 1st advantageous state in which execution of an increase process is accept | permitted, and the 2nd advantageous state in which execution of an increase process is restrict | limited, The effect which adjusts a ball according to the success or failure of specific conditions Can be expected, including the winning game.

  In particular, if this configuration is applied to a configuration in which the number of stops of the winning game may be different as in feature B26, the game will be played while paying attention to whether or not the increase processing is performed in the winning game. On the premise of that, naturally, the stop operation of each stop operation means tends to be a prudent operation, and it becomes easy to draw attention to the stop point of the winning game. Therefore, the effect of the feature B26 can be achieved more suitably.

Feature B30. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result between the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value different from the first setting value is set The gaming machine according to any one of the features B16 to B29, wherein the probability is the same, but the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result is different.

  According to the above configuration, the first advantageous state in which the execution of the increase process is permitted has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and the second advantageous state in which the execution of the increase process is limited is the set value. Winning probability is different. In this way, the game property in which the winning result and the degree of advantage are different depending on the stop operation mode is realized regardless of the set value by the second advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is winning probability by the set value. Similar to the first advantageous state where is different, it is also possible to give an impression as if the setting value is involved in the playability of the stop operation mode.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Each of the laps is performed so that a normal game operation is performed to start the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated and to stop the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set A function of executing a process of setting a winning probability by 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The winning result by the lottery means is that the winning probability is common between the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value different from the first setting value is set. Based on the transition result (for example, special Lip A overlap 1) and the transition of the pattern combination for transition ("Red 7" symbol alignment) to the effective position, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. First advantageous transition means for shifting to one advantageous state (non-restricted bonus) (function for executing a process for shifting to a restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result (for example, a special reply) with different winning probabilities when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value is set. A second advantage of AB overlap 1) in which the gaming state is shifted to a second advantageous state (a bonus to be restricted) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the picture combination for transition is stopped at the effective position. Transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to a restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result that is awarded when each stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. Having a second result that results in winning a prize when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification unit (first display on the instruction monitor 68). For the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) that can be executed in the display segment N1 (seventh display segment N7) is provided
As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (an advantageous section including an attack mode, a challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification unit is higher than the normal gaming state are provided,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result in the normal gaming state, the transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) And the ability to perform
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state (a winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101 is executed) Function),
Based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, normal transition means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the section display second process by the main controller 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous interval based on
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the specific gaming state (advantageous section remaining game number ZG);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increasing means, a first increase notification (immediate notification) that the increase process has been performed based on a game that satisfies the specific condition that triggered the increase process. A first increase notification execution means (function of executing a setting process of an extra effect by the display control device 81) that can be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
When the increase process is performed by the increase means, a second increase notification that the increase process has been performed based on a game after the game that satisfies the specific condition that triggered the increase process. Second increase notification execution means (function of executing an additional effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing (additional notification) by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
With
The notification mode of the first increase notification in the first advantageous state by the first increase notification execution unit and the execution mode of the second increase notification in the second advantageous state by the second increase notification execution unit cannot be distinguished. Or a game machine characterized by being difficult to identify.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed and the orbit of the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and is stopped In a so-called slot machine in which a benefit is awarded by the benefit awarding means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result or the second transition result, and these first transition results or When the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped, the transition is made to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, there may be a specific gaming state in which the result of winning may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiter, and the degree of advantage may be varied depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result, a transition lottery to the specific gaming state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state can occur in each game.

  In addition, in the specific game state, an increase process is performed to increase the remaining number that can be an end trigger of the specific game state based on the establishment of the specific condition, and when the increase process is performed, the first increase notification or the second An increase notification is performed. Therefore, in the game characteristic of waiting for the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state to be won while enjoying the benefit from the notification of the aspect of the specific gaming state, the increase process may extend the waiting condition while enjoying the benefit. As a result, a chain of the above-mentioned advantageous state and the specific gaming state is more likely to occur.

  Here, the first transition result serving as the transition trigger to the first advantageous state has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and the second transition result serving as the transition trigger to the second advantageous state is set The winning probability is different depending on the value. Therefore, the increase / decrease mode of the game media can be adjusted by the appearance rate of the second advantageous state. However, if the difference in the appearance rate of the second advantageous state can be grasped properly, grasping of the set value becomes too easy, which may affect the operation rate of each gaming machine in the gaming hall.

  Therefore, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are both a combination of symbols for transition at the time of winning (shifting), and the distinction is made between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. It is difficult to get stuck. In addition, the first increase notification during the first advantageous state and the second increase notification during the second advantageous state are also unidentifiable or difficult to identify, and whether the first notification is the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state from the increase notification. It is difficult to make a decision. The first increase notification is a notification when the increase process is performed in the game, and the second increase notification is a notification when the increase process is performed in the game before that. Yes. In this way, the second advantageous state is made difficult by distinguishing the advantageous states having different winning probabilities according to the set values and the contents of the increase notification, such as the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Even if the difference of the increase / decrease mode of the game medium is designed by the above, it is difficult to determine whether the difference is due to the set value (difference in the rate of transition to the second advantageous state) or due to the first advantageous state. . Therefore, while designing the increase mode of the game media according to the set value, it is possible to make it seem as if the increase mode, that is, increase or decrease of the game media is realized by the player's own luck, and vice versa. In addition, it is possible to give an impression that the increase or decrease in game media is due to the set value rather than the player's own luck. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, "I can not distinguish or is difficult to identify" may be expressed as "I can not distinguish or difficult to identify the player" or is expressed as "common" or "identical or nearly identical". May be.

  Further, the above "normal transition means" may be expressed as follows.

  “Normal transition means for shifting to the normal gaming state when the specific gaming state is finished” or “Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. “Normal transition means for transition to gaming state”.

Feature C2. The drive control means includes specific drive control means (a function for executing processing for various freeze effects by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the circulating bodies in a predetermined specific manner.
The first increase notification executing means, when executing the first increase notification in the first advantageous state, performs control of each of the circulating bodies in the specific mode by the specific drive control means,
The second increase notification executing means is configured to control each of the circulating bodies in the specific mode by the specific drive control means when executing the second increase notification in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, which is characterized.

  According to the above configuration, the first increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification in the second advantageous state are common not only in the common manner of the notification mode but also in the specific mode regarding the control of the circulating body. By doing this, for example, there is a high possibility that the player recognizes the same as compared with a configuration in which only effects on the display screen are made similar.

  In particular, it is based on the premise that the lottery means involved in the player's profits, the driving of the circulating body, etc. are performed by the main control device, and the display screen etc. are rendered by the sub control device. For example, it is considered that the player trusts the operation and the like of the orbiter under the control of the main side rather than the contents of the effect under the control of the sub side, and the first advantage is achieved by adopting the above configuration. It is possible to more suitably exhibit the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the state and the second advantageous state.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to Feature C2, wherein the specific drive control unit controls each circuit body so that a specific game operation in which a start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted is performed as the specific mode. .

  According to the above configuration, when the first increase notification or the second increase notification is performed, a so-called freeze occurs as a specific game operation in which the start or the progress of the normal game operation is restricted. In this way, it becomes possible to grasp that the increase notification is performed through the fact that the start and stop of the circulation of the orbiting body is restricted and frozen, and if the increase notification is performed during the freeze, It is also suppressed that the increase notification is missed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably raise the degree of attention to the both increase notification, and to preferably exert the effect by performing the increase notification in both advantageous states.

Feature C4. As the specific mode, there are a first specific mode (a (pseudo) additional notification effect with a mid-stage red 7-freeze effect) and a second specific mode (a (pseudo) additional notification effect with a right-up red 7-freeze effect). ,
In the first advantageous state, the first increase notification execution means executes the first increase notification corresponding to the first number of the increase processes being performed, and the specific drive control means performs the first increase notification. In the case where the control of each of the circulating bodies that are in a specific mode is performed and the first increase notification corresponding to the second number of the increase processes being performed, the second drive by the specific drive control unit The control of each orbiting body that is a specific aspect is performed,
In the second advantageous state, the second increase notification executing means controls each orbiting body that becomes the first specific mode by the specific drive control means when executing the first number of the second increase notifications. When the second increase notification of the second number is performed, the specific drive control means controls each orbiting body that is the second specific mode. The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or Feature C3.

  According to the above configuration, a plurality of specific modes are set as the control mode of the circulating body, and the specific modes to be executed differ depending on the remaining number of the specific gaming state to be increased in the increase process. Then, if it is an increase notification corresponding to the first number of increase processing, the control of the circulating member is performed in the first specific mode whether it is the first increase notification or the second increase notification, and the second number In the case of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing of, the control of the circulating body is performed in the second specific mode whether it is the first increase notification or the second increase notification. In this way, by associating the specific control of the circulating object that is likely to remain in the impression with the remaining number that is increased in the increase process, the impression that the first increase notification and the second increase notification are the same increase notification is further strengthened. Is possible.

Feature C5. When the result of the first specific lottery (the function for executing the processing during BB addition in the main control device 101) performed in the first advantageous state is the winning result (additional winning), the first increase notification execution means The first increase notification is executed, and when the result of the first specific lottery is not the winning result, the first non-increase notification (pseudo freeze effect and special Lip A or special Lip B prize-winning event) can be executed.
In the second increase notification execution means, the result of the second specific lottery (a function for executing the pseudo-addition process during BB in the main control device 101) performed in the second advantageous state is the winning result (pseudo extra winning). The second increase notification is executed when the second specific lottery result is not the winning result, and the second non-increase notification (pseudo freeze effect and special Lip A or special Lip B prize-winning event) can be executed. Yes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the notification mode of the first non-increasing notification and the notification mode of the second non-increasing notification are not distinguishable or difficult to distinguish.

  According to the above configuration, the first increase notification is executed when the first specific lottery is won in the first advantageous state, and the second increase notification is performed when the second specific lottery is won in the second advantageous state. Not only the notification mode of the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the case of winning, but also the notification mode of the first non-increase notification and the second non-increment notification in the case of non-winning, cannot be identified or difficult to identify. It is difficult to determine whether it is in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state also from these non-increasing notifications. In this way, it is possible to more suitably exhibit the effect of making it difficult to determine both advantageous states.

  Feature C6. The notification mode of the first increase notification other than the first advantageous state by the first increase notification execution unit, and the execution mode of the second increase notification by the second increase notification execution unit in the other than the second advantageous state are: A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5, which is identifiable.

  According to the above configuration, the first increase notification and the second increase notification are performed in the advantageous state on the premise that the first increase notification and the second increase notification can be distinguished except during the advantageous state (during the specific gaming state). By performing this, it is possible to further intensify the impression that the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the advantageous state are the same increase notification.

Feature C7. The second increase notification execution means is
A game other than the second advantageous state is a game after the game on which the increase process has been performed, and a game in which a predetermined notification is in a predetermined mode determined in advance (remaining number corresponding to the remaining number counter HG for display) It is possible to execute the second increase notification in the game in which the number display is 1).
In the second advantageous state, the game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, wherein the second increase notification can be executed regardless of the mode of the predetermined notification.

  According to the above configuration, on the assumption that the second increase notification is performed in a game in which the predetermined notification is in a predetermined mode, the second increase notification is performed in the second advantageous state regardless of the predetermined notification mode. If the increase notification is executed, it gives an impression that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is not the usual second increase notification, and the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the advantageous state are the same increase notification. It is possible to strengthen an impression.

Feature C8. The first increase notification executing means can execute the first increase notification in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in the first advantageous state,
The second increase notification execution means is capable of executing the second increase notification in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the above-described configuration, the first increase notification in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification in the second advantageous state can be executed in the game with the special result regardless of any increase notification. In this way, the first increase notification and the second increase notification in the advantageous state are common as a game result, and it is possible not only to enhance the effect of making it difficult to determine both advantageous states, but also the second increase notification to draw the lottery The second increase notification during the second advantageous state is different from the other second increase notification (second increase notification executed in a game in which the predetermined notification is in a predetermined mode) through being executed at random. The impression that is the same as the first increase notification can be strengthened.

Feature C9. When the first setting value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result. High probability,
When the second setting value is set by the setting means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, which has a low probability.

  According to the above configuration, the difference between the winning probability of the first transition result without the setting difference of the winning probability and the winning probability of the second transition result having the setting difference of the winning probability varies depending on the set value, and the first set value If so, the first transition result is more likely to be won, and if it is the second set value, the second transition result is more likely to be won. That is, when the increase notification occurs during the advantageous state, the possibility that the increase notification is the first increase notification is high if it is the first set value, and if it is the second set value, the increase notification is the second The possibility of an increase notification is high. As described above, by reversing which increase notification is based on the set value, it is difficult to determine the type of increase notification and the determination of both advantageous states, but there is substantially a difference depending on the set value. As a result, a game for predicting the set value can be performed.

Feature C10. When the result of the first specific lottery (the function for executing the process during BB addition in the main control device 101) performed in the first advantageous state is the winning result (over winning) Execute the first increase notification;
In the second increase notification execution means, the result of the second specific lottery (a function for executing the pseudo-addition process during BB in the main control device 101) performed in the second advantageous state is the winning result (pseudo extra winning). Execute the second increase notification in case
The first specific lottery becomes a winning result in the case of transition to the first advantageous state in the first situation and in the case of transition to the first advantageous state in the second situation different from the first situation. The probability may be different,
The probability that the second specific lottery will be a winning result may be different between when shifting to the second advantageous state in the first situation and when shifting to the second advantageous state in the second situation And
The probability that the first specific lottery at the time of shifting to the first advantageous state in the first situation becomes a winning result and the second specific lottery at the time of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first situation The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9, characterized in that the probability of becoming a winning result is the same.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first increase notification is performed through the first specific lottery in the first advantageous state and the second increase notification is performed in the second advantageous state through the second specific lottery, the first specific lottery is performed. The winning probability of the second specific lottery may differ depending on the status of transition to the advantageous state. By doing so, the ease of occurrence of the chain between the advantageous state and the specific gaming state is different depending on the transition to the advantageous state, and the game property is remarkably improved.

  In addition, there is a common probability that the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery will be the winning results when the first situation shifts to the first advantageous state in the first situation and to the second advantageous state in the first situation. When transitioning to the advantageous state in these first situations, it is difficult to determine which advantageous state from the winning probability of the specific lottery. This makes it more difficult to determine both advantageous states, and the effect of the feature C1 can be more suitably exhibited.

  Feature C11. The probability that the first specific lottery will be a winning result in the case of shifting to the first advantageous state in the second situation, and the second specific lottery in the case of shifting to the second advantageous state in the second situation The gaming machine according to Feature C10, characterized in that the probability of being a winning result is the same.

  According to the above configuration, not only in the advantageous state shifted in the first situation but also in the advantageous state shifted in the second situation, the winning probabilities of the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are common. By doing in this way, it is assumed that the winning probability of the specific lottery varies depending on the situation of shifting to the advantageous state, and the first increase notification and the second increase notification are executed in any situation Since the probabilities are common, the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be further enhanced.

  Feature C12. The probability that the first specific lottery at the time of shifting to the first advantageous state in the second situation becomes a winning result, and the second specific lottery at the time of shifting to the second advantageous state in the second situation The gaming machine according to Feature C10, characterized in that the probability of becoming a winning result is different.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are the same in the advantageous state shifted in the first situation, but in the advantageous state shifted in the second situation, the first specific lottery The winning probability of the second specific lottery is different. In this way, it is difficult to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the first situation, and it is easy to distinguish between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in the second situation. Become. Therefore, it becomes possible to leave the room to determine the second advantageous state and predict the set value, and to improve the gameplay.

Feature C13. Situation grasping means (function to execute the game number management process by the main control device 101) grasping the situation of the specific gaming state when it is possible to shift to at least the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state;
Discrimination means (function to execute the process of step S4101 by the main control device 101) which discriminates the first situation and the second situation according to the grasp result by the situation grasping means;
A game machine according to any one of features C10 to C12, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the specific lottery in the shifted advantageous state differs depending on the progress state of the specific gaming state. In this way, it is possible to more preferably improve the amusement of the game nature created by the chain of the specific gaming state and the advantageous state.

Feature C14. In the specific gaming state, the situation grasping means is not executing the second increase notification out of the increase number based on the increase process in which the second increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means. An increase number grasping means for grasping the minute (a function for executing a process of grasping the postponing counter BG by the main control device 101);
The second increase notification executing means executes the second increase notification in the second advantageous state based on a grasp result of the increase number grasping means,
The game machine according to Feature C13, wherein the determination means determines the first situation and the second situation according to a grasp result of the increase number grasping means.

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the second increase notification during the second advantageous state is performed based on the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification, the winning probability of the specific lottery varies depending on the unexecuted portion. In this way, for example, when there are few unexecuted portions, it is possible to adjust the winning probability of the specific lottery so that the second increase notification is not easily performed, and the adjustment is made in the first advantageous state. If the present invention is applied also to the first specific lottery in, it is possible to perform the adjustment while preventing the difference between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state.

Feature C15. In the specific gaming state, the situation grasping means is not executing the second increase notification out of the increase number based on the increase process in which the second increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means. An increase number grasping means for grasping the minute (a function for executing a process of grasping the postponing counter BG by the main control device 101);
The second increase notification executing means executes the second increase notification in the second advantageous state based on a grasp result of the increase number grasping means,
The determination unit may be configured to determine the first situation and the second situation according to the number of digested games in the specific gaming state grasped by the situation grasping unit. Or the game machine as described in a feature C14.

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is performed based on the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification, the winning probability of the specific lottery according to the number of digested games in the specific game state Is different. That is, the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification can be predicted to some extent depending on the number of digested games. With such a configuration, it is necessary to grasp the unexecuted portion of the second increase notification when shifting to the advantageous state. Since the process is eliminated, the process can be simplified. Not only that, the unexecuted portion has a randomness of success or failure of a specific condition, and the player cannot grasp the unexecuted portion, whereas the player can grasp if the number of digested games, If the winning probability of the specific lottery is varied depending on such parameters that the player can grasp, the fairness of the game is ensured without causing the player to feel distrust.

Feature C16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, the first specific picture combination (stop outcome that becomes the ninth re-game prize) can be stopped at the effective position and the first specific picture It is possible to stop the second specific pattern combination (stopped appearance of the tenth game reap), which is different from the combination.
The situation grasping means is a pattern grasping means for grasping the symbol combination stopped at the effective position when the second transition result is won, which triggers the transition to the second advantageous state (b winning game for BB winning game by main control device 101 (Function to execute result correspondence processing)
The determination unit according to any one of the features C13 to C15, wherein the determination unit is capable of determining the first situation and the second situation according to a grasping result of the picture grasping unit. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second specific lottery, that is, the execution rate of the second increase notification changes depending on the pattern combination stopped in the second transition result winning game that becomes a trigger for the transition to the second advantageous state. If the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is a mere effect and does not affect the actual remaining number of the specific gaming state, the second increase notification is executed to generate the effect. It is considered that the needs of players who conflict with the players who want to enjoy and the players who do not want to execute the second increase notification are generated. In that respect, if it is possible to select the presence or absence of the effect by the combination of symbols at the time of winning, as in the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which meets the various needs of the above-mentioned player.

  Feature C17. When the first specific lottery is not won in the first advantageous state, the second increase notification executing means sends an increase notification corresponding to the non-winning state after the end of the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C10 to C16, which is executable as an increase notification.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second specific lottery is adjusted in accordance with the status of the second advantageous state, and the winning probability of the first specific lottery is also adjusted accordingly. It is possible to avoid such an event that notification for the non-winning event is not performed to match the second specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to easily match the winning probability on the first specific lottery side with the second specific lottery side.

Feature C18. The specific condition is set not to be satisfied in the second advantageous state;
The second increase notification in the second advantageous state by the second increase notification execution means is a notification corresponding to the increase process executed in the game before the transition to the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17.

  Since the second advantageous state has a different transition rate depending on the set value, by setting it as the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the superiority or inferiority of the advantage of the game characteristic in the specific gaming state by the set value. The fairness of the game in sex is secured. In addition, since the second increase notification in the second advantageous state is the same as the first increase notification in the first advantageous state and the notification mode, whether the increase processing is performed also in the second advantageous state It is possible to give an impression like the above, and while maintaining the fairness in the specific gaming state as described above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the gameplay thereby.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Each of the laps is performed so that a normal game operation is performed to start the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated and to stop the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The winning result by the lottery means is the first transition result (for example, special lip A duplication 1), and the symbol combination ("red 7" symbol alignment) corresponding to the first transition result is stopped at the effective position. On the basis of the first advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to the first advantageous state (restriction non-targeted bonus) advantageous to the player (performs processing to shift to the restricted target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101 Function)
The lottery result by the lottery means is a second transition result (for example, special AB duplicate 1) different from the first transition result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Based on the second advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to a second advantageous state (restriction target bonus) advantageous to the player (processing for transitioning to restricted non-relevant bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
A gaming machine comprising
The first transition result is a result including at least a first specific result (special Lip A),
The second transition result is a result including at least the first specific result and a second specific result (Japanese Lip B) different from the first specific result,
Specific notification execution means capable of executing specific notification (additional notification effect, pseudo addition notification effect) in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state (processing for addition during BB by the main control device 101, for pseudo addition during BB Processing function), and
When the first specific symbol combination corresponding to the first identification result is stopped at the effective position, the second identification corresponding to the second identification result is permitted while the identification notification execution means is allowed to execute the identification notification. Restricting means capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification executing means (function of executing the winning result corresponding process for the BB winning game by the main control device 101) when the symbol combination of
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first specific result included in both the transition results is premised on the configuration that the specific notification can be executed in the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state in which the transition is made according to the first transition result or the second transition result. When the first specific pattern combination corresponding to is stopped, the specific notification is executed in any advantageous state, and when the second specific pattern combination corresponding to the second specific result included only in the second transition result is stopped, it is specified. The execution of the notification is limited. As described above, since the execution of the specific notification in the second advantageous state can be restricted by the stopping time at the time of winning the second transition result, it is determined whether the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state by the presence or absence of the specific notification. It is possible to switch whether or not this is possible depending on the stopping outcome. In this way, whether or not the advantageous state can be determined is determined by the player's own stop operation, and in a configuration in which a plurality of advantageous states are provided, it is a pleasure to determine the type of the advantageous state. In addition, it is possible to enjoy the joy of not being discriminated.

Feature D2. The specific notification execution means can perform specific control (freeze effect) for limiting the progress of a predetermined game operation when executing the specific notification.
When the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means, the execution of the specific control is also restricted.

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification is a notification accompanied by the specific control in which the progress of the predetermined game operation is limited, and the player recognizes the specific notification through the restriction of the game operation as in the so-called freeze effect. While becoming easy, the attention degree of the said specific alerting | reporting is raised. On the other hand, even with such specific control with a high effect, it is considered that it can be troublesome for a player who wants to prioritize smooth game progression. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the specific notification by stopping the stop and not performing the specific control at the time of the restriction, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to prioritize the game progress.

  Feature D3. The feature D1 or the feature D2 is characterized in that it is set so that the advantage for the player does not change between the case where the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means and the case where it is not. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, the advantage does not change due to the difference in presence / absence of specific notification. Therefore, for example, as in the effect of the feature D2, selection of a player who wants to prioritize game progress (selecting specific notification restriction) Can be performed more purely regardless of the degree of advantage.

  Feature D4. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the stop operation means is operated in a specific manner that can stop the second specific pattern combination, the drive control means While each of the two specific pattern combinations can be stopped, when it is operated in a mode different from the specific mode, each of the orbiting members is controlled to stop the first specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode at the time of winning the second transition result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the execution of the specific notification is restricted, while in the specific mode If it is not operated, the first specific symbol combination is stopped instead of the second specific symbol combination and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted. In this way, by making the presence / absence of execution of the specific notification different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to leave the execution of the specific notification to the player's selection and grasp the selection on the gaming machine side. It becomes.

  Feature D5. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the stop operation means is operated in a specific manner that can stop the second specific pattern combination, the drive control means While the two specific picture combinations can be stopped, each of the circulating bodies is controlled so that the first specific picture combination stops when the specific pattern combination is not operated. The gaming machine according to any one of D4.

  According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode at the time of winning the second transition result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the execution of the specific notification is restricted, while in the specific mode If it is not operated, the first specific symbol combination is stopped instead of the second specific symbol combination and the execution of the specific notification is not restricted. In this way, by making the presence / absence of execution of the specific notification different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to leave the execution of the specific notification to the player's selection and grasp the selection on the gaming machine side. In addition, since either one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination is stopped, even if the specific mode for restricting the specific notification fails, no oversight occurs, You can make that choice with confidence.

  Feature D6. The number of arrangement of the pattern corresponding to the second specific pattern combination is smaller than the number of arrangement of the pattern corresponding to the first specific pattern combination in the specific circulation body (left reel 32L) among the respective circulation bodies A gaming machine according to Feature D4 or Feature D5, characterized by

  According to the above configuration, when trying to stop the second specific pattern combination instead of the first specific pattern combination, the specific circling body stops aiming at the second side pattern having a smaller number than the first side. It is necessary to operate (operate in a specific manner). That is, stopping the second specific pattern combination in the specific mode is a more difficult operation than stopping the first specific pattern combination. In this way, basically, the specific notification is executed to give priority to the rendering effect, and the execution of the specific notification is limited only when the daunting operation is performed, and the effect such as the specific notification prepared carefully is It is possible to avoid such an event that it is not easily executed, and it can also be expected to stimulate the improvement of the player's operation skill.

  Feature D7. The first design corresponding to the first specific design combination and the second design corresponding to the second specific design combination are predetermined on the upstream side of the second design with respect to the second design. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, wherein the first design is located and the other first design is located on the downstream side of the second design with respect to the second design.

  According to the above configuration, the first symbol is stopped if the timing of the stop operation on the specific circulating member is the timing until the predetermined first symbol on the upstream side reaches the effective position. Then, after the predetermined first pattern passes through the effective position, the second pattern stops at a timing until the second pattern reaches the effective position, and the second pattern passes through the effective position. If it is after, the other first picture on the downstream side stops at the effective position. That is, if the second pattern is to be stopped, the timing is limited to the time from when the predetermined first pattern passes the effective position until the second pattern reaches the effective position. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to set the priority order of drawing in the first design and the second design while stopping both the first design and the second design.

Feature D8. As the lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and the corresponding award is given by the privilege giving means, and the stop operation means is When it is operated at the second timing different from the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination is not stopped and the corresponding benefit is not given by the benefit giving means (operation response result (such as strong watermelon etc) ) Is provided,
A feature D4 to D7 is characterized in that the second specific pattern combination is arranged on each of the revolving members so as to be impossible to stop when operated at the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation is mainly performed at the first timing in the normal time so that the privilege at the time of winning the operation response result can be enjoyed without omission. The second specific symbol combination does not stop when the stop operation is performed at the first timing. That is, if the specific notification is to be restricted, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing different from the normal time, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event that the specific notification is unintentionally restricted.

Feature D9. In the case where the second transition result is won, the storage means (the freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101 can be stored) capable of storing stop information indicating that the second specific picture combination corresponding to the second specific result has been stopped. Function to execute the process to set
The restriction means is configured to restrict execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means based on the stop information,
The storage means is capable of holding the stop information even after the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning that triggered the storage of the stop information is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, since the stop information for stopping the second specific pattern combination is retained even after the second advantageous state, the second specific pattern combination is not stopped at the time of winning the next second transition result. However, execution of the specific notification during the second advantageous state is limited. In this way, operability can be improved without forcing the second specific pattern combination to be stopped each time.

Feature D10. In the case where the second transition result is won, the storage means (the freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101 can be stored) capable of storing stop information indicating that the second specific picture combination corresponding to the second specific result has been stopped. Function to execute the process to set
The restriction means is configured to restrict execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means based on the stop information,
Erasing means capable of erasing the stop information stored by the storage means before shifting to the second advantageous state based on a specific operation by the player (winning result for BB winning game by main control device 101 The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, which has a function of executing a corresponding process.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the situation where the specific notification is unintentionally limited when the second specific pattern combination is stopped by chance.

  Feature D11. The game machine according to Feature D10, wherein the operation for stopping the second specific pattern combination has a higher operation difficulty than the specific operation.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to suppress an event that a player who has unintentionally stopped the second specific pattern combination cannot easily cancel the restriction of the specific notification.

  In addition, as a concrete structure of the said structure, it is as follows, for example.

“When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the second specific picture combination can be stopped, the drive control means While the second specific pattern combination can be stopped, when operated at a timing different from the specific timing, each orienting body is controlled such that the first specific pattern combination stops,
The specific operation is to operate each of the stop operation means in a specific order.

  Feature D12. The erasing means, when the specific operation is performed before the transition to the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning for the second specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information, The gaming machine according to Feature D10 or Feature D11, wherein the stop information can be deleted before the second advantageous state transition.

  According to the above configuration, if the second specific pattern combination happens to be stopped, the specific operation is performed before the second advantageous state transition based on the second transition result winning that stopped the second specific pattern combination. If it carries out, it will become possible to perform specific alerting | reporting in the said 2nd advantageous state. As a result, the number of scenes where the specific notification is unintentionally restricted is reduced, and it is possible to appropriately expect the effect of the specific notification.

  Feature D13. The erasing means is after the second advantageous state based on the second transition result winning for the second specific pattern combination which has triggered the storage of the stop information is ended, the second transition result The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D12, wherein the stop information can be erased based on the fact that the specific operation has been performed when winning.

  According to the above configuration, when the player changes his mind after the second specific symbol combination is stopped and the specific notification is restricted, the specific notification is issued in the second and subsequent advantageous conditions. It is possible to execute In this case, after the second advantageous state in which the specific notification is restricted, the specific operation cannot be accepted at a free timing, and the second transition result can be accepted as a trigger. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that a specific operation is unintentionally performed.

Feature D14. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Each of the laps is performed so that a normal game operation is performed to start the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated and to stop the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
Based on the winning result by the lottery means being a transition result (for example, strong cherry overlap 1) and the transition pattern combination ("red 7" symbol alignment) corresponding to the transition result being stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means (a function to execute processing to shift to a restricted target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) to shift the gaming state to an advantageous state (restricted non-targeted bonus) advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, an overlapping result including the transition result and a predetermined specific result (strong cherry) is set,
And a specific notification execution unit capable of executing specific notification (superimposed notification effect and pseudo added notification effect) in the advantageous state (a function for executing addition processing in BB by the main control device 101 and processing for pseudo addition in BB);
Based on one of the fact that the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped or the specific symbol combination is not stopped when the overlapping result is won, the specific notification execution means Restricting means capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification (function of executing a winning result corresponding process for the BB winning game by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific notification can be executed in the advantageous state in which the transition is made when the transition pattern combination is stopped in the transition result winning, the specific notification in the advantageous state by the stop result at the time of winning the duplicate result Execution may be limited. More specifically, the duplicate result is a result including a transition result and a specific result, and when a specific picture combination corresponding to the specific result stops or a specific picture combination does not stop, a specific notification is issued. Is limited. In other words, in the former, the specific notification is restricted based on the specific result winning, and in the latter, the specific result is missed, or the transition result winning game is shifted to an advantageous state (the combination of patterns for transition is stopped). Specific notification is limited based on that. In this way, by making the effect in the advantageous state different depending on the stopping result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game of detecting the transition result winning (the advantageous state winning), The game property of determining the effect contents in the state by the stop operation is added, and it is possible to significantly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D15. The degree of advantage for the player is the same when the execution of the specific notification is restricted and when the execution of the specific notification is not restricted.
The drive control means is the specific result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the specific picture combination can be stopped. While it becomes possible to stop, when it is operated at a timing different from the specific timing, it is impossible to stop the specific pattern combination,
The restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means based on the fact that the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped when the overlapping result is won. A gaming machine according to Feature D14, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the advantage is common regardless of whether or not there is a restriction of specific notification, if a specific result that may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation can be awarded The execution of the specific notification is limited. It is considered that a player who is more skilled in playing a game does not prefer a mere effect that does not change the degree of advantage relatively, but the above configuration is skilled in playing a player who can perform a stop operation so as not to cause a dropout. It is a structure which specifies as an existing player and does not perform specific alerting | reporting as a mere effect. By doing this, it is possible to set the effects according to the needs of various players.

  Note that the configuration indicated by the features D1 to D13 may be applied individually to the feature D14 or the feature D15, or the configuration indicated by the features D1 to D13 may be applied in combination.

Feature D16. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Each of the laps is performed so that a normal game operation is performed to start the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated and to stop the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The winning result by the lottery means is the transition result (for example, the special Lip A overlap 1), and the pattern combination for transition (“Red 7” symbol set) corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. On the basis of advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) for the player (function to execute a process of shifting to the restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
And a specific notification execution unit capable of executing specific notification (superimposed notification effect and pseudo added notification effect) in the advantageous state (a function for executing addition processing in BB by the main control device 101 and processing for pseudo addition in BB);
Limiting means that can restrict execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means based on a stoppage when the transition result is won (function to execute a winning result winning process for a BB winning game by the main control device 101) )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific notification can be executed in the advantageous state in which the transition result is won when the transition result is won and the transition is stopped, the specific notification in the advantageous state is made by the stop result at the time of the transition result winning. Execution of can be limited. In this way, by making the effect in the advantageous state different depending on the stopping result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game of detecting the transition result winning (the advantageous state winning), The game property of determining the effect contents in the state by the stop operation is added, and it is possible to significantly improve the interest in the winning game.

  The configurations shown in the features D1 to D15 may be individually applied to the feature D16, or the configurations shown in the features D1 to D15 may be combined and applied.

Feature D17. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Each of the laps is performed so that a normal game operation is performed to start the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated and to stop the lap of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Drive control means for controlling the body (function to execute reel control processing by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The winning result by the lottery means is the transition result (for example, the special Lip A overlap 1), and the pattern combination for transition (“Red 7” symbol set) corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. On the basis of advantageous transition means for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) for the player (function to execute a process of shifting to the restricted bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
In the winning game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result winning, when the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, the first specific control (control not to execute the pseudo additional notification effect in the advantageous state) A first specific control execution unit (function of executing processing when the freeze control flag is set by the main control device 101) which can execute
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first specific control is performed as the control in the advantageous state by the stop result in the winning game in the transition result, assuming that the transition result is won and the transition picture combination is stopped. It will be done. In this way, if the control in the advantageous state can be different depending on the stopping result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game of detecting the transition result winning (advantageous state winning), it is advantageous The game property of determining the control content (statement content) in the state by the stop operation is added, and it becomes possible to significantly improve the interest in the winning game.

  Feature D18. In the winning game, a second specific control (different from the first specific control in the advantageous state) based on the fact that the second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. A feature D17 is characterized by including second specific control execution means (a function for executing a process for pseudo added notification effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing control to execute the pseudo added notification effect. The gaming machine described.

  According to the above configuration, assuming that the transition result is won and the pattern combination for the transition is stopped, the transition to the advantageous state is assumed, and the control in the advantageous state by the stop result in the transition result winning game is the first specific control. The second specific control will be different. In this way, if the control in the advantageous state is made different depending on the stop result in the transition result winning game, in addition to the playability in the winning game of detecting the transition result winning (advantageous state winning), it is advantageous The game property of determining the control content (statement content) in the state by the stop operation is added, and it becomes possible to significantly improve the interest in the winning game.

Feature D19. The system further includes a specific notification execution unit (function to execute the first processing for pseudo presentation by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific notification (pseudo freeze effect) by a predetermined notification unit in the advantageous state.
The first specific control execution means limits the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means as the first specific control,
The gaming machine according to the feature D18, wherein the second specific control execution unit allows the specific notification execution unit to execute the specific notification as the second specific control.

  According to the above configuration, the execution of the specific notification during the advantageous state is permitted or restricted depending on the stopping result in the winning game of the transition result. By doing this, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the execution of the specific notification by the player's own stop operation. More specifically, in the winning game, the player who does not want to see the specific notification stops the first specific symbol combination, and the player who wants to see the specific notification stops the second specific symbol combination, etc. There is room for the player to intervene regarding the content of the notification in the advantageous state in the game, and the gameability of the winning game can be improved.

Feature D20. When the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means, a special control (freeze effect) for restricting the progress of a predetermined game operation can be executed.
When the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the first specific control execution unit, the execution of the special control is also restricted.

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification is a notification with special control in which the progress of the predetermined game operation is limited, and the player recognizes the specific notification through the restriction of the game operation as in the so-called freeze effect. While becoming easy, the attention degree of the said specific alerting | reporting is raised. On the other hand, even such special control with a high production effect may be troublesome for a player who wants to prioritize smooth game progression. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to give priority to the game progress by restricting the execution of the specific notification by stopping the stop and not performing special control at the time of restriction.

  Feature D21. There is a change in the advantage for the player between the case where the first specific control is executed by the first specific control execution means and the case where the second specific control is executed by the second specific control execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D18 to D20, which is set so as not to occur.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to expect a rendering effect by making the control in the advantageous state different depending on the number of stops in the winning game, as long as the advantage is not changed.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the progress of a predetermined game operation can be limited as in the feature D20, the selection of the player who wants to prioritize the game progress (selecting the restriction of specific notification) is more purely irrespective of the degree of advantage. It can be done.

  Feature D22. The drive control means is capable of stopping the first specific pattern combination when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped in the winning game. On the other hand, when operated in a mode different from the specific mode, each of the orbiting members is controlled to stop the second specific pattern combination, according to any one of the features D18 to D21. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the specific mode in the transition result winning game, the first specific symbol combination is stopped and the first specific control is executed, while the operation in the specific mode is performed. Otherwise, the second specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the first specific pattern combination, and the second specific control is executed. Thus, by making the control in the advantageous state different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to grasp the specific control selected by the player himself as the operation mode on the gaming machine side.

  Feature D23. The drive control means is capable of stopping the first specific pattern combination when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in which the first specific pattern combination can be stopped in the winning game. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D22, wherein each of the circuit bodies is controlled so that the second specific picture combination stops when the specific mode is not operated. .

  According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific mode in the transition result winning game, the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the first specific control is executed, while the operation is performed in the specific mode. Otherwise, the second specific pattern combination is stopped instead of the first specific pattern combination, and the second specific control is executed. As described above, by making the control in the advantageous state different depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, it is possible to grasp the specific control selected by the player itself as the operation mode on the gaming machine side.

  In particular, in the above configuration, either one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination is stopped, so even if the specific mode is attempted to execute the first specific control, it is dropped. This can be done without worry.

  Feature D24. In the specific circuit body (left reel 32L) among the circuit bodies, the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the first specific pattern combination is smaller than the number of patterns arranged corresponding to the second specific picture combination. The gaming machine according to Feature D22 or Feature D23, wherein

  According to the above configuration, when trying to stop the first specific pattern combination instead of the second specific pattern combination, the specific circuit body stops aiming at the first side pattern having a smaller number than the second side. It is necessary to operate (operate in a specific manner). That is, stopping the first specific pattern combination in the specific mode is a more difficult operation than stopping the second specific pattern combination. In this way, basically, the second specific control is executed, and the first specific control is executed only when the difficult operation is performed. In this way, for example, in the configuration in which the predetermined effect is performed in the second specific control, it is possible to avoid an event that the prepared effect is not easily executed, and the effect of raking the player's improvement in operation technology Can also be expected.

  Feature D25. The first design corresponding to the first specific design combination and the second design corresponding to the second specific design combination are predetermined on the upstream side of the first design with respect to the first design. The gaming machine according to Feature D24, wherein the second design is located and the other second design is located on the downstream side of the first design with respect to the first design.

  According to the above configuration, if the timing of the stop operation on the specific circulating member is the timing until the predetermined second pattern on the upstream side reaches the effective position, the second pattern stops. And after the said predetermined 2nd pattern passes an effective position, if it is the timing until the 1st image reaches an effective position, the 1st pattern stops and the 1st image concerned passes an effective position If it is after, the other second picture on the downstream side stops at the effective position. In other words, if the first pattern is to be stopped, the timing is limited to the timing from when the predetermined second pattern passes the effective position until the first pattern reaches the effective position. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to set the priority order of drawing in the first design and the second design while stopping both the first design and the second design.

Feature D26. As the lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and the corresponding award is given by the privilege giving means, and the stop operation means is When it is operated at the second timing different from the first timing, the corresponding pattern combination is not stopped and the corresponding benefit is not given by the benefit giving means (operation response result (such as strong watermelon etc) ) Is provided,
Features D22 to D25 are characterized in that the first specific pattern combination is arranged on each of the revolving members so as to be impossible to stop when operated at the first timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the stop operation is mainly performed at the first timing in the normal time so that the privilege at the time of winning the operation response result can be enjoyed without omission. The first specific symbol combination does not stop when the stop operation is performed at the first timing. That is, if the first specific control is to be executed, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at a timing different from the normal time, and an event that the first specific control is executed unintentionally can be made difficult to occur.

Feature D27. In the winning game, storage means (function of executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101) capable of storing stop information indicating that the first specific picture combination has been stopped,
The first specific control execution means is configured to be able to execute the first specific control based on the stop information,
Any one of the features D17 to D26, wherein the storage unit is capable of holding the stop information even after the advantageous state based on the transition result winning that is the trigger for storing the stop information is ended. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, since the stop information for stopping the first specific pattern combination is retained even after the advantageous state, it is advantageous even if the first specific pattern combination is not stopped when the next transition result is won. During the state, the first specific control is executed. In this way, operability can be improved without forcing the first specific symbol combination to be stopped each time.

Feature D28. In the winning game, storage means (function of executing a process of setting a freeze restriction flag by the main control device 101) capable of storing stop information indicating that the first specific picture combination has been stopped,
The first specific control execution means is configured to be able to execute the first specific control based on the stop information,
Erasing means capable of erasing the stop information stored by the storage means before transition to the advantageous state based on a specific operation by the player The gaming machine according to any one of features D17 to D27, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to eliminate the unintentional execution of the first specific control when the first specific pattern combination is stopped by accident.

  Feature D29. The gaming machine according to Feature D28, wherein the operation for stopping the first specific pattern combination has a higher operation difficulty than the specific operation.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is difficult for the player who has unintentionally stopped the first specific symbol combination to execute the second specific control instead of the first specific control. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a concrete structure of the said structure, it is as follows, for example.

“If the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the stop operation means is operated at a specific timing at which the first specific picture combination can be stopped, the drive control means While the specific pattern combination can be stopped, when operated at a timing different from the specific timing, each orienting body is controlled so that the second specific pattern combination is stopped,
The specific operation is to operate each of the stop operation means in a specific order.

  Feature D30. If the specific operation is performed before the transition to the advantageous state based on the transition result winning for the first specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information, the erasing means is shifted to the advantageous state. It is possible to erase | eliminate the said stop information previously, The game machine as described in the feature D28 or the feature D29 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above configuration, when the first specific pattern combination happens to be stopped, if the specific operation is performed before the transition to the advantageous state based on the transition result winning that stopped the first specific pattern combination, In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute not the first specific control but the second specific control. Thereby, the scene where the 1st specific control is performed unintentionally decreases.

  Feature D31. The erasing means is after the advantageous state based on the transition result winning for the first specific pattern combination that triggered the storage of the stop information is over, and when the transition result is won The gaming machine according to any one of the features D28 to D30, wherein the stop information can be deleted based on the fact that a specific operation has been performed.

  According to the above configuration, the second specific control is performed in the next and subsequent advantageous states when the player changes his mind after the first specific symbol combination is stopped and the first specific control is completed. It is possible to execute In this case, the specific operation can not be received at an arbitrary timing after digesting the advantageous state in which the first specific control is executed, but can be received when the transition result is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that an operation is performed unintentionally.

Feature D32. As the transition result, a first transition result (for example, special Lip A overlap 1) and a second transition result (for example, special Lip AB overlap 1) are set,
The advantageous transition means is:
Based on the fact that the winning result by the lottery means is the first transition result and the picture combination corresponding to the first transition result (“Red 7” symbol set) is stopped at the valid position, the gaming state is played. First advantageous transition means for shifting to a first advantageous state (restricted non-target bonus) advantageous to the user (function of executing a process for shifting to a restricted non-target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second transition result, and the game state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the pattern combination corresponding to the second transition result is stopped at the effective position. Second advantageous transition means for shifting to the advantageous state (restriction target bonus) (function for executing a process for shifting to the restriction target bonus in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101);
With
The first transition result is a result including at least a first specific result (special Lip A),
The second transition result is a result including at least the first specific result and a second specific result (Japanese Lip B) different from the first specific result,
The privilege granting unit grants a privilege corresponding to the first identification result based on the fact that the second specific pattern combination has stopped at the effective position, and the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D18 to D31, wherein a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact.

  According to the above configuration, the second specification corresponding to the first identification result included in both the transition results on the premise that the first transition result or the second transition result is shifted to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state. When the picture combination is stopped, the second specific control is executed in any advantageous state, and when the first specific picture combination corresponding to the second specific result included only in the second transition result is stopped, the first specific control is performed. To be executed. As described above, since the control during the second advantageous state differs depending on the stopping outcome at the time of winning the second transition result, it is possible to switch whether the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state can be determined depending on the stopping outcome. It becomes. In this way, whether or not the advantageous state can be determined is determined by the player's own stop operation, and in a configuration in which a plurality of advantageous states are provided, it is a pleasure to determine the type of the advantageous state. In addition, it is possible to enjoy the joy of not being discriminated.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. As the gaming state, a low advantage state (normal section) and a high advantage state (advantage section) in which the player's level of advantage is relatively high and low are set.
Low-advantageous transition means for shifting the high-advantaged state to the low-advantaged state based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second section display process by the main control device 101) Function to execute the end process of the advantageous section based on
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number in the high advantageous state (the number of advantageous area remaining games ZG);
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a function for executing a game number adding process by the main control device 101);
When the increase process is performed by the increase unit, a first increase notification execution that can execute an increase notification (addition notification) that the increase process has been performed by a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65). Means (a function of performing processing for executing an additional notification effect by the main control device 101);
Second increase notification execution means (a function for performing processing for executing the advance notification effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing increase notification by a predetermined notification means in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied; ,
Limiting means for restricting execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification executing means when the specific condition is satisfied after the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means (step by the main controller 101) A function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5105),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state where the player's advantage is relatively high, and the high-advantage state increases the remaining number of high-advantage states when a specific condition is satisfied. Since it has a so-called addition function and an increase notification corresponding to an increase in the remaining number is performed, a sense of expectation for the establishment of the specific condition is enhanced. Moreover, in the above configuration, an increase notification may be performed even if the specific condition is not satisfied, and even if the specific condition is not satisfied or the specific condition is difficult to be satisfied, the highly advantageous state The degree of attention has been raised. In addition, when the specific condition is not satisfied and the increase notification is performed, the increase notification when the specific condition is satisfied may be limited. That is, the above configuration can be said to be a configuration in which the increase notification is executed prior to the increase processing, and then the increase notification executed earlier is compensated in the subsequent increase processing. In this way, it is possible to generate an increase notification at free timing while suppressing the difference from the actual remaining number from becoming too large.

  The above “low advantage transition means” may be expressed as follows.

  "Low advantageous transition means for shifting to the low advantageous state when the high advantageous state is completed" or "Based on the remaining number grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state, the high advantageous state is "Low-advantageous transition means for shifting to a low-advantageous state".

Feature E2. An increase amount grasping means (function of executing a process of grasping the advance counter MG by the main control device 101) for grasping an increase in the remaining number corresponding to the increase notice executed by the second increase notice executing means;
The restriction means restricts execution of an increase notification corresponding to the increase process executed based on the specific condition being satisfied by an increase grasped by the increase grasping means. Of gaming machines.

  According to the above configuration, the execution of the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing performed thereafter is limited by the increase of the remaining number in the increase notification performed when the specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, just because the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, all the increase notifications corresponding to the subsequent increase processing are not limited, and the effect of the increase notification performed when the specific condition is actually satisfied is achieved. While expecting, it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention such as the situation where the specific condition is not easily established.

Feature E3. As the specific condition, at least a first specific condition (addition based on a so-called rare role such as a strong watermelon) and a second specific condition (addition based on a so-called normal role such as a push order bell) are set,
After the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution unit, the limiting means includes the specific condition when the first specific condition is satisfied and the second specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or the feature E2 characterized in that the restriction rate of the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means is different.

  According to the above configuration, after the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, the increase notification is executed by the first increase notification executing unit when the first specific condition is satisfied and when the second specific condition is satisfied. Whether or not is restricted (easy to be restricted) is different. For example, if the first specific condition is more likely to be restricted, the increase notification is difficult to be performed when the first specific condition is satisfied after the increase notification is performed when the specific condition is not satisfied, and the second specific condition is satisfied The increase notification is easier to execute. As described above, if the degree to which the increase notification is limited is different depending on the type of the specific condition, it is less likely that it is limited than in the case of the uniform restriction. As a result, it is difficult to determine that the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is executed when the specific condition is not satisfied, and it is possible to suitably expect the effect effect of the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means. Become.

Feature E4. The first specific condition is less likely to be established than the second specific condition,
The restriction means, after the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification execution means, then, as the specific condition, the case where the first specific condition is satisfied is more than the case where the second specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine according to the feature E3, characterized in that the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means is easily restricted.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific condition that is easily established is satisfied after the increase notification by the second increase notification execution unit, the execution of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution unit is limited. It is considered that the more specific conditions that are less likely to be met, the greater the degree of increase in the remaining number at the time of satisfaction, and if so, the more specific conditions (first particular conditions) that are less likely to be met, the greater interest in the subsequent increase notification It is thought that it can be received. In other words, if the execution of the increase notification when specific conditions that are difficult to establish are limited, the player who expects the increase notification will be greatly discouraged, and the execution probability of the increase notification when the restriction is not performed. It can give a sense of incongruity in relation to. Therefore, as in the configuration described above, it is difficult to be restricted when a specific condition that is difficult to hold is satisfied, and the increase notification of the increase process based on the specific condition on the side that is easy to be realized is easily restricted. However, it is possible to make up for the previously increased information while making it difficult to realize that the limit is limited.

Feature E5. The second increase notification execution means satisfies the specific condition based on the fact that one of special conditions among a plurality of predetermined special conditions (advance notification effect of various types of games) is satisfied. Increase notifications in situations where there is no
The limiting rate of the increase notification by the first increase notification executing unit in the limiting unit is the same regardless of the type of the special condition that triggered the increase notification by the second increase notification executing unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

  According to the above configuration, the type of trigger for the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means does not affect the restriction rate of the increase notification by the subsequent first increase notification execution means. This not only simplifies the processing configuration for limiting the increase notification, but also increases the impression that the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is based on the establishment of a specific condition. Can do. In other words, if the subsequent limit rate is changed depending on the execution trigger of the previous increase notification, the limit rate affects the increase notification execution rate by the second increase notification execution means and the increase number notified by the increase notification. Therefore, the increase notification parameter when the specific condition is satisfied may be greatly different. In that respect, like the above configuration, the second increase notification execution means is configured to execute the increase notification without considering the subsequent restriction rate, so that it is closer to the parameter of the increase notification by the first increase notification execution means or An increase notification can be performed with the same parameter, and it can be made more difficult to realize that the specific condition is not satisfied.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein a limiting rate of the increase notification by the limiting means is different according to the remaining number grasped by the grasping means.

  In order to reduce the difference between the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means and the actual remaining number, it is preferable to compensate the increase notification earlier earlier. On the other hand, if the remaining number is large, there is a high possibility that the specific condition will be satisfied after that, and the chance of compensating for the increase notification is likely to occur. In addition, if the remaining number is small, the possibility that the specific condition will be established thereafter is low, and the above-mentioned chance to compensate is unlikely to occur. Under such an assumption, if the restriction rate is made different depending on the remaining number as in the above-mentioned configuration, for example, although the number of remaining portions is increased so as to compensate earlier, it is forcibly increased. It becomes difficult to become a structure which restrict | limits alerting | reporting, etc., and it becomes possible to compensate the part | minute of an increase alerting | reporting above while making it not give discomfort.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein the increase notification is more likely to be limited by the limitation unit as the remaining number grasped by the grasping unit is smaller.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature E6, in a situation where the remaining number is small, the increase is positively compensated for, and the difference in the number of notifications when the highly advantageous state ends is reduced. Is possible.

Feature E8. A display corresponding to the remaining number in the highly advantageous state, the remaining number display reflecting the increase in the increase notification by the first increase notification execution unit and the second increase notification execution unit is performed by a predetermined notification unit Executable remaining number display execution means (function for executing processing relating to display remaining number counter HG by main controller 101);
The difference which can perform the notification regarding the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means based on the fact that the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display executing means becomes a predetermined number (1) determined in advance. Notification executing means (function of executing post-notification processing by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, comprising:

  The remaining number display by the remaining number display execution means is not only the increase notification for the increase processing actually performed by the first increase notification execution means, but also the increase by the second increase notification execution means performed without the increase processing. Since the increase in notification is reflected, it is difficult to distinguish between the increase notification by the second increase notification execution unit and the increase notification by the first increase notification execution unit from the remaining number display. However, the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means is a display that may differ from the remaining number grasped by the actual grasping means, since the increase process is not actually performed. Therefore, in the above configuration, when the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, a notification regarding the difference can be performed. Therefore, the high advantageous state can be terminated after eliminating the difference. . Therefore, it is possible not to give a sense of discomfort such as ending in spite of the remaining number display being displayed.

Feature E9. When the increase process is performed by the increase means, an increase notification (addition notification) indicating that the increase process has been performed is given to a predetermined notification means in a game after the game for which the increase process has been performed. (Third auxiliary notification execution means that can be executed by (auxiliary display unit 65) (function to perform processing for executing post-informing notification effect by main controller 101),
The remaining number display execution means can reflect the increase in the increase notification by the third increase notification execution means,
The game machine according to Feature E8, wherein the difference notification execution means is capable of executing an increase notification by the third increase notification execution means as a notification regarding a difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means. .

  According to the said structure, when the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number, as the notification regarding the difference from the remaining number grasped by the grasping means, the notification for the increase notification by the second increase notification executing means is not compensated Not only the notification of the non-execution of the increase notification by the third increase notification execution means may be performed. That is, not only notification that the remaining number display is larger than the actual remaining number (for example, notification that subtracts the remaining number display) as notification regarding the above difference, it is assumed that the remaining number display is smaller than the actual remaining number. Notification (for example, notification for increasing the remaining number display) may also be performed. Therefore, the notification of the difference can be a happy notification as well as an unfortunate notification for the player, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the difference notification.

  Feature E10. A special bonus giving means capable of giving a special bonus to the player, when the difference notification execution means carries out a notification regarding the difference concerning the increase notification performed by the second increase notification execution means The gaming machine according to feature E9, further comprising a function of executing a process of setting a special effect command by the main control device 101).

  A notification for correction that reduces the actual number of remaining items is undesirable for the player, but in the above configuration, the notification for correction on the second increase notification execution means side, that is, the actual notification for correction If a notification is made to reduce the remaining number of, a special benefit is given. Therefore, it is possible to follow the feeling of regret when subtracted.

  Feature E11. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E8 to E10, wherein the predetermined number is a number corresponding to an increase in the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means.

  According to the above configuration, even if the increase notification of the increase notification is not completely compensated for, it is possible to end the high advantage state after correcting the remaining number display by the notification regarding the difference. Moreover, by doing as described above, the player is warned that a notification for correction (a notification about a difference) is given when the remaining number display is made corresponding to the increase number of the increase notification performed earlier. It is possible to reduce the sense of regret than suddenly when a notice for correction is made.

Feature E12. The difference notification execution means is
The remaining number displayed by the remaining number display execution means when the first predetermined number corresponding to the increase of the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means becomes the remaining number grasped by the grasping means; Can be executed by the grasping means when the remaining number display displayed by the remaining number display executing means becomes a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number. Notification regarding the difference from the remaining number can be executed,
In the second predetermined number, when a notification regarding the difference regarding the increase notification executed by the second increase notification executing unit is executed, a special privilege granting unit that can give a special privilege to the player ( A game machine according to any one of features E8 to E11, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of setting a special effect command by the main control device 101.

  According to the above configuration, if the increase in the increase notification is not completely compensated, notification for the correction (notification on the difference) is given by the first predetermined number, and if only a small amount is compensated, the first The notification for the correction is made in a predetermined number. By doing this, it is possible to more preferably avoid the occurrence of an event in which the high advantage state ends while the difference is present regarding the indication of the remaining number.

  Moreover, although the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number is not preferable to the player for the correction notification that the actual remaining number decreases, in the above configuration, 2) When a notification for correction is made in a predetermined number, a special benefit is given. Therefore, when the notification for the correction is not made in the first predetermined number, it is desired that the notification for the correction is made in the second predetermined number, and the increase notification by the second increase notification execution means New playability is created using the notification for correction caused by.

Feature E13. A restriction state (restriction bonus) that restricts the establishment of the specific condition is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E12, wherein the second increase notification execution means can execute the increase notification in the restricted state.

  According to the above configuration, even in a restricted state where establishment of the specific condition is restricted, an increase notification can be executed, and an impression can be given as if the specific condition can be established. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest in the restricted state.

Feature E14. Setting means (main control device) in which a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and one of the setting values of the plurality of steps is set Function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101),
The rate of transition to the restricted state differs between when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set. The gaming machine according to feature E13.

  Since the transfer rate varies depending on the setting value, the setting value may be determined with certainty if it is clearly understood that the establishment of the specific condition is limited. In that respect, according to the above configuration, even if the establishment of the specific condition is restricted, the increase notification is executed. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the restricted state, and it is difficult to determine the set value. By doing this, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine or another gaming machine due to the early determination of the set value.

  In addition, it is also possible to individually apply the technical idea shown in each configuration of the other feature A group to the feature E group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature E group detailed above. It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each feature described above can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A variable display means is provided to display symbols in the final stop mode after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, and the variation of symbols starts due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop or by the lapse of a predetermined time, the special stop game advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a status (a bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine: A variable display means is provided for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbol row at the final stop, and the variation of symbols is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means for the game or by the elapse of a predetermined time, the special gaming state (bonus advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine as game machine, 32 ... Reel as circulating body, 41 ... Start lever as start operation means, 42-44 ... Stop switch as stop operation means, 64 ... Speaker which comprises auxiliary | assistant effect part, 65 ... an auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary effect part, 68 ... an instruction monitor, N8 ... an eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... a display control device as a sub-control board, 101 ... a main control device as a main control board 102: CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (9)

A plurality of orbiting bodies, in which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the orbiting bodies;
Start operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
Drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stopping the circulation of each orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery on whether or not to award a bonus to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to a visible position through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
It is advantageous for the player to have a gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. Advantageous transition means for transitioning to a specific advantageous state;
A gaming machine comprising
As the gaming state, a low advantage state and a high advantage state are set, in which the player's advantage is relatively high and low,
Low advantage transition means for transitioning the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition;
Grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the high advantageous state;
An increasing means capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition;
First increase notification execution means capable of executing an increase notification of the increase process being performed by the predetermined notification means when the increase process is performed by the increase means;
Although the specific condition is satisfied, the increase processing is not executed by the increase unit, or the unexecuted component for which the increase notification is performed but the increase notification is not performed by the increase unit is grasped Grasping means,
Second increase notification execution means capable of executing, by a predetermined notification means, the increase notification about the unexecuted portion grasped by the unexecuted portion grasping means during the predetermined specific advantageous state;
A game machine characterized by comprising: A plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and setting means for setting one setting value among the setting values of the plurality of stages is provided.
The increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means when the first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second set value different from the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the probabilities are common. A plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium are provided, and setting means for setting one setting value among the setting values of the plurality of stages is provided.
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second increase notification executing means increases the increase in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the probabilities that the notification is executed are different. First control means having at least the low-advantage transition means, and second control means having the first increase notification execution means,
The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the unexecuted part grasping means is included in the first control means. The normal game operation wherein the drive control means causes the orbiting members to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and stops the orbiting members when the stop operation means is operated age,
When the increase notification is executed by the second increase notification executing means, special drive control means is provided for controlling each circuit body so that a specific game operation in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted is performed. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein   The second increase notification executing means is capable of executing the increase notification in a game in which a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result in the predetermined specific advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 5. An execution lottery means for performing an execution lottery as to whether or not to execute the increase notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the predetermined specific advantageous state;
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the second increase notification execution means executes the increase notification in accordance with a lottery result by the execution lottery means.   The execution lottery means determines that the winning probability of the execution lottery is a first probability when the execution proceeds to the predetermined specific advantageous state in the first situation, and the second is different from the first situation to the predetermined specific advantageous state. 8. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein when the situation shifts, the winning probability of the execution lottery can be set to a second probability higher than the first probability. A first special lottery means capable of executing a first special lottery as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result;
When the lottery result by the first special lottery means is the result that the specific condition is satisfied, the execution state of at least one of the increase processing and the increase notification based on the specific condition is grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means Second special lottery means capable of executing a second special lottery that selects one of a plurality of modes including the targeted mode;
With
As the trigger result, a high probability trigger result and a low probability trigger result are set, in which the winning probability by the lottery means is relatively positive.
In the second special lottery when the winning result is the first special lottery based on the high probability opportunity result, the winning case is the first special lottery based on the low probability opportunity result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein an aspect to be grasped by the unexecuted part grasping means is more easily selected than in the second special lottery.

Images